Home

1 CONCERNING THE VG-859C

1. Next Field 1 0 1 No Current GBD 0 0 1 Fig 5 12 2 Setting next field no current GBD Table 5 12 3 Next field no current GBD setting method Next Field of The GBD is not applied to the next field The GBD is applied to the next field No Current GBD oO The Current Gamut Seq Num setting is valid The Current Gamut Seq Num setting is not valid 3 Setting the GBD profile GBDprofile 0 3 Fig 5 12 3 Setting the GBD profile Table 5 12 4 GBD profile setting method 4 Setting the affected gamut seq Affected Gamut Seq Num 1 0 15 Fig 5 12 4 Setting the affected gamut seq Table 5 12 5 Affected gamut seq num setting method Affected Gamut Seq Number XX Set the GBD Sequence number of the packet Num keys concerned Setting range 0 to 15 5 Setting the current gamut seq num EE HEN EE ENN EE HEEN EE A HEN GEN HEN HEN HEN HEN EN HEN HEN HEEN HEN HEEN HEEN HEN GE GE Current Gamut Seq Num 1 0 15 Fig 5 12 5 Setting the current gamut seq num Table 5 12 6 Current gamut seq num setting method Current Gamut Seq Number XX Set the GBD Sequence number to be applied to Num keys the video field currently transmitted Setting range 0 to 15 6 Setting the packet seq Packet Seq 3 0 3 Fig 5 12 6 Setting the packet seq Tab
2. BEG re TT F 7 11 37 1284 4 ee eA d EPI 55 ere ravn Pattern1 Other pages default page DIDI If page number 700 is selected Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 11 Setting Macrovision optional function 5 11 1 Introduction There two types of Macrovision signals 1 and 2 1 AGC signals These are used to add a multiple number of single polarity pulses and dual polarity pulses in pairs in and around the vertical blanking period 2 Color stripes Method of pseudo randomly phase modulating the color burst Macrovision works with the following TV signals NTSC M NTSC J NTSC 443 PAL 60 PAL PAL M PAL N PAL Nc and SECAM The color stripes are applied only in the DVD STB mode for the NTSC M and NTSC J TV signals Output supports VBS composite outputs and Y C video outputs e Macrovision cannot be executed at the same time as when the HDCP pattern action audio sweep closed caption V chip or Teletext function is being used For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously e An error o
3. Jer D TEC LLL e OG 5 m e e m m m NE HE Banas 3 JIT TTT TT TT TE FE SEERE gt OTIR MTT TITTET FLOTT i TITTET EENES NEUGDE HAN TINH E ETT TG HHHH i ER 11111 MTT Mt 16 x 16 character pattern table 2 of 4 FETT HANNENE TTT PITT TET TTT ET I EISE PELIS EPIS ue zm lt L Pr r 1 ELLE TT IH t TH HE ___
4. 80180 0000 0009 706 09 VEL 58012 09 16185020 LZLdO 9 6 2 1087 0971 ININ iu M 08b Obbl 00001 09 662 1679 eur 19921249 20140 SOTWNY 09 0 80 80 0000 2 00029 226 eur 19921249 H goldO 9 76 00089 097 ININ iu w 09pxOvbl 00090 09 662 1679 199949 jexid qng Jeyoeuo jexid qng 69 2 9O IVNV N N 087 061 80 80 000072 000960 056 JHOINO 999191 NIN 00 00080 09 62 veszi 676 39e orzOdosrxozivia sd rrrOA 90TVNY N N 08071 sorgor 0000 00092 96 Jie p MOUM Sr6czOdoerxOz VIS St vproA 9OWNY N N Bod 00080 097660 vagsz Lv6 552 MOPUIM 00 aym 00 007 MI9LSXOPPIVIE 8 9OWNV 000801 000002 00279 V6 161 16 160 9 6 exu MOPUIM 9600 007 1925xOPPLWIS SdpbbOA 90TYNY N N 00090 000002 00529 121421171 MOpUIM 9506 00 007 Md9zsxoz2VIa OOWNV N N Boa 9 9002 00090 000 00052 v6 0
5. 182 10 Setting the number VEMICES o geo Peter Ral ose bande 182 11 Setting the packeted GBD vertices 183 12 Setting the GBD ColorSpace 183 13 Setting the packeted range 184 Chapter6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 185 6 1 Configuration of pattern data and basic 5 185 6 171 COonngtiration Ol FET 185 6 1 2 Basic operations for 186 6 2 Seting ING Palen SAG wach EN 187 6 3 Seting NE Grape 187 64 Seng ING character 188 6 5 Setting the crosshatch pattern ceeded 190 60 Sem ING dob PAET ve 192 6r Selma ING eirele arve 194 6 6 ING coor bar eee 196 6 9 Setting the gray scale pattern 5 198 6210 SENG ME bust PAC IM ________ 200 6 11 Setting thie window pater M siue NS 201 0 12 Seting the oplioral 208 6 13
6. REFERENCE um ie 909 880 PG1 program No 606 088 ON 24 4221236 Jeg 1003 910100 9 JeJUOZINOY Jeg 1009 V99 09p IEN g 087 079 90 IVNV N N Jeg 2069 10109 g 1002 NOLVOIAVN 856 99226 086 9 666 606 894 NIN 206 MOPUIM 4 32103 209 0821 VOX 08215009 092 0008 2090 2 292114 3 4 MOPUIM 908 08ZLWOXN 994 OO TVNV N N 0821x0091 000 062 9008 9790 L06 2 MOpuIM BUIAON 1199014 6 1 4 V08 08Z4VOXN 9O0IVNV 082 009 000022 97008 229101 06 BUJON 1 184014 8 121104 MOPUIM 998 00ZLWOXN 899 NIN 0021009 9790 668 0 sayoll4 G MOPUIM V58 00ZLVOXN a94 0021009 000072 90 99 22710 58 G MODUIM 0 192114 1eu104 09 00cL VOXxn 9O IVNV N 0084009 00009 854 168 894 NIN LS WIXS 90 IVNV Bold 95010851 00000 060 29 089 09 9010 91 3110 0LVOX 894 90 IVNV N N 89 00 000 92 69002 927 9G od 68 68 68 168 88 88 88 88 88 198 88 Bolg AxH ZHN zH
7. __ __ 50 616 Te _ ____ LO uL NENNEN _ KJE NENNEN L 18 Setting the internal program table However the data which has been set cannot be saved 2 In the case of the RB 614C and RB 649 the keys corresponding to some of the functions which can be used are not featured on these remote control boxes and so these items are not supported For instance the boxes do not have LEVEL key so the video output level cannot be changed using direct display FUNCO For the differences between the keys on these two boxes and the keys on the RB 1848 remote control box refer to 10 1 3 Concerning the key operations 12 4 3 Concerning the optional functions The following two functions are options They not supported by the VG 859C standard model e Macrovision 5 11 Setting Macrovision optional function e Scroll trigger 3 3 31 Setting the scroll trigger optional function e Window 16 levels 6 11 Setting the window pattern e HDMI output multi bit mode 3 3 33 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional function e Half pixel scrolling 6 15 5 Half pixel scrolling optional function e DDC CI function 6 17 DDC CI function optional function Contact Astrodesign separately concerning support for these optional functions Chapte
8. ua 209 6 14 Setna ME programmi NAME enn 212 6 15 SENG PENE Ge 213 615 li Seting the Scrolling TDC UON Arr ee 214 1 Setting the pattern execution 214 2 Setting the graphic plane scrolling and scrolling direction 215 3 Setting the character plane scrolling and scrolling direction 216 4 Setting the graphic plane and character plane scrolling 216 5 Setting the window plane scrolling function 217 6 Setting the window scrolling direction and step 217 6 15 2 Setting the window pattern flicker function 218 1 Setting the window flicker function 218 6 15 3 Setting the palette scrolling TUMCUON uie iion rire 219 1 Setting the palette scrolling function 219 2 Setting the palette scrolling step start position and end position 219 6 15 4 Setting the simple moving 220 1 Setting the number of simple moving picture repetitions 221 6 15 5 Half pixel scrolling optional eene 222 AT Creating Patterns A 224 2 Setting half pixel scrolling function
9. 224 9 15 6 Er STE MIRC HOM vase 225 1 Sea SVG IN OCC arne 228 2 Setting the video audio display time 228 3 Setting the delay 228 GE ENN 229 6161 General GSSCMOUOM 229 6 16 2 Details Of SEUNG ee 231 Generator 231 Cl _ 232 233 6 17 DDC CI function optional 00 010000001 100 234 234 2 SENG AEA rc 234 Setting the ol and mode ee 235 2 Setting VCP codes and transfer parameters 44 11 235 6 17 3 Overview of DDC CI P TENT une 236 Chapler SELF CHECK 237 ee M 237 fo Blow tostat UP TE SCI CHECK ee EA 237 12 PES ONE ENE 238 T2 KO CHECK vanen 238 E 239 240 1 9 PAN ROEN 241 MEIN anse 242 Chapters MULT BIT MODE ett tse Qe nra dessus oda sanser 243 GenerabdescriDIDIiss uon iude be dat 243 OZ
10. ed ou S faueiod Aouanbedy ouanbai Aouanbey 1000 Jul o9u S ejdsip ON 2000100 6 m m m pijos enig 001 7201 AWS 90 IVNV 89 00 0 7 80 8 8 001 1 910 939 pijos 5e g 210006 dH SO IVNV 7 01 08 000 961 06 55012 9606 UPIM MS 00140 0795191195 SO IVNV 7 01 08 06 401 27200184 79 Aeg lt oejg AeJ6 uonepeJ6 y9 20 dO 09 95 894 OO IVNV Bold 89 0 000 v9 25966 LEG 2019 79 exuw eJ6 uonepeJ amp p9 0140 77 700 ANOS 894 SO IVNV Bold 7 01 08 000 961 H 9988 A deis 997 feo duie1 uonepeu6 eaul jeonie 22140 71 50 ANOS 80 _ DOWNY PETI pZOL lt O8ZL 0005 cl 599 deis 79 Kes6 jo 6 po eoan 6140 SMIN ANOS S0TYNY Bod vZOLXO8ZL 006 0 620109 69 826 days ze jo Jeonan 96140 9 720 NNS 72015092 0009 10191 06119 126 deis 9 9 ejeos 78 008 NNS 9OIVNV 008520 09626 8 8 0 926 A deis g Aeg suonepeJ g jeonJe ejeos 92 006 5 89M OO TVNV Bold 006xc9ll 06550 890 9 EL VL 666 days g
11. ei or 4 Contents AASTRODESIGN Test Page I DO Includes Flash and Conceal 103 Subtitle Character German Character Italian qii i Character Portuguese Spanish 2 2 Character 206 Czech Slovak White Flat 1 ET SUBCODE O suBEODE 515 Multi Page Pa JM doer EEE te ee ee 560 scu mma Pattern2 LLL ILI LLL ELI 81311 ibd hae Clock 505 Cracker FETT TITTET TITTET ETTE Me TTT TTL ETT TT
12. 102 3 Setting Hsync Hbackp and 102 4 Setting HDstart and HDWdN va iuro eer e o e eee 103 5 3 nico Nevernicalimno dalasa Y 104 Il IMAGE iM T UTEM 104 5 32 Details Often SONGS ence s bod SE UR a tuus 105 1 Setting the input mode and scanning ener 105 21 Mhe teid Mode datu obese its sau Eod du n en ai 106 3 Setting Vtotal Vdisp1 and 107 4 Setting Vsync1 Vbackp1 and 1 108 Bl Setting EOPPI and BEOPBDD 1 mee Ple e 109 o Seting S rr ti n and EQP CONFOFPE 111 7 Setting VDstart and 112 BL LEES 112 9 Setting Vsync2 Vbackp2 and Virontp2 2 pe 113 Setting EQPIDZ and EGPDD 113 5 4 Setting the output condition 114 1 Setting the sync signal output 115 2 Setting the sync signals CV CS HS and 116 3 Setting the video output
13. B EHE SEN ____________ SERRE RRR dH HHH HEE EREE 5 FEE CT ET TETT 0 REB TATE ET TT LLLLLELLIL E LELLLELEI 1011 1 081 MD e e LL LL C lt lt 16 x 16 character pattern table 3 of 4 REFERENCE ie O 16 x 16 character pattern table 4 of 4 i H H T HM 1 B 5 HH MTT BET TELET METTET BET EO TT lt oO C Q C 11 2 Concerning cards 11 2 1 PC cards whi
14. 1 Fig 4 5 2 Inputting the group number 3 Set the group data Input the program number of the timing data Tim and program number of the pattern data Pat This can be set in group data No 1 to 98 GEdit 01 Tim 850 Pat 900 GEdit 03 Tim 850 Pat 902 01 02 851 Pat 901 lt 01 04 Tim 851 Pat 903 Fig 4 5 3 Setting the group data e There is no need to perform all the settings 0 may be kept as the setting When is set for both the timing data and pattern data the data will not be executed in the group display mode It will be skipped when the 2 key or key is pressed If 0 is set for either the timing or pattern data only data for which 0 is not set will be executed For instance when 0 is set for the timing data only the pattern data is executed and the timing data will be the same as the data last output There 1 simpler way to input the group data settings if all the timing data and pattern data are to be set in the same program number next page Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES When setting all the timing data and pattern data in the same program number Press the PROG key The LED of the PROG key lights and the LCD screen is switched GEdit 01 Prg 850 01 02 851 Fig 4 5 4 Setting the group data PROG Input the program number The sa
15. 0194214 Z 160104 0194214 1 0 4 0 19 21 0 160104 932 201 JEWO4 p ewo 5124201 z yewo 30110 380104 3110 2010 0 18104 200 yising 18104 151186 sung 2121 04 15 04 215104 JEWJO4 1504 pasung 0121 03 sung Jajoeseyy e 81 81 suoneoumeds yS3A JOJOBIEYD N 9 9 Li J9 98J8U eJeu eseulu 79 59 6x4 JojoeJeu 9 JejoeJeu H 05 2619 9 Jejejeu H 81 71 6 2 y H z 2 H 26 68 91x94 c 19 1 H 8 6X4 ZXG H Jejoe1eu 1511 9 98JEU2 6 4 1SI J9 9EJEU 0 0 0 wopuiM 9814 MopulM 96001 0 MOpUIM 00L 992 0 96 MOPUIM 96001 0 562 GGZ MOPUIM 00L 992 0 0 95001 0562 0 29 6 MOPUIM 95001 1 9 Z 9p ejep 880 909 05 54
16. Bunes y si SU Bunes y episino si ejep 99 Ul dyoeg y apisjno si Jeo eu Ul Bunes y apisjno si ui dsipA Bunes y si 0 A uonduose JJ3Aouejeddiqg3aou ASdr Aejag ou Sdr Joa geq esuoor JON 10149 MOV 419 WNS 40 WNS 42940 GIGS 10 19 9X3 JON uonoy JOJJO 10119 YOV GIGS as 26 99 Vg 96 GG cS LG OG MOV LOGG Vt Ly cv Lv Or H dn pue LLI 10419 poJIeJ a seu t OL v 01 1949H 4 VIL OL 19 uonnoexe Buunp uonoy 4015 uonnoexe sem deems dOLS M uonnoexe sy peddoijs UOISIACGJORN UOISIAOJOE N 4015 sey uonounj uognoex
17. 83 Chapter5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING 87 5 1 Configuration of timing data and basic nnne nnns 87 5 1 1 Basic operations for 5 87 5 1 2 Horizontal timing data configuration 1161 89 5 1 3 Vertical timing data configuration 90 5 1 4 Output condition data configuration 115 91 5 1 5 Audio output data configuration 1 5 92 5 1 6 HDMI output data configuration 1 5 92 5 1 7 InfoFrame data configuration list 93 5 1 8 ACP ISRC packet data configuration 1 5 95 5 1 9 Closed caption V chip data configuration 161 96 5 1 10 Teletext data configuration list 96 5 1 11 Macrovision data configuration list 4 optional function 96 5 1 12 Gamut MetaData Packet data configuration 1 5 nennen 97 5 1 19 DVI HDMI output timing 5 4 Faunus aorta np Fab na rapa 98 5 2 Setting the horizontal timing 100 SEN PENN AA a RR 100 5 2 2 Details of 101 1 Setting the input mode dot clock frequency 101 2 Setting Hperiod Hdisp
18. 0 emm _ ISRC1 Validity info UPC EAN is invalid ISRC is valid 2 Setting catalogue code UPC EAN 1 13 of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Catalogue code 0000000000000 Fig 5 8 12 Setting the catalogue code of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 13 ISRC1 Packet catalogue code setting method Catalogue Code Number XXXXXXXXXXXXX This sets the catalogue code 1 to 13 keys 1 13 in sequence from the left 1 3 Setting the country code ISRC 1 2 of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Country code 00 Fig 5 8 13 Setting the country code of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 14 ISRC1 Packet country code setting method Country Code Input using number keys This sets the country code 2 letters of 1 2 key or from 2 from the left the alphabet isplay 1 There are two ways to input the characters input the character codes 20H to directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However characters cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display FUNCO When inputting the Country Code move the cursor inside when exiting from the setting menu move it to end at the top right 14 Setting the first owner code ISRC 3 5 of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 First owner code 000 Fig 5 8 14 Setting the first owner code of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 15 ISRC1 Packet
19. 1 4 Setting the AFD Color and AFD background color These settings are for the AFD pattern optional pattern No 1F which is used to evaluate the aspect ratio under the EIA CEA 861 standard Refer to Concerning the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect ratio presented later in these instructions AFD Color R255G255B255 AFD BG R128G128B128 Fig 5 4 14 Setting the AFD Color and AFD background color Table 5 4 16 AFD Color and AFD background color setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display AFD Color Number color of the optional pattern No 1F circle is designated Setting range 0 to 255 AFD BG Number The background color of the optional pattern No 1F circle is keys designated Setting range 0 to 255 1 5 Setting the AFD bars These settings are for the AFD pattern optional pattern No 1F which is used to evaluate the aspect ratio under the EIA CEA 861 standard Refer to Concerning the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect ratio presented later in these instructions AFD Bar OG OB 0 Fig 5 4 15 Setting the AFD bars Table 5 4 17 AFD bar setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display AFD Bar Number The color of SideBar LetterBox of optional pattern No 1F is keys designated Setting range 0 to 255 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Concernin
20. 245 8 2 1 Changes level Sa 245 Contents 8 2 2 Changes in timing SENGS Lae 246 8 2 3 Changing the internal 247 8 3 ursi E a N NA 248 Ghapter9 Concerning the xv Y CC FEATURES E oie eg E 249 a a a E 249 9 2 Output Method for xvYCC Paltlerris beer 249 93 250 Chapter 10 REMOTE CONTROL up 253 AOA 16 PBN eee 253 TOMT nt zen eda adored gt 253 je E FEE 253 10 1 3 Concerning the key operations 254 Chapter VRERERENC E oe 255 vet ETATEN 255 MESA 1800 ETE E m m 255 11 12 Optional pater dala ss ER poo Lee need UE 272 11 1 2 1 Concerning the xvYCC evaluation patterns Nos 0 274 11 1 2 2 Concerning the DDC patterns No OE 22 23 2 275 11 1 2 3 Concerning the AFD pattern 276 11 1 2 4 Concerning the HDMI speaker check 27 276 11 1 2 5 Concerning the Lipsync pattern 33 276 11 1 2 6 Concerning the HDMI CEC pattern 35 _ 277 11 1 2 7 Concerning the DDC CI pattern
21. 6 4 Setting the character pattern The following items are set for the character pattern data 1 Format and font 2 Character code and cell size 1 Set the format and font Format Chara List 0 2 Font 7 9 0 2 Fig 6 4 1 Setting the format and font Table 6 4 1 Format and font setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Chara List Character list Format The character pattern 20H to DFH specified by Font is repeatedly displayed All 1 Chara All one character The character pattern character pattern or user character pattern specified by Character code is repeatedly displayed Corner amp Center Corner amp center HHH The character pattern e characters character pattern or user character pattern specified lt gt by Character code is 3 characters displayed in the layout shown in the figure on the right The character pattern set 20H to DFH to be used selected 11 1 4 Character pattern data Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 2 Set the character code and cell size horizontal vertical Code 48 H 20 Cell 1616 1 255 Fig 6 4 2 Setting character code cell size Table 6 4 2 Character code and cell size setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Character code Input using number keys This sets the character pattern to be Code SHIFT ke
22. Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints CHARA CROSS CURSOR KYO COLOR GRAY NAME KY1 gi H jj B i ij oors o Hs BURST o SoS FORMAT B B Y INV VS TIMING face 2 3 AIA 5 6 R R Y G Y G S YPbPr KY2 3 n 3l i T jl T 2 1 4 i JE i 8 9 F E KY5 KXO KX1 KX2 KX3 KX4 KX5 KX6 KX7 Fig 12 3 7 RB 1848 key matrix KXO KX1 KX2 KX3 KX4 KX5 KX6 KX7 Fig 12 3 8 RB 614C key matrix ze pe ae e INV INC DEC 2 AX x KX2 KX3 KX4 KX5 KX6 KX7 Fig 12 3 9 RB 649 key matrix 12 3 7 RS 232C D Sub 9 male connector 6 9 Fig 12 3 10 Pin layout Table 12 3 7 Pin numbers ENSE GN 22 0 ormas 32 1 Rore _ _ Fe tame ony 721 _ s o RTS reqvestiosens _ Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints 12 4 12 4 1 Item Checkpoints This instruction manual has been drawn up on the basis of firmware version 6 00 for the VG 859C VG859 VG 859A VG 859B If the firmware version of the generator used is older or if it is a newer version and there are functions not described in this instruction manual contact an Astrodesign sales representative For the steps to take in order to check the version refer to 7 1 Concerning the self check Furthermore all of the specification manuals refer
23. 65 4 3149 62140 0990801026 09 d a 0904026 08 00005 996 3LdINS ILNS 21140 6650080026 OddadA fafa 080 061 orses gee 96 ISNY ose 134 ISNY 6140 0008010861 ogor fd 08010861 00005 0 ves uonisog ejdsig waned ISNY 10H waed SNY 36140 6761650080056 OdsidadA 080 086 066 686 46 1881U09 SNV 6 ISNY 9 ISNY ZHN zH ejdsip Jo ON JeuozuoH PG3 program No 970 999 666 046 ON 9d Chapter 11 REFERENCE PG3 No 960 to 968 are evaluation patterns for xvYYC The patterns are not displayed correctly on the TVs that do not support xvYYC 11 1 2 Optional pattern data ES im patterns 00H to 1FH page 1 of 2 Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern 256 color block color TT ITC pattern 9 windows 64 gradation block gray 09 Crosshatch amp circle amp 11 ITC pattern 19 character Multi burst from white to black Internal optional pattern data TIM 64 gradation block gray from b
24. 9 uojeussoJo 211 61140 20100 9019 9567 00140 1002 2018 952 9 9 pijos ue gu pijos 894 196 m w PJ __ 9 N yoelg 499214 0 1945114 0 4 MOPUIM 29591 eur 9 9p 109 319 5 10109 31 dINS 92140 _____ 9 YOJEYSSOJO 09 A 09 100 pijos 969 05 940 pijos PG1 program No g9 96 H waed 060 89H ooxoorosz 00ldO Sr009vS3A 808 Wl 8 896 89 9 6 196 0 96 u 7 9 0 OG EL 000 09 529 796 SOWNV N N com 28 NVO3S NIN 09 720 753 SO WN Bold 95010851 00080 00009 8659 al w wes 90 IVNV N Bold 6 028 96 90 09 26906 656 g9 N pIJOS 9OIVNV 9 6 lt 6 02896 60009 26906 966 N NI IVOIQ3N 9O IVNV N Bold v8Sx0ZLbb 00c 9v 9 0 09 9Lc LE 0 1090 omm ms 696 com me ri v v m ATH uu 9 Ew m
25. ouenbaeij ner 09 ejdsip Jo on 10q e1UOZUOH d 09 09 100 OZA 0ZH 10d 0Z A 0Z H 100 umopyind 0 199014 0 eUUO4 MOPUIM 2 199014 0 4 199014 0 4 2 546 CC y 6 6 016 ON 696 076 ON Lu gt LLI 9 5509 Y TE Jeg 1002 2 896 52 Jeg 1002 8 196 _ 128 1002 7666940801 006171 OOAAX 4 Bolg O80LXOZ6L 05589 6666 2619 906 Jeg 10100 ZL 0590801 0261 2 SOTYNY wi 080 026 052 00006 02192 Ex 8 128 1002 8 099 0901 026171 2 080 LX0Z6 052 000709 06 66 5 128 1002 SOTYNY 080LX0Z6L 096 JEG 1002 2 296 Jeg 1002 8 OZZX08ZL 052 00009 000 Jeg 1002 t waned 39A X VOLdO v6 6SOdOZLXO8ZLVIA O29A d 00 082 GLV HL 6666 656 096 111104010001 5807 o 0 p9 0 NENNEN RN po do sf o o o o o 9 10100 952 06 55012 06 32185040 10140 9
26. 153 13 Setting the country code ISRC 1 2 of the ISRC1 153 14 Setting the first owner code ISRC 3 5 of the ISRC1 154 15 Setting the year of recording code ISRC 6 7 of the ISRC1 154 16 Setting the recording item code ISRC 8 12 of the ISRC1 154 5 9 Setting the closed caption and V chip 155 VITO OUCH ERR HOP acer 155 5 9 2 Details of closed caption item 05 157 1 Seting NE GUP TA Seat tier aet Reach 157 eee 157 3 Setting the internal caption data output mode and 158 Ar d ternal GADUON dad 159 9 Treating extended character reader 161 5 9 3 DetailS Of V ehp ein sengs oce ue tet orare 164 1 Setting the rating 164 2 Setting the MPAA and U S TV rating 5 165 3 Setting the U S TV rating system extension 167 4 Setting the Canadian English and Canadian Fre
27. 278 11 1 3 User character pattern 279 1121242 Gharacter pattern areas 284 27 CONCEMNING FC CALS ee 292 1122 17 Cards WIN Cal PE seen 292 11 2 2 registration formals due 292 11 2 3 Examples the data registered on a PC 293 11 2 4 Copying and deleting registered 293 1 9 able OL error messages Je _ aa 294 11 4 Standard signal timing signal 298 Chapter12 Specifications and checkpoints 0200000111001 1 303 12 M SPENST 303 2711 iP eR eee eee 303 1212 Bernal Mena ES ivoire tees metodi 304 CS SING ar 304 12 2 Concerning the DDC power supply tea tet pau nene 305 1252 306 12 31 senal output ou dude 306 222 307 12 9 2 Analog D SUB 308 1224 BENN 308 12222 YVES ONE 3
28. COLOR Color bar pattern 8 or BURST Burst pattern WINDOW Window pattern A Option pattern 1 OPT Option pattern 2 PC Card 5 amp T Y Jor Jor 4 System setting item selected Setting reflected SAVE LED blinks SAVE LED off Setting saved Config edit Set Up Auto display YPbPr coefficient table edit VG 859C Func 4 1 ser PC card copy r SET ES EE 2 y jor 4 Execution mode display node HDCP setting Execution interval version romateicicisNG HDCP setting CURSOR Cursor pattern sET Setting reflected Jor NAME Program SAVE LED blinks LED off E Pattern action Setting saved CEC function DDC CI function Group data edit Calibration Sot Up Optional functions Character data edit ASTRO VG 859C Instruction Manual NOTICE A n incorrectly collated manual or a manual with missing pages will be replaced All copyrights pertaining to this product are the property of Astrodesign This manual may not be used or copied in whole or in part without written permission The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice due to impr
29. cursor x function Character pattems Cursor pattems Graphic colors Timing data setting data setting Pattern data setting Setting reflected signals output VG 859C Signal output FUNC 2 SET Program edit func 3 r EBENEN Number of programselected fF PC card edit BEN EN Program enable disable 2 jr gt or 4 SAVE LED blinks SAVE SET LED off Setting reflected signals output Setting saved MING 009 Horizontal Timing 9 Macrovision Timing data setting Timing data Horizontal Timing Vertical Timing 2 Output conditions 3 AUDIO outputs HDMI outputs 5 InfoFrame 6 ACP ISRC Packet 7 Closed caption V chip 3 TeleT ext 9 Macrovision A Meta Data Packet Eoin EE Oo Pattern select CI CEC functions DDO CI functions Setting itemof each data selected or chang Program name HDCP enable disable Setting Pattern data setting Pattern data Ete l0 Patternselect te tet _ Other functions 15 cispiay B CHARA Character pattern 3 or CROSS Crosshatch pattern FUNC 1 SET NEN SET or CIRCLE Circle pattern 16
30. jeuosJed e UO eui JEWJOH Deneuuoj jou SI 941 pJe2 IA paljeysul ueeq jou seu pJeo 991 JON PJEO N pled UO seu 10119 JO 10419 sseooy PJEO N peJunooo seu 10119 SIUM 33 10419 SUM NO d33 epoo Jesn e 10413 10 149 HHJ J SN Jequunu dno46 y 4049 10119 ON dnouc Jequunu uJeJ60Jd y Ul 10 13 10149 OUAS A peJunooo seu OSU SEM uy puewwogyepun ar y y ui seu wow WWNO a uogoe uonduoseg 6ess w oug _ H epoo Error codes 1EH to 3FH Error codes 40H to 5 AAO 0 pue 2 31 WOd YILNI 0 195 4JO NO 24 uey Jeuous eui 195 esueoi JO uo 1eJnjoejnueuJ y 2 Bunes du yOoUD HEISGA 810 A au 49840 eDueJ Bunes au 4994 dsipA d4oeqA e 0 abue Bunes au 4984 eDueJ Bunes ay Y29490 UONDE 01 10 1
31. 2 steps moves by 1 step When Action Interval 1 is set to 2V and Action Interval 2 to 3V Fig 6 15 2 Example settings for 2 3 pull down 2 _Setting the e graphic plane gt scrolling and scrolling direction G SCR OFF 0 1 G Dir L D 0 9 Fig 6 15 3 Setting the graphic plane scrolling ON OFF and direction Table 6 15 4 Graphic plane scrolling ON OFF and direction setting method Scrolling Scrolling is not executed Factory setting G SCR Scrolling is executed Scrolling Mov The display start coordinates are moved and simple moving direction picture is executed 1 G Dir Scrolling toward the bottom left Scrolling is executed in the designated direction 2 IB o 3 Scrolling downward RD Scrolling toward the bottom right Scrolling toward the left R Scrolling toward the right Scrolling toward the top left 8 JU Scrolling upward 9 RU Scrolling toward the top right 1 For details on the simple moving picture refer to 6 15 4 Setting the simple moving picture function 3 Setting the character plane scrolling and scrolling direction C SCR OFF 0 1 C Dir L D 1 9 Fig 6 15 4 Setting the character plane scrolling ON OFF and scrolling direction Table 6 15 5 Character plane scrolling ON OFF and scrolling direction setting method C SCR Scrolling is executed Scrolling Scrolling is executed in the direction designated direction con Sct ewer toward th
32. Innz9s lt y ui jeuBis ON 0 qdl INAS H NE 17701 Iv MISTER ZHIN8ET v4 40 2 6277 1 ONS dao BUMUEIG SANDY jeu Is ou S 676 876 2 9d 6L6 T 9d do sxoz4 Lv6 9V6 7 Od 81671 9d d 2SLN degpxoc 886 86 Dd CV6 Lv6 Ot 6 c Od LL6 9L6 1 Dd dozZ 786 86 Od 1667956 lt 6 294 TL6 0L6 T Dd dosor Od GL6 L6 T Od IGEOL 986 G86 Dd 6 6 856 6 2 Od 6 6 TS6 T Od 1080T 689 889 289 veo Teg 620 829 159 929 szo v 209 109 INSA qld INAS H 9 pos 1781 LOT 170E T HT ZHNS ET L T Fvo f eo 1 zo 7 82k GSp6 c Od 699 co 769 reo oco ezo 829 179 929 579 vag 619 mitt T im f p ET BE TE ANNO INN6Z9 ozo s LETT T sp vv BODIE X T Ope Tex eum T o set Ier 7 2 9
33. vet E bend 4 4 i qud 3 Gerd y Brevene 21 5 5 3 i i evo ve bte pee ved LR PT PEN NR 5 525 p 3 8 i 3 i F7H 11 1 4 Character pattern data 5 x 7 character pattern table 1 of 2 20H 22H 26H 2 H L 24H um n m 2 28H 29H 2CH 2FH 2 pg 33H 34H 35H 37H 32H 31H d i 5 3CH 3DH gt SE 39H zi i at oS 41H 42H 43H A4H 45H 47H Li zi D i 15 48H 49H 4AH 4DH FE L F3 51H 52H 53H 55H 56H 57H m ae 5 5BH DCH SDH Ji at r1 rs 61H 62H 63H 64H 65H 66H 67H F1 LL pi D i 69H 6AH 6BH 6CH 6DH us ph 72H 73H 74H 75H 6H 77H c 3 pi 8H 79H at x i M zi e REFERENCE 6 ie O 5 x 7 character pattern table 2 of 2
34. y Ados Jeyig ezig qdvo IN Depeeoxe Ajloedeo SS9 10 9 1821 JO joedeo e e esf pJeo y p4eo e uo doo spew sem eziS CHVO W JeJnjoejnueui BY 19e UOD anie y nd no y uo 10119 sng JOU SEM 9j doo eu LO JeJnjoejnueui BY 12205 SJN IE v peunooo 10119 UY 10113 VING WSJS S 214 240104 st Error codes 5DH and up ever 69 000042 7 401 22 OG 669 798 5 20 INVO3S INVO3S 0 0 asenu ees e am se sm o Deme es aio ev Goo een wa no Lolo lol ev esr urea ees stove ren Lo s r scree wa one 09 _ To To Per mme e mene aves c fos 69 9 0 18 8 kuwa 196 166 696 440 0 Grocery 82 09
35. 5 Setting the interval VChipInterval 1V 1 1023 Fig 5 9 9 Setting the interval Table 5 9 17 Interval setting method Number keys 1 1023 unit V 5 10 Setting Teletext 5 10 1 Introduction Teletext complies with the final draft of ETSI 300 706 Ver1 2 1 Teletext works with the PAL PAL B D H I TV signals The Teletext output supports VBS composite outputs and Y C video outputs e Teletext cannot be executed at the same time as when the HDCP pattern action audio sweep closed caption V chip or Macrovision function is being used For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously An error of 5mV occurs in the white level of the images when the Teletext function is started up For details on the item settings refer to the page concerned in the reference column of the table below Table 5 10 1 Reference page for details on Teletext settings Setting item Reference 1 Output p 172 Data transfer mode List of internal Teletext data p 173 174 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES What is Teletext Teletext is the name of a system used to send still picture program data of text and graphics after multiplexing it in the vertical sync blanking period of the TV signals Programs broadcast in Teletext include subtitled broadcasts news broadcasts weather for
36. ASTRO Programmable Video Signal Generator for DigitalTV VG 859C Instruction Manual Ver 2 00 ASTRO Programmable Video Signal Generator for DigitalTV VG 859C Instruction Manual 2007 9 Ver 2 00 ASTRODESIGN Inc Contents BEFORE OP ERATION o igara Ule ile n xi SAFE TY PRECAUTION MEME xi CONCERNING THE CONFIGURATION OF THIS MANUAL xiii What is packed with the XIV Chapter CONCERNING THE VG 859C 1848 0 0 0000 nennen nnn 1 TT SSC gt COU RET Em 1 2 FN 1 13 Dale 3 1 4 Concerning eee 5 1 5 Concerning the operating 5 1 6 Panel parts and their 6 LOT VG 859C ront panel _________ ______________ 6 1 6 2 859 rear 7 VE EN 8 Chape 2 OPERATING PROCEDURE S en 9 2 1 Concerning VG 859C s 9 2 2 Operating mode when the generator s power is just turned 10 2 3 Concerning the cursor
37. Scaling unknown 0 3 Colorimetry No Data 0 3 Fig 5 7 6 Setting the scaling and colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 7 AVI InfoFrame scaling and colorimetry setting method Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 7 _ Setting the video code and repetition of AVI InfoFrame 0 mu VideoCode 1 0 59 Repetition 1 1 10 Fig 5 7 7 Setting the video code and repetition of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 8 AVI InfoFrame video code and repetition setting method XX Video Code Number Setting range 0 to 59 keys Repetition Number XX Setting range 1 to 10 keys 8 Setting the top and bottom bars of AVI InfoFrame m TopBar 0 0 65535 BottomBar 0 0 65535 Fig 5 7 8 Setting the top bar and bottom bar of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 9 AVI InfoFrame top bar and bottom bar setting method Top Bar XXXXX Setting range 0 to 65535 keys Bottom Bar XXXXX Setting range 0 to 65535 keys 9 _ Setting the left and right bars of AVI InfoFrame a uu LeftBar 0 0 65535 RightBar 0 0 65535 Fig 5 7 9 Setting the left and right bars of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 10 AVI InfoFrame left and right bar setting method Left Bar XXXXX Setting range 0 to 65535 keys Right Bar XXXXX Setting range 0 to 65535 keys 0 Setting RGB quantization range and extended colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame A Quant Default 0 2 ExtColor xvYCC601 0 2 Fig 5 7 10 Setting the RGB q
38. VG 859C s internal programs No 850 to 999 cannot be selected as the copy Fig 4 4 6 Inputting the copy destination data destinations program numbers 4 copy other programs repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES a Copying user character patterns CHR D Data a Copy 1 Input the user character code to FOH to whose character pattern is to copied and press the SET key The VG 859C s internal user character patterns CHR Data Copy to FFH can also be selected as the copy Source CHR EO TUUS Fig 4 4 7 Inputting the copy source user character code 2 To copy the data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Input the user character code to EFH serving as the copy destination and press the SET key The data is now written into the copy destination CHR Data Copy Dist CHR E1 The VG 859C s internal user character patterns zx FOH to FFH cannot be selected as the copy Fig 4 4 8 sources Inputting the copy destination user character code 4 To copy other user character patterns repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared a Copying image data IMG Data Copy 1 Use the number keys to input the image data number 1 to 64 serving as the copy source and press th
39. d d 002 009 0009 8 00008 0007001 98 2 sien ex oomw _ owes ee oo praam _ ow ou eo donors eoa oomm ww oem om ve C reoeo se sens nel ex oomw ala ws am remiss errr srmowem cows a esu om _____ onem semen ex oomw fa emu Z 9 ZL009VS3 g9 009 008 00006 98 27 10 658 L oom eon _ Gimme was eu oomw _ wm om Q 62 191 ss oorvsan dou d N Bod 0009 00516 08058 98 6 og 2 5 TE ZH ZH De 3 wayjed wayed 1009 ed ou S Auejod 5 ou g e dsip Jo ON e1UOZIJOH 6 8 068
40. gt lt 4 4 9 D o Table 4 10 7 Bcaps error displays 2 Sink device status device status VG 859C setting den Bcaps EDID setting HDCP version HDMI mode Ver 1 1 Ver 1 0 HDMI1 0 Setting HDMM 1 Setting DVI HDCP1 0 HDMI1 0 HDMM 1 BEEN DVI HDCP1 1 EDID Check HDMI1 0 HDMM 1 1 DVI HDCP1 1 HDMI Ver 1 0 Homo HDMI1 1 Setting HDMI HDCP1 0 Setting 2 2 TAE 2 2 2 4 4 4 O O O O 1 1 HDMI1 0 HDMI1 1 HDMI HDCP1 1 EDID Check gt 4 O O HDMI HDCP1 1 1 When AUTO is established as the HDMI mode the Bcaps error is determined by the status of the device to which the VG 859C is connected but the HDCP itself functions in the HDCP version which was set by HDCP setting Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 11 How to execute calibration calibration FUNCD This section describes how the video output levels are calibrated Since the VG 859C s video output levels were adjusted during its shipment inspection using a 1 5 meter long cable there is no need to calibrate the generator for normal use When the cable used to connect the generator with the display is long or external conditions cause the video output levels to be at variance from the settings proceed with calibration to suit the conditions concerned
41. Action Interval1 for the scroll setting Refer to 6 15 1 Setting the scrolling 1 Setting the window flicker function ON OFF NENNEN EE W SCR OFF W FLK OFF 0 1 P SCR OFF 0 1 Fig 6 15 8 Setting the window flicker function ON OFF Table 6 15 10 Window flicker ON OFF setting method W SCR Refer to 6 15 1 Setting the scrolling Flicker o OFF Do not execute window flicker W FLK Execute window flicker P SCR Refer to 6 15 3 Setting the palette scrolling Other settings used in the same screen display are described in the settings section for each item Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 15 3 Setting the palette scrolling function Set the following items for the palette scroll setting Palette scroll moves to the referent in the LUT Look Up Table This is valid only for the graphics plane Table 6 15 11 Palette scrolling setting method Palette scrolling ON OFF Execute palette scrolling ON OFF Execution interval Specifies the execution interval how many V to vary the step amount once This setting uses the same value as Action Interval1 for the scroll setting Refer to 6 15 1 Setting the scrolling Step Palette variation amount per execution and direction setting Start position Palette start level End position
42. Fig 5 7 21 Setting the type and version of MPEG InfoFrame 22 Setting the bit rate of MPEG InfoFrame BitRate 0 000 000 2 0 4294M967K295Hz Fig 5 7 22 Setting the bit rate of MPEG InfoFrame Table 5 7 20 MPEG InfoFrame bit rate setting method I LCD Setting item Key Description display Bit Rate Number XXXXM Setting range 0 to 4294967295 keys XXXK Each bit rate can be set in increments of 1000 XXXHz 23 Setting the frame and field repeat of MPEG InfoFrame Frame unknown 0 3 FldRepeat New 0 1 Fig 5 7 23 Setting the frame and field repeat of MPEG InfoFrame Table 5 7 21 MPEG InfoFrame frame and field repeat setting method LC Setting item ey Description display 1 1 K D Frame 2 3 Field Repeat FldRepeat An existing field is set repeatedly 5 8 Setting the and ISRC Packets This section provides details of the settings for the ACP and ISRC Packet items For details on the ACP Packet and ISRC Packets refer to DVD standard DVD Forum DVD Specifications for Read Only Disc Part 4 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS Ver 1 March 1999 DVD Forum DVD Specifications for Read Only Disc Part 4 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS Version up Information from 1 1 to 1 2 2000 HDMI standard High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1 1 Table 5 8 1 Reference pages for setting details TD Reference M Reference Settin
43. Fig 6 5 1 Setting the mode and format Table 6 5 1 Mode and format setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Line Line mode number of crosshatch lines is used to specify the interval dot Dot mode The number of dots between the crosshatch_ patterns is used to specify the interval Format from Center Center of In the dot mode the point to start the drawing is Format screen selected This item is invalid in the line mode 1 from LeftTop Top left of screen 2 Set the and V interval and line width Interval H 20 V 20 Width H 1 V 1 Fig 6 5 2 Setting the interval and line width Table 6 5 2 Interval and line width setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Interval Number XXXX In the line mode the number of crosshatch lines is set Interval keys In the dot mode the number of dots between the crosshatch H V patterns is set Setting range 0 to 9999 Line width Number XXX Setting range 1 to 15 dot Width keys H V 1 The crosshatch in the or V direction is not displayed if 0 is set for the or interval Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Correlation between interval and mode lt Example 1 gt lt 2 gt Line mode Dot mode Interval H 5 V 4 Interval H 300 V 250 Format From top left V 250 dots 4 lines 5 lines H 300 dots Correlation between interval an
44. NIN 066 o0mw Pa wow 9 MOPUIM G 9 00L01080L 0Z6LVI3 9O IVNV Wl 0800066 009 871 00000 052 99 546 09 09 10d 6 9 01 664 0 080 00080 066 86 MOPUINMSYDNH 1 0 EW04 9OTYNY d 0801006 00008 ossee zie an ea ledene oom ala ma MopulM 169914 324404 6209080 7026 O IVNV d d 0801026 0Sc v4 000 52 62 82 9 6 1299014 6 YEWO yeOdogolxozelvia HdrrrOA _ d 08005 000 00 76 UNON 2 19014 8 euso mopu 6200801061718 sowny d 08010861 sures 09667 66 616 san oo a tempor cow mw erm sre to venn einama oom a n ma 0 299014 6 MOPUIM 90WNY d coors 00 06 soualaljip ZHN zH ayy ed ou S
45. Number keys VCP XX Sets the transfer command VCP code Setting range 0 to FF Value Number XXXXX Sets the parameter value to be sent from the keys VG 859C to the connected device Setting range 0 to 65535 This setting is valid only when Set VCP Feature is selected in the Mode setting 6 17 3 Overview of DDC CI pattern The DDC CI pattern Option Pattern No 3B is displayed as shown below DDC CI Pattern b Port DVI 3 Mode Get VCP Feature Displayed only when 4 VCP Code 10h Mode is set to Set Value 100 E Write 6Eh 51h 82h 01h 10h ACh Read lt 6Fh 6Eh 88h 02h 00h 10h 00h OOh 64h 001 64h A4h gt Result PASS Displayed only when 8 Mode is set to Get Value 100 Fig 6 17 3 DDC CI pattern Table 6 17 4 DDC CI Pattern Display Items Display Contents ro Output mode used for DDC CI transfer This item is set on the DVI or Dsub VG 859C DDC CI transfer mode Get VCP Feature Get status of connected device Set VCP Feature Send control command to connected device VCP Code Transfer command set in Hex 4 Value Displayed only when Mode is set to Set VCP Feature Parameter value transferred from the VG 859C to the connected device 5 Write Data sent from the VG 859C This item displays the result of transmission 6 Red Data received by the VG 859C 7 Result Transfer result PASS Transfer ended normally NG Transfer failed Value Display
46. Product end PRODUCT Fig 5 7 14 Setting the product of SPD InfoFrame Table 5 7 14 SPD InfoFrame product setting method Product Input using number keys Max 16 characters SHIFT key or display 1 4 There are two ways to input the characters input the character codes 20H to directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However characters cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display When inputting the Product move the cursor inside when exiting from setting menu move it to end at the top right 1 5 Setting the source device of SPD InfoFrame SrcDevice unknown 0 Fig 5 7 15 Setting the source device of SPD InfoFrame Table 5 7 15 SPD InfoFrame source device setting method Source Device No setting SrcDevice M ye Blu Ray Blu Ray Disc BD SuperAuCD Super Audio CD Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 6 Setting tl the type and version of Audio InfoFrame AUDIO InfoFrame Type 4 Ver 1 1 Fig 5 7 16 Setting the type and version of Audio InfoFrame 1 7 Setting the channel count and coding type of Audio InfoFrame ChannelCnt Refer 1 8 CodingType Refer 0 E Fig 5 7 17 Setting the channel count and coding type of Audio InfoFrame Table 5 7 16 Audio InfoFrame channel count and coding type setting method Refer The
47. Set the sum within the following range HDstart HDwidth lt Hperiod 6 The setting range of the dot clock frequency for the VG 859 859A is 5 000 to 200 000 MHz n addition to the above other restrictions apply to the DVI and HDMI outputs 5 1 13 Timing restrictions on DVI and HDMI outputs p 98 Different restrictions apply in the multi bit mode optional function Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE p 243 5 1 3 Vertical timing data configuration list Non interlace progressive scanning 71 Serration Vblanking EQPfp EQPb gt y gt Vsync Vfrontp Vtotal Interlace scanning Serration is ps Vblanking Vsync vbackp Vfrbiltp 0 5H7 _ Vsync 0 5 Vfrontp 1 Vtotal 0 5H m VDline VDline X VDstart VDstart 0 5H Vertical sync frequency 15 6 Hz and up Timing data Setting item Setting range Remarks timing Non interlace interlace 4 sync interlace amp video ___ Tq 22 Vtotal 0 000 to 99 999 ms 4 to 4096 H Non interlace progressive 1H increments 1 2 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H 0 5H increments 235 EQPbp 1 2 fa om 0 1 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4095 0 H 0 5H increments 2H or more Vfrontp and Vblanking are calculated from the values of other setting items only in non interlace scanning mode in
48. Table 6 16 3 Operation code and parameter number setting method Op Code Setting range 00 to FFh For setting the operation code operation command to be sent by the VG generator Parameter Setting range 00 to 14 number For setting the parameter number of data to be sent by the VG generator Tx Parameter1 7 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tx Parameter8 14 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Fig 6 16 5 Setting the parameter Table 6 16 4 Parameter setting method Parameter Number XX Setting range 00 to FFh 1 to 14 keys For setting the parameter which identifies the data to be sent Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting the Rx data Establish the settings concerning the commands to which the VG generator is to respond Rx Initiator Oh 0 Destiantion Oh 0 Fig 6 16 6 Setting the initiator and destination addresses Table 6 16 5 Initiator and destination address setting method Initiator Logical Number X Setting range 0 to Fh Address keys For setting the logical address of the initiator address of the device initiating the transmission of the commands to which the VG generator is to respond Destination Number X Setting range 0 to Fh Logical Address keys For setting the logical address of the destination address of the device to which the data is to be sent to which are sent the commands that the VG generator is to respond to Rx Op Code Oh 00 FF Par
49. What to have ready Execution procedure Provide the following equipment for executing Follow the steps below for calibration calibration e Oscilloscope Calibration procedure A model which can measure voltage levels below 2mV during 700mV measurements is recommended Reference voltage level adjustments e Multimeter e Output the reference voltage for A model with DC voltage accuracy of 0 5 RGB each rdg 5 dgt or less is recommended e Measure the output voltage using the multimeter e 5 ohm terminator A model with V S W R characteristics of less than S d h d 1 1 is recommended et and save the measure reference voltage values e BNC cable Cable used for connecting the VG 859C with the display Execute automatic calibration Finely adjust the video levels End 1 Executing calibration Display the setting screen on which calibration is initiated Wait for about 15 minutes after turning on the generator s power to ensure that the generator s operation is stable before initiating calibration 1 Press the FUNC key D key and SET key Select Function D 0 Calibration Fig 4 11 1 Selecting the function 2 Press the 0 key and select the automatic calibration function AutoCalibration OFF 0 1 Fig 4 11 2 Selecting ON or OFF for the automatic calibration function 2 Adjust the reference voltage level By using the internal set
50. ouAg dnojes oepiA pue ou S oepiA dnjes eu ou g Bunes y yOouD OU S JO PUE dn 1eS 1Ndjno 94 10 19 lt JeuBis ou s y 495 195 ue9q JOU seu OU S 941 Joe ONAS euj ui ejep SU 10413 10419 VIVO y ui JejeuleJed e Ul 10413 10419 3 L3IAVVd 20109 SU Ul 10413 10119 MOPUIM y Ul 4043 1019 ENIM jsunq SU Ul 10413 JoJJe SU 10213 10119 192 y Ul 1041413 SLOG I uojeussoJo y ui 1013 10119 SSOHD 1013 y YO9YD UONIPUOD jndino Ul 4043 J0JJS y SpISJNO SI 2 AouenboyJ 24 6 ejuozuou 941 baJjH y episino si jejuozuou eu ui 0 y episino si jejuozuou y ui dyoequ Bunes y si jejuozu
51. 0900008 091 12 8 6 69 115 99 66 od MODUM 9 01 0 0990501 gt 00 63 808 9OIVNV N a 080 00 00010 99666 066 MOPUIM 909 MODUIM G 090099 x09 VS3 8 9O IVNV 89 096 og 686 09 09H 100 09 A 09 H 100 GL 89 x08ZLVSSA 994 90 IVNV d N 89 0821 0520 186 100 02 02 100 090892x08ZIVSIA d N Bod 8908 0096 04865 96 opui 5 2 _ umopiind z 0 29301 4 0 euo 39 08 090 96669 96 MOPUIM 199014 O 3104 09008r erevsan _ 4 0998 00009 008 MOPUIM 29901 0 1eu104 MOPUIM DOWNY 0 6 000462 00092 0088 g9 MOPUIM 193214 0 4 MOPUIM 9 lt 90 IVNV d N 000760 00009 00006 MOPUIM 19924 164913 0 4 MOPUIM lt 9 90 IVNV d N bold 568 998 000982 000 SZ 008 86 86 86 186 MOPUIM 12004 MOPUIM osOzeelxoselvsan sowny 05090 seses 086 Jeuot4 yeu MOPUIM slOvvelxzellvS3 sowny 00 166 0 29
52. 87H 85 Fie 90H 83H 8 GENSER GATE SER JE Tub m MAb be E 1 81H 9 1 9 8 9 80H 88H 8 B Fa GEA NF 7 x 9 character pattern table 1 of 2 A SE REDE Chapter 11 REFERENCE 7 x 9 character pattern table 2 of 2 8 x 9 dots are used for 80H to 8FH LLL LM I 1 UIT ETETE HRA BRAD BARES E FERAE HEEE NANUN SERAN EEEE BUEDE KORRARI i ET TT ATT TTTTTT 16 x 16 character pattern table 1 of 4 4 48 REFERENCE THO HHT COO TH EE PHT TOT TETTE T FHI 1 TIME FATTE MOTTAT x LL HTG VES TO ERE EBENEN MOTEN RAGS
53. 8820880 NIN 06019 5 0982 SU OO TVNV 919x0897 000 vG 00005 62956 206 0 54 N N 88 0 000 2 L9L 6 6295 L06 S 8820 osOdgezxorrivia Sd rrrOA 9OWNV 00042 07667 99 s 9 8800 168 268 069402 09217 SOWNV d d 00 082 0Gc v4 00006 0067 0 amp 0Md9 6x024VI3 SU N N 9 8x074 000 72 00005 092 69 05d9 6x0z VI3 SOTWNV NIN Bod 9 9 02 000 2 00070 OST LE 09900801 0261 1 o80LX0Z6L 00090 000 09 00579 026 9OTYNY 0801026 099 62669 2719 888 09 08 0 0 2 S0TYNY NIN 700776 000709 0091 18 re6SOndosrxOrrlvia Sd prroA NIN 000 G 0v6 6G 69v LE 099008 0 7 SOTYNY NIN 700776 00009 00616 7666 4089 0971 Sd ppyOA NIN 0006 06 66 69v LE 09 mdorzxogezvia SOTYNY 072 099 700776 99966 05 5 Bold AXH ZHN zH
54. Accordingly by initial default HDMI output is OFF If you are going to prioritize HDMI output we recommend that you select a timing that conforms to EIA standards a setting where the Timing Data Name is written in the form EIA XXXXXX as given in 11 1 1 Program data 12 4 6 Concerning the multi bit mode optional function For details on the precautions to be observed in the multi bit mode refer to Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE OPTION Group number changed x 10 scraped Auto up 1 level up J Coron GRAY BURST 8 5 0 Number keys 3jdigits gt Number of program selected and executed LEVEL ET Blanking speed changed B Auto down 1 level down ESSE Cursor C EIE ee zu gt mgr Window RGB levels changed 3 irsor shape node changed Direct Display BEI Output patterns switched Video audio output 4 Cursor rroved Movenent step changed MUE cuse levels changed selected and executed Audio output ON OFF 8 cuse moveat Quiput video signal sync signal switched Cursor operations FORMAT Horizontal Timing C HARA CROSS DOTS CIRCLE mme vericaltiming 0108 GRAY BURST Patter actions
55. Set using 9 Setting the DDC pattern of config edit FUNC5 The contents of the GUI display and hexadecimal display are as shown below GUI display of EDID optional pattern No 0E 22 23 EDID Block 0 XXX 2 Display contents DDC T DDC2B EDI D are 1 4 Block number of EDID appears only when an error has occurred Switch between the pages using the gt and 4 keys Hexadecimal display of EDID optional pattern No 2E Display contents Block number of EDID 2 Details of EDID error appears only when an error has occurred Contents of EDID hexadecimal display Switch between the pages using the gt and 4 keys If it is not possible to obtain the EDID because the receiver was not connected to the specified port or for some other reason the above displays do not appear and EDID Read Error is indicated at the top left of the display instead 11 1 2 3 Concerning the AFD pattern No 1F NEED Optional pattern No 1F is the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect ratio of the EIA CEA 861 standa
56. pzsxzoz Nd p s e o e aren vem Sem oan YSN ow vZ6 766 0 0 0 9596498 16 62 76 66 929 898 OSIN W OSLN 0 0 0 ever of VOZL SU ueder Lowe 0 er 975656 06609665 520858 OSIN pesn 94 299 94 AES jeubis oul ones Suey sejduues 5 SX1euJo Jequunu 41135 40 2 2 5 ZH poued A Jo ou uonnjoses 1euu0J eUBIS iming signa 5 sindino 9 A pue 104 sjeubis 84 ayisodwoy 5 Buluueos jeubis eur soul Buluueos JO jeubis eur jene 1ndinQ Bunes eur leuis JOJOBUUOD 99 104 pesn 941 11 4 Standard signal t sjeubis pyepuejs AL sajqe jeubis j2u19 u lg REFERENCE ie O _ os os o 6 gt o0ud We ee 66 of o s 0004 809 798 VLG OGL SGEL 19 09 6 024 __ _26 amp 6 og o s 76 69 GZS 868 02
57. right channels can be varied simultaneously using the 14 Ly 1 key 4 1 10 Scrolling the output patterns 1 Press the FORMAT key and key The screen on which to select the scrolling appears Scroll Dir Stop 1 9 Fig 4 1 12 Scrolling the pattern 2 Select the scroll direction using the number keys and scroll the pattern Table 4 1 7 Selecting the direction in which to scroll the pattern Key LCD display Description For scrolling the pattern toward the bottom left The pattern is scrolled in the specified direction 2 1 For scrolling the pattern downward RD For scrolling the pattern toward the bottom right For scrolling the pattern toward the left For stopping the scrolling s u Forsorg te patem upa RU forse he patem toward he tap rant _ The pattern action settings are reflected for the amount of scroll movement horizontally and vertically and interval time in frame increments or in field increments for interlaced scanning Refer to 6 15 Setting the pattern 3 Press the FORMAT key The original display is restored Scrolling operations cannot be performed when the HDCP audio sweep closed caption V chip Teletext or Macrovision function is being used Refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously data edited here cannot be saved Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT
58. 2 How to switch to another group Refer to 4 1 3 Changing the group numbers p 42 Operations be performed and changes made while the data signals are being output Refer to 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns p 42 to 4 1 12 Changing the timing data settings p 49 4 1 3 Changing the group numbers 1 Press the ESC key The screen on which to change the group number now appears Group No XX 00 99 Fig 4 1 7 Changing the group number 2 Use the number keys to input the group number The group number can also be selected one at a time using the 141 7 3 Press the SET key The group number is changed and either the direct display mode or group display mode appears on the LCD screen The group number set here cannot be saved To save the setting use config edit 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns Use the following as a reference and press the applicable key among the keys listed below The LED of the selected key lights and the pattern data is output When Single Pattern has been selected as the pattern display mode setting 3 of config edit FUNG5 only one pattern can be selected When Multi Pattern has been selected a multiple number of patterns can be selected However only one pattern can be selected for optional pattern 1 or optional pattern 2 regardless of the mode Table 4 1 1 Pattern data to be output CURSOR Refer to 4 1 5 Cursor ope
59. 3 Indent4 Tab Offset 2 Background White semi transparent Text Cyan underlined Roll up RU3 ROW 13 14 15 Indent4 Background White non transparent Text Green row 13 white rows 14 15 Paint on ROW 8 Indent8 Tab Offset 3 9 Indent4 Tab Offset 2 Background Magenta non transparent Text White in italics ROW 2 13 Background Cyan semi transparent Text Yellow underlined flashing Roll up RU4 ROW 5 Background Cyan semi transparent Text Blue Paint on ROW 2 4 Tab Offset 1 6 Tab Offset 2 8 Tab Offset 3 Background White non transparent Text Red CC4 Pop on ROW 2 4 Tab Offset 1 6 Tab Offset 2 8 Tab Offset 3 Background Green semi transparent Text White flashing Roll up RU3 ROW 11 12 13 Background Cyan non transparent Text Green in italics Paint on ROW 5 Indent4 6 Indent4 Tab Offset 1 7 Indent4 Tab Offset 2 8 Indent4 Tab Offset 3 Background Black semi transparent Text White Closed Caption Mode 1 Roll up RU2 Closed Caption Mode 1 Paint on ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Closed Caption Mode 2 PopO 0123456789 Closed Caption Mode 2 Roll up RU3 8 ClosedCaptionMode2 Paint On abcdefg Closed Caption Mode 3 Pop On AEOUUiU SMe gt Closed Caption Mode 3 Roll up RU4 _ t Closed Caption Mode 3 Paint On Aa
60. 3 4ch 5 6ch 7 8ch Internal sound Bit width Output level Bit width 16 bits 0 to 7FFF 90 31 to 0 dB 20 bits Oto 7FFFF 114 40 to 0 dB 24 bits Oto 7FFFFF 138 48 to 0 dB Video level Color difference coefficients Y b Cb d f Cr g h i Output When the sampling frequency is 32 44 1 or 48 kHz frequency 20 and up sampling frequency 2 Hz in 20 Hz increments When the sampling frequency is 88 2 96 176 4 or 192 kHz 50 and up sampling frequency 2 Hz in 50 Hz increments SWEEP Off frequency sweep Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 7 InfoFrame data configuration list Setting item Setting range InfoFrame InfoFrame ON OFF OFF ON AMI SPD Audio MPEG Version 1 2 Active Format Information RGB or YCbCr RGB YCbCr 4 4 4 YCbCr 4 2 2 Active Aspect Ratio Picture 4 3 16 9 14 9 box 16 9 box 14 9 box gt 16 9 4 3 14 9 16 9 14 9 16 9 4 3 Top Bar Bottom Bar 0 to 65535 Source Device No setting DigiSTB DVD DVHS HDD DVC DSC CD Game PC Blu Ray Disc Super Audio CD Timing Setting item Setting range data InfoFrame Version Channel Count Refer to Stream Header 2 to 8ch Coding Type Refer to Stream Header IEC60958 MPEG1 2 AAC DTS ATRAC One Bit Audio Dolby Digital DTS HD MLP DST WM
61. 3 5dB Low when a frequency band for character burst signals etc 15 required 10dBgan 10 13 30 7048 factory setting 7 0dB High when a frequency band for color bar signals etc is not required Concerning the filter settings This setting is related to the internal data and is added to the video data and sync signals It has no effect on the burst signals Burst signal generator Outline diagram of VBS and Y C output filter 1 Concerning setting 5 The set gain is the same as setting 4 but the video data is averaged out in 3 pixel increments and output Setting 4 Setting 5 Fig 3 3 20 Figure showing settings 4 and 5 20 Setting the DDC transfer clock Select the clock frequency for DDC Cfg l2c Trans Clock 100KHz 0 4 Fig 3 3 21 Selecting the DDC transfer clock Table 3 3 19 DDC transfer clock selection method key o ee 172177779080 The clock frequency is set to 40 kHz 21 _ Setting the DDC read method a GENE UDC GS GENS EE __ Select the DDC read method Cfg DDC Access Method Enhanced DDC 0 2 Fig 3 3 22 Selecting the DDC read method Table 3 3 20 DDC read method selection method A
62. 4 2 Automatic output of video signals auto display FUNC1 50 4 3 Editing the program data program edit PC card edit FUNC2 FUNC3 51 44 Copying program data PC card copy 53 4 5 Editing group data group data edit 6 60 4 6 Editing user character patterns character edit 62 4 7 Listing the data on the display list display 9 64 4 8 Setting the color difference coefficients YPbPr coefficient table edit 69 161 b duis idee ICIS OE ADC MNT 69 4 8 2 How to edit the YPbPr coefficient nennen nennen nennen nnn nnne nnns 70 4 9 Copying panel ROM data EE 71 4 10 Setting and executing HDCP HDCP set FUNCC 72 FT EPER 72 4 10 2 HDCP settings for each program data 75 4103 HDCP eis MP 76 4103 1 Execuing ADCP ee eee 76 4 10 3 2 LCD display during HDCP 76 4 10 3 3 What appears on the display during HDCP 77 4 10 3 4 When HDCP authentication has failed error 79 4 11 How to execute calibration calibration
63. 4070 lt 0882 8 9OIVNV N N 072 lt 0880 Od 6 8 10109 MEDL fei 9 090 0 0882 8 11 08080 00009 oser ee 1009 MOY R 9 ALLdO 66 519 9OWNV N N 14 087 088 000 5 0 6 65 vel 218 UOISJ A 20109 314 45 92140 9 99 N 0 0 120 12 988 60 OG GL 18 92130 Od 698 SOTYNYI UOISJ A 10109 3148 90140 9 99 9OTVNV N N Op XOvYL 9M S UOISJ A 10109 UOISJ A 10109 3 LdNS S y 198 UOISI A 10109 ALANS ZLdO v6 sOMdorz O pivia 9O0WNV N N Bou 00042 009 99 UoIsJ9 31 6 95140 766690072 0971 S0OTYNY Bod M 0PzxObPL 00072 70009 VEL GL 61 44 ALANS 52140 090 09pXOrFI VIS 17072 20009 Hm g9 ILdNS 62140 6 6BSOMO8rx0rrL VIF N N 14 087x0rrl 00072 07666 76 6 ILdNS 60140 090087077 g 98 98 98 98 52140 89 0002 0669 vessi 09 ALANS 21140 090 0801 lt 026 43 9OWNv d d 0005 00009 ossee 698 3LAN
64. 8 N N coors 00005 66 109 1 1002 31419 92140 osOisxosezvia N N 990882 00 00008 99 206 ONON Ld 314 5 319 45 52140 osOmdsezxorrivia aod N N Sod w egzxovpi 00042 99 106 ONON dt 31dWS 31dWs 92180 osOdgezxorpivia N N boa 00042 Soci 006 ONON ALAS 92180 OSOmdgezxorrivia g9 DOWNY 89zx0rrl 0002 07667 5295 668 ONON I LdINS 31909 52140 osOdeszxorrivia 9OIVNV Bod 88Zx0rrl 00072 07667 5295 868 ONON 31dlNS 22 1 ILdNS 60140 069 988 gt 07 g 9OTVNV N N 386 0 0002 08005 62956 OM 168 ONON 145 C 1 dM 31909 52140 05 dggzxorri vi3 Bold 88Zx0rrl 00072 080705 5295 31dWS ALdWS 090 19 5 0971 S0TYNY 00072 00006 5295 568 31dWS ALdWS 0509 5 0971 S0TYNY NN au 00072 00006 5295 768 6 0 1 0S 108010z6LvI3 808 _ 9OIVNV 08010561 052 00006 Tm 69 0 2 140 0
65. 8 0 Character Edit Fig 4 6 1 Selecting the function 2 Use the number keys to input the character code to FFH and press the SET key A letter from A to F can be input by pressing the SHIFT key followed by one of the number keys CHR Edit E0 EO FF Fig 4 6 2 Inputting the character code The character pattern appears on the display CHR Edit EO Editing on Display Fig 4 6 3 LCD display Cursor coordinates Operation mode CHR Edit 0 0 Draw Mode MOVE Cursor Fig 4 6 4 Whatis displayed Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 3 Edit the character pattern while referring to the following Table 4 6 1 Function keys for editing the character patterns 1 to 4 6 to 9 e In the dot setting mode Used to move the cursor or draw in the direction of the arrows of the number keys e In the dot clearing mode Used to move the cursor or clear in the direction of the arrows of the number keys e In the movement mode Used to move the cursor but not to draw in the direction of the arrows of the number keys e In the shift mode Used to shift the character pattern in the designated direction of the arrows of the number keys Used to select the drawing mode dot setting dot clearing movement Used to switch between drawing and clearing the dot where the cursor is positio
66. Bod 07250882 0006 92866 VEL GL 288 9 05 fe 3 140 v6 6SOdorzx0gezviz od 0720882 700776 98966 05 5 199 ojeos 31140 76 66 4072 0882 9O0IVNV Bod 0720882 000 92866 y 088 Bolg AxH ZHN zH 2 DX ejep ejep 009 ed ou g Auepd jui 9u S Kejdsip 900100 E9IUSA EUOZUOH 105 8144 3LdNS 606 088 0N ZOd REFERENCE um ie 2 910 939 656 016 0 e ep 244914 09 5 1080080 06 04 2 66590801 000 JdddA 04 90900905026 jdddA 09 5 026 idddA 04 2 026 jdddA days 997 o eos dejs 9cz yit 0510 OWI 0510 OWI cit 0510 OWI Lit 0510 OWI Aeldsip 140 28140 8140 ejdsip eyep 09140 ejdsip ejdsip zi ONON Ldu 314 5 l dY 319 05 92140 Ld 1620 JdddA dwey 60 1 GI 1dO 04 5 1080 Jeg 20109 251 1009 251 40140 04 WWOAS 14444 Jeg 201
67. Character pattern data SJENERT 284 EJ p 286 EG JERN p 288 amp Concerning PC cards Usable PC cards data registration formats p 292 List of error messages p 294 e Standard signal timing p 297 11 1 Internal data 11 1 1 Program data Commentary Areas left blank the PG1 timing data denote default timing data VGA Areas left blank in the PG2 timing data denote default timing data program No 850 EIA640 x 480p 59 94 Areas left blank in the PG3 timing data denote default timing data program No 850 EIA640 x 480p 59 94 N and P used for sync polarity denote negative and positive respectively The value calculated for two fields is displayed on the LCD screen as the vertical frequency during interlace scanning The value calculated for one field is used in this manual The priority output port for programs whose timing data name starts with EIA refer to 11 Setting the DVI output mode priority output port in 5 4 Setting the output conditions is set to HDMI The priority output port for all other programs is set to ANALOG N denotes the YPbPr coefficient table number pS The color diff
68. OWN N N 00027 928 66 7219 0 8 deis ze Keb 4915 06 09 dorzxorrivia SdprrOA _ 82042 sees 6 deis 962 feo KesB 095 962 o9 mdorzxorrlvia SdrrrOA N N boid 80042 20009 1 ajeos days p y6 eS mdorexorrlvia SdrryOA God 00042 9009 998 days 16 dejs g 09 40 0 N N 80072 20009 TNI G98 sd rrv0A OOTWNY N N Bod 00 009 vest 99 SdrrrOA sowny N N 0870 8042 20009 199 6 665 2 N N 4080 00 0669 vers 298 5409 0 N N 080 20009 199 198 yeesOsrxOrrlvia Sd rrrdA N N 066 vest 0 Some comw __ a mem www 5s ebenso cows el m mw m sm coww _ mm mw am mon oom wrem suw sew sew on eyo Burun 82130 SU O IVNV N N 08 02 120 42 000 09 008 1 668 201098 9 8 S1009 8 2
69. PAL 60 PAL N PAL Nc YPbPr coefficient table number Line2 Interlace progressive ss ratio 4 3 16 9 same as screen resolution user 1 255 V 1 255 Black Black insertion function ON OFF Black insertion function ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON Black Insertion position Entire screen left half right half insertion Pattern display ON time 0 to 255 V Black insertion OFF time 0 to 255 V 5 1 5 Audio output data configuration list Timing data Setting item Setting range Audio output Output frequency 100 to 20000 Hz in 100 Hz increments Output level to 2000 mV in 50 mV increments SWEEP OFF frequency sweep level sweep level sweep gt L Frequency sweep 40 to 340ms in 20ms increments Number of repetitions Infinity 1 to 15 times Minimum frequency 200 to 20000 Hz in 100 Hz increments Maximum frequency Frequency step 200 to 19800 Hz in 100 Hz increments 5 1 6 HDMI output data configuration list Timing data Setting item Setting range HDMI output HDMI output mode OFF DVI HDMI AUTO Video format RGB 24bit 30bit 36bit YCbCr 4 4 4 24bit 30bit 36bit YCbCr 4 2 2 16bit 20bit 24bit Level mode Full range limited range user setting Level Min Video format user RGB YCbCr 4 4 4 YCbCr 4 2 2 16bit width 0 to 255 seg YCbCr 4 2 2 20bit width 0 to 1023 YCbCr 4 2 2 24bit width 0 to 4095 0 to 1 000 0 to 0 500 1 2ch
70. R 0 1146 G 0 3854 B 0 5000 Act Aspect Picture 6 0 0 0458 Aspect unknown HDMI output Audi oSource OFF Colori metry No Data Audi oSampl e 48kHz Video Code mE Audio LPCM Channel 1ch 2ch Repetition 1 Internal Audi oWi dth 16811 Bar Internal Audi oLevel 00000 Bottom 00000 Bit L 000ccd R 000ccd Left 00000 Right 00000 dB L 19 999 R 19 999 Internal Audi oFreq SPD Hz L 00100 0010 3 Ver 1 InfoFrame Internal Audi oSweep OFF Vendor Name VENDOR Produc PRODUCT ACP DATA Source Device unknown AUDI 0 Generic Audio 4 Ver 1 D E Channel Count Refer Copy Permission t 0 Coding Type Refer DE EL Sample Size Refer Quality 0 Transaction 0 aa PEET anne 0c ACP ISRC Packet I SRC1 Level Shift 0 Cont 0 Valid 0 Down mi x Permitted Status en Validity info No Vali A MPEG Catalogue code 0000000000000 vo Ver 1 Country code 00 Bit Rate AE 000 Frame unknown of rec 00 Field Repeat New ding 000 Fig 4 7 4 Example of what is shown on the display Program List When the number 3 digits 001 to 999 of the program to be displayed first is input using the number keys the data in that program appears on the display first and it is followed by the data of the subsequent programs Select Prg No Top 850 Program Name List Fig 4 7 5 LCD di
71. Restriction on VG 859C Restriction on HDCP to 4096 dot Restriction on VG 859C HMDI output mode 4 The Data Islands are the parts that send the InfoFrame and audio information by HDMI InfoFrame is sent during the vertical blanking period the audio information is sent during the horizontal blanking period 2 Restrictions on HDCP apply when Data Island is not provided However data such as the guard band characters of HDMI differing from the HDCP only mode are contained in the blanking period concerned 3 When two data packets have been used Hblanking restrictions apply to Single Packet Minimum Time HDMI HDCP Audio 1ch 32 dots HDMI outputs audio sampling frequencies Since the audio information of HDMI is sent during the horizontal blanking period there are restrictions on the audio sampling frequency depending on Hblanking and the number of audio channels Restrictions on sampling frequency Hblanking 74 dots 2 32 x Fs x Nch 4 Where Fs Audio sampling frequency kHz Nch Number of audio channels ch Using internal programs as examples the restrictions on the sampling frequency when there are 2 and 8 audio channels are given below Internal program E _ ewo xeam e pe _ 1 This is restriction imposed by the VG 859C transmitter used rather than a restrictions imposed by the standard 5 2 Setting the horizontal timing data 5 2 1 Horizontal timin
72. SET key Card Initialize Set Card amp Push SET Fig 4 4 23 Setting up the PC card The Now initializing message appears on the LCD screen and initializing starts After the card has been initialized the Complete message appears on the LCD screen and then the display shown in Fig 4 4 23 is restored Card Initialize Complete Fig 4 4 24 Completion of initialization 2 To initialize other PC cards repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared When the data in a multiple number of programs is to be output the programs be executed at a time by changing their numbers in ascending or descending order using the 14 9 key the direct display mode In the group display mode on the other hand programs group data can be executed in the order in which they were registered using group data edit Each group data consists of a timing data program and a pattern data program If for instance group data No 1 is executed the pattern data in program No 900 will be executed using timing data in program No 850 as shown in the table below Table 4 5 1 Examples of group data Group data No Timing data program No Pattern data program No 1 850 1 Press the FUNC key 6 key and SET key Select Function 6 0 Group Edit Fig 4 5 1 Selecting the function 2 Use the number keys to input the group number 1 to 99 and press the SET key
73. Setthe H and V intervals and the dot pattern size and type Interval H 20V 20 Size 1dot Type Rect 0 1 Fig 6 6 2 Setting the interval dot pattern size and type Table 6 6 2 Interval dot pattern size and type setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Interval Number XXXX Line mode The number of dot patterns is set Interval keys Dot mode The number of dots between dots is set H V Setting range 0 to 9999 Size Size Number XX dot Setting range 1 to 15 dot keys Type Crcl This draws dots in the shape of a circle whose diameter is the Type designated size 1 Rect This draws dots in the shape of a square one side of which is the designated size 1 The dot pattern is not displayed if O is set for H or V Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Correlation between interval and mode lt Example 1 gt Example 2 Line mode Dot mode Interval H 5 V 4 Interval H 300 V 250 LeftTop V 250 dots V 4 lines H 5 lines H 300 dots Fig 6 6 3 Correlation between interval and mode When interval and V are set to 1 1 Fig 6 6 4 Correlation between interval H and V amp Concerning the screen center When from center is set as the format in the dot mode the crosshatch pattern is displayed after the screen center is calculated When both the number of dots and number of lines to be displayed are set to odd numbers the
74. Setting the start program 20 10 Setting the 21 11 Setting the IP address and port 22 12 Setting the license 23 13 Finely adjusting the VBS 23 14 Finely adjusting the video 24 15 Setting the digital level mode else nnne nnne nnnm nnne nnn nnne 25 16 Setting the key lock 25 17 Setting the terminal mode 26 18 Setting the internal program 1 ener nnne 26 19 Setting the VBS output filter nennen nnn nnne nnns 27 20 Setting the DDC transfer clock 28 21 Setting the DDC read 28 22 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection 30 23 Setting the automatic HDMI audio 32 24 Setting the tri level sync signal 33 25 Setting the RB 614C 34 26 Setting the drawing dots for 1 pixel 34 27 Setting the NORMEN PE ges cccusescecrniccncccqcateesvadeniasdasacceanacsntesaasaveearaaesie desareeanaasetnecaaateearaueec
75. Table 5 4 5 RGB YPbPr selection method Setting item RGB YPbPr GN RGB is selected as the signals to be output YPbPr YPbPr color difference is selected as the signals to be output 5 Setting the YPbPr coefficient table No This setting selects the YPbPr coefficient table No used when YPbPr has been selected as the RGB YPbPr setting in 4 For details on the YPbPr coefficient tables refer to 4 8 Setting the color difference coefficients YPbPr No 0 0 9 Fig 5 4 5 Setting the YPbPr coefficient table No Table 5 4 6 YPbPr coefficient table No selection method 6 Setting the D connector Line 1 identification signal D Connector Line1 1080 0 2 Fig 5 4 6 Setting the D connector Line 1 identification signal Table 5 4 7 D connector Line 1 identification signal selection method D connector Line 1 Number of effective scanning lines 480 Identification voltage OV Number of effective scanning lines 720 Identification voltage 2 2V 1080 Number of effective scanning lines 1080 Identification voltage 5V 7 _ Setting t the D connector Line 2 Line 3 identification signals Line2 Interlace 0 1 Line3 4 3LB 0 2 Fig 5 4 7 Setting the connector Line 1 Line 3 identification signals Table 5 4 8 D connector Line 2 Line 3 identification signal selection method 8 _ Setting the BNC D Sub connector outputs Analog BNC ON 0 1 Analog D SUB ON 0 1 Fig 5 4 8
76. This section contains the safety precautions and a description of how the manual is configured and what is packed with the generator Chapter 1 Concerning VG 859C RB 1848 A general description of the VG 859C is given in this chapter Chapter 2 Operating procedures The basic operating procedures are provided in this chapter The procedures given here are the same as the ones described in chapter 3 and beyond Basic functions Chapter 3 VG 859C system settings The system settings of the VG 859C are described in this chapter Chapter 4 Signal output and data registration procedures Details of the functions FUNCO 4 6 8 D other than the system settings function which are used to output the signals and edit and register the data for instance are contained in this chapter Detailed settings timing data pattern data Chapter 5 Timing data configuration and setting procedures This chapter gives an outline of the timing data and the procedures used to set the timing data Chapter 6 Pattern data configuration and setting procedures This chapter gives an outline of the pattern data and the procedures used to set the pattern data Maintenance function Chapter 7 Self check This chapter gives an outline of the self check function and the procedures used to execute the function Other Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE OPTION This chapter provides details on the multi bit mode which is an optional functi
77. When a rating is set in a receiver TV set incorporating the V chip functions the rating information of the EDS is decoded and a decision as to whether to output each program to the screen is automatically determined on the basis of the ratings set Line 21 waveform The figure below shows the line 21 284 waveform The color burst is followed by a sine wave called the Clock Run In and then by the start bit The start bit is always 001 Two bytes of data Character 1 and Character 2 are sent in one line Character 1 and Character 2 are decoded on the basis of the LSB and the odd parity is normally added to the MSB bit 8 Character Ore 60 e 24 t5 5 wre 105 0545 Fig 5 9 1 Line 21 284 waveform Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 9 2 Details of closed caption item settings 1 Setting the output data CaptionDataNo 0 0 Default 1 20 User Fig 5 9 2 Setting the output data Table 5 9 3 Output data setting method Output data This uses the internal caption data CaptionDataNo For details on the data refer to 4 Internal caption data This uses the data UserData edited by SP 8848 UserData can be edited using the SP 8848 software program provided The VG main unit does not have any editing functions 2 Setting loop and delay CaptionLoop Osec 0 10 CaptionDelay Osec 0 10 Fig 5 9 3
78. e BURST BURSTDaaEdi Burstpatem o WNDOW WINDOW Data Edt Wndowpatem 8 02 OPIzDsatdi ______ 7 p CEC DDC C1 LL function DDC C1 function optional Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 2 Setting the pattern select 1 Select the pattern which is to be output Press the pattern key and output control key When a pattern is selected the LED of its corresponding key lights e Pattern keys CHARA CROSS DOTS CIRCLE LJ x COLOR GRAY BURST NAME OPT1 OPT2 WINDOW CURSOR e Output control key R G B INV Pattern Select CHARA NAME R G B INV Fig 6 2 1 Selecting the pattern 2 check the setting press the SET key The pattern now appears on the display 6 3 Setting the graphic color The following items are set for the graphic color data 1 Graphic color of character plane 2 Background color 1 Set the graphic color of the character plane Graph Color R 255 G 255 B 255 Fig 6 3 1 Setting the graphic color Table 6 3 1 Graphic color setting method Setting item _ LCD display Setting range Graphic color 0 to 255 Graph Color keys B 2 Set the background color Fig 6 3 2 Setting the background color Table 6 3 2 Background color setting method Setting item adii Setting range IM Background color Number 0 to 255 BG Color keys
79. setup and sync signal 117 Al Seng ROBYPPP M 117 5 Setting the YPbPr coefficient table 117 6 Setting the D connector Line 1 identification 118 7 Setting the D connector Line 2 Line identification 118 8 Setting the BNC and D Sub connector outputs 118 9 Setting the DVI D and DVI A D connector outputs 119 10 Setting connector Y C output 119 11 Setting the DVI output mode and priority 120 12 Setting aspect 121 13 Setting the AFD Aspect and AFD Type 121 14 Setting the AFD Color and AFD background 122 MS 122 Concerning the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect 123 16 Setting the black insertion 125 5 5 Seng the audio ouput sie ond Medo aora er 126 4 126 2 Setting the output levels 126 ENERO 127 4 Setting the time step and number
80. ve case of a repeater is displayed here 7 If all the authentications have been conducted successfully PASS green is displayed here otherwise red appears The DEPTH number of steps and COUNT total number of connections of what is connected beyond the receiver which is in turn connected to the VG 859C are displayed here The values V for checking the adequacy of the KSV list beyond the receiver connected to the VG 859C are displayed here The Synchronization verification values Ri for checking the adequacy of the link are displayed here is the value calculated for the transmitter end and is the value calculated for the receiver end If the values for the transmitter and receiver ends match is displayed If OK is obtained as a result of a retry is displayed 2 When Pattern has been selected as the display mode Disp Mode the HDCP set HDCP authentication and encryption are executed while the pattern remains on the display Messages are displayed during HDCP execution at the top left of the display When the NAME key is pressed the program name for instance is normally displayed but here the EDID header check sum inspection results and Synchronization Verification Values Ri Ri are displayed instead This 5 always Name of the port HDMI or DVI used for HDCP execution displayed here HDCP version Ver
81. 0 dB 24bit 138 48 to 0 dB Since the Output level data is stored as bit data it may differ from what is displayed at the time of input when the mode is switched between dB and bit in the dB mode 9 Setting t the internal audio output frequency InternalAudio Freq L 100 R 100 Hz Fig 5 6 9 Setting the internal audio output frequency Table 5 6 10 Internal audio output frequency setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Output frequency Number XXXXX The setting range differs depending on the setting for InternalAudio Freq Keys Sampling frequency L R Setting range when the sampling frequency is 32 44 1 or 48 kHz 20 and up sampling frequency 2 Hz in 20 Hz increments Setting range when the sampling frequency is 88 2 96 176 4 192 kHz 50 and up sampling frequency 2 Hz in 50 Hz increments If the output frequency is not set in the units prescribed by the sampling frequency it will be rounded down and output For instance even if 50 Hz 20 Hz increments NG is set as the output frequency when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz what is actually output will be 40 Hz in 20 Hz increments OK 10 Setting the internal audio sweep InternalAudio Sweep OFF 0 1 Fig 5 6 10 Setting the internal audio sweep Table 5 6 11 Internal audio sweep setting method Setting item InternalAudio Sweep SWEEP o or FR
82. 0 255 0 1 Fig 3 3 15 Selecting the digital level mode Table 3 3 14 Digital level mode selection method 0 255 For outputting at a level of 0 to 255 without converting the digital level Factory setting 16 235 For converting the digital level and outputting at a level of 16 to 235 At the 16 to 235 setting the VBS and Y C outputs are OFF Other analog outputs are also output at the level established by the 16 to 235 setting 16 Setting the key lock mode Select the key lock mode for preventing malfunctioning Cfg Func amp Level Lock No Mask 0 3 Fig 3 3 16 Selecting the key lock mode Table 3 3 15 Key lock mode selection method NoMask The FUNC and LEVEL keys can be used as usual Factory setting Level key Lock The operation of the LEVEL key is set to be inhibited The operation of the FUNC key is set to be inhibited 3 Func amp Level The operation of both the LEVEL key 1 and FUNC keys 2 is set to Lock be inhibited 1 The operation of the LEVEL key using the direct display FUNCO is inhibited 2 The operation of the FUNC key for function no 1 4 and 6 D is inhibited 17 Setting the terminal mode display Select the LCD screen display in the terminal mode Cfg Term mode display Normal 0 1 Fig 3 3 17 Selecting the terminal mode display Table 3 3 16 Terminal mode display selection method o Normal No displays appear in the termi
83. 1 to 5 below 1 Press the FUNC key C key and SET key Select Function 0 HDCP Setting Fig 4 10 1 Selecting the function 2 Select the execution mode and display mode Exec Mode Enable 0 2 Disp Mode NG Only 0 3 Fig 4 10 2 Selecting the execution mode and display mode Table 4 10 1 Execution mode and display mode selection method execution 10 Disable HDCP is not executed d od HDCP is executed when all programs are executed Exec Mode 2 Program HDCP is executed only when programs for which the program data HDCP item is set to enable are executed HDCP must be set for each program data display mode m NG Only The results appear on the display only when the checks yields NG Disp Mode The check results appear on the display every time HDCP is executed with the pattern displayed 3 SM amp AII The check results appear on the display every time Furthermore when an SMPTE pattern or ramp pattern is selected the check results and pattern are superimposed over each other on the display SMPTE pattern Optional patterns No 25H 26H Ramp pattern Optional patterns No 2BH 2CH Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 3 Press the key to move to the next page and set the authentication execution interval and version Interval 1 1 10 Version 1 0 0 2 Fig 4 10 3 Setting the execution interval and version Table 4 10 2 Execution interval
84. 859C For information on registering patterns refer to 6 12 Setting the optional patterns and the 5 8848 instruction manual 0 5 pixel scrolling 0 25 pixel scrolling Creates 2 patterns with a 0 5 pixel displacement Creates 4 patterns with a 0 25 pixel displacement Pattern A Pattern A Pattern B A pattern created by Pattern B moving the patter A 0 5 pixels toward the left A pattern created by moving the patter A 0 25 pixels toward the left Pattern C A pattern created by moving the patter B 0 25 pixels toward the left Pattern D A pattern created by moving the patter C 0 25 pixels toward the left Fig 6 15 14 Creating a half pixel pattern SP 8848 software can also be used to edit one instance of each pattern described above into single instance of graphics data 2 Setting half pixel scrolling function 0 5 0 25 Pixel Scroll 0 00 pixel LEFT 0 1 Fig 6 15 15 Setting half pixel scrolling step and direction Table 6 15 16 Half pixel scrolling step and direction setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description e keys XXX XX Setting range of 0 to 254 50 0 25 pixel increment Scrolling step Always use the form xxx 50 for 0 5 pixel patterns and xxx 25 for 0 25 pixel patterns MET Scrolling is executed in the j j j designated direction Scrolling direction E Right 0 This setting is valid only when half pixel scroll pattern has been specified Even i
85. 99 999 ms 1 0 to 99 0 H 0 5H increments Vbackp 1 20 20 Vbackp 1 20 0 000 to 99 999 ms 000 to 99 999 0 000 to 99 999 to 4096 H 4096 4096 1H or 0 5 Heros Vfrontp 1 2 0 000 to 99 999 to 4096 H 0 to 4096 H ms EQPfp EQPp 2 20 1 20 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H 0 5H increments EQPbp 1 20 on off OFF ON VDstart 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4095 0 H 0 5H increments Vblanking 2 H or more Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE 8 2 3 Changing the internal patterns In the multi bit mode the following internal optional patterns are changed into patterns corresponding to multi gradation gray scale expressions 8BIT MULTI BIT standard mode multi bit mode ANSI pattem Hor Reso Full step amp 256 gradation Graphic representation gray scales H direction ramp ANSI pattem Reso Full step 4 representation H direction ramp The changes are described using the RGB 10 bit output as the video format No 3E No 3F when Hdisp is 500 dots 0 0 256 gradation gray 1023 The bottom level is always 256 gradation gray e 1step 1dot gt scale regardless of the output bit mode 8 3 Other restrictions In addition to the restrictions outlined above the following restriction also applie
86. CEA 608 B standard on the extended character Table 5 9 7 Setting extended character mode Description Character mode setting Space Substitute character mode A transparent space is inserted just before the extended character Only the inserted space is displayed when a receiver does not support the extended mode character standard character that resembles the extended character is inserted just before the extended character The transmitted characters can be determined by the inserted substitute character when a receiver does not support the extended character The extended character mode is set with system settings For details refer to 3 3 32 extended character for closed caption Example of transferring Capital A with acute accent 0x12 0x20 Extended Character 0x12 0x20 Transparent space gt 0 11 0 39 Extended Character 0x12 0x20 A NULL 5 0 41 0 00 Setting the The substitute standard characters that are prepared for extended characters to be inserted in substitute character mode are the following Refer to CEA 608 B standard on the extended character Table 5 9 8 Substitute Standard Character 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Standard Character vum taza o Umm m inverted exclamation mark LE Asterisk a wu ma em o wu m S vue m ongim oo o _ m mao
87. Cursor OFF 0 1 Fig 3 3 34 Selecting the overlay display Table 3 3 32 Overlay display selection method OFF The normal cursor pattern is displayed The background is displayed in the color which has been set Factory setting The cursor pattern is displayed on top of another pattern which is displayed 30 Setting the mute key Select the MUTE key function Cfg MUTE Key Function Audio Mute 0 1 Fig 3 3 35 Selecting the mute key function Table 3 3 33 Mute key function selection method 0 Audio Mute The MUTE key works as the audio muting function audio output ON OFF switching key Factory setting AV Mute The MUTE key works as the HDMI AV muting function key At either setting the status is switched from ON to OFF or vice versa by pressing the MUTE key However in the case of AV muting the default value AV muting OFF is restored by switching the program or timing data Chapter 859 SYSTEM SETTINGS 31 Setting the scroll trigger optional function Set the scroll trigger function to ON or OFF Cfg Output ScrollTrigger OFF 0 1 Fig 3 3 36 Selecting the scroll trigger Table 3 3 34 Scroll trigger selection method LCD display Description o OFF X Trigger signals are not output during scrolling Factory setting 1 ON Trigger signals are output during scrolling e ID signal line 1 of the 05 connector is used as the output connector e he 1V
88. Loop and delay setting Table 5 9 4 Loop and delay setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Loop Number XX Sec Setting range 0 10 s keys The caption data is looped for the time set and output Delay Number XX sec Setting range 0 10 s keys The caption data is output after the time set The data is output only once e The data is not looped if O is set for Loop e Delay is set only when 0 has been set for Loop 3 Setting the internal caption data output mode and style CaptionDefMode OFF 0 8 DefStyle PopOn 0 2 Fig 5 9 4 Setting the output mode and style Table 5 9 5 Output mode setting method Output mode This sets the closed caption function to OFF CaptionDefMode CC1 This sets closed caption mode 1 4 CC4 This sets closed caption mode 4 s mur TXT4 This sets text data mode 4 Usually the purpose of using the caption mode is to send text data relating to the content of TV programs In the text mode text data which is not related to the TV programs is sent Types of CC1 to CC4 and TXT1 to TXT4 services CC1 Primary Synchronous Caption Service Caption service in primary language 2 Special Non Synchronous Use Caption Service which does not require synchronization with sound etc Secondary Synchronous Caption Service Caption service in secondary language CC4 Special Non Synchronous Use Caption Servi
89. RGB levels are displayed on the LCD screen RGB levels PG1 1 WIN 255 255 255 74 97 263 69 260 03 2 Fig 4 1 11 Window RGB levels 2 Change the window RGB levels Table 4 1 5 RGB level changes A SATU SAFT SAFT SHIFT While the window levels are being changed no operations involving the use of the number keys such as the input of program numbers can be performed 4 1 7 Switching the output video signals and sync signals Use the following as a reference and press the applicable key among the keys listed below The LED of the selected key lights and the signals are switched Table 4 1 6 Video and sync signals to be output Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 1 8 Switching audio output muting ON or OFF Select the setting by pressing the MUTE key e When the LED of the MUTE key is lighted The audio output is set to OFF muted e When the LED of the MUTE key is off The audio output is set to ON The function of the MUTE key differs depending on the MUTE key setting in 27 of config edit FUNC5 When AV Mute is set it functions as the HDMI AV Mute key 4 1 9 Changing the video and audio output levels The analog digital vide output level analog audio output level and HDMI audio output level can be varied e The menu is selected by pressing the LEVEL key e Input the values using the number keys and press th
90. Setting item Lip Sync mode Lip Sync ON OFF time 1 OFF 1 1 255V Fig 6 15 21 Setting the video audio display time for Lip Sync Table 6 15 19 Video audio display time for Lip Sync setting method LCD De Number XXX Display ON time for Setting range ON time keys video audio 0 to 255V OFF time Number XXX Display OFF time for keys video audio ON OFF is repeated for output V Frame is used as the unit for progressive scans and field is used for interlaced scans 3 Setting the delay time This setting is valid only when DELAY is set for Lip Sync mode Lip Sync DELAY time 0 1 0 500 Fig 6 15 22 Setting the delay time for Lip Sync Table 6 15 20 Delay time for Lip Sync setting method Sign Delay time Number XXX Video audio delay time Time keys Setting 500 to 500 ms 2 ms increment Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 16 CEC function 6 16 1 General description Described in this section is the procedure for executing the HDMI CEC function Simple transmission and reception can be undertaken using the HDMI CEC function Monitor The CEC line commands can be monitored and displayed mode CEC line monitored CEC commands sent and received eS VG generator logical address Xh ACK is returned only when commands for the VG generator logical address Sink device have been received CEC commands sent and received
91. Setting item Specify Option Pattern No 33 for the pattern For information on selecting patterns refer to 6 12 Setting the optional patterns The pattern to be displayed conforms to window pattern format 0 1 window For details on window pattern settings refer to 6 11 Setting the window pattern Output pattern setting Audio conforms the internal audio of the HDMI AudioSrc setting set to INTERNAL with L PCM output Data is not input when the setting is other than For details on audio output settings refer to 5 6 Setting HDMI output The following settings are made related to Lip Sync Lip Sync function 1 Lip Sync mode settings 2 ON OFF time for the pattern and audio 3 Delay time setting for the video and audio Output audio setting The setting locations related to the Lip Sync function are as shown below Pattern ON Pattern OFF Pattern ON ON time of the video and audio OFF time of the video and audio ON time of the video and audio Vsync Video data Audio data Delay time Delay time Fig 6 15 19 Setting Lip Sync 1 Setting Lip Sync mode Lip Sync Mode DELAY 0 1 Fig 6 15 20 Setting Lip Sync mode Table 6 15 18 Lip Sync mode setting method LCD Description display DELAY Freely sets the delay time EDID Reads the EDID of the Sink device and makes settings according to that value 2 Setting the video audio display time
92. Setting item Reference page 1 HDMI output mode p 131 Video format Level user setting 3 Color Y a b Mex difference coefficients Cb e f Cr g h i Repetition 4 Audio signal p 133 Output level p 135 Output p435 LEN frequency SWEEP p 136 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting the HDMI output mode and video format HDMI Mode 0 3 VideoFormat RGB 24 0 8 Fig 5 6 1 Setting the HDMI output mode and video format Table 5 6 2 HDMI output mode and video format setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display HDMI output mode Output OFF uer 1 DVI DVI mode e which matches the format used by the receiver VideoF orman Wem ouput wih YCbCr 4 22 16 bis for sach siara _ 2 Output vitn YCbCr 472224 is 12 foreach sigra _ 1 The setting range for Hblanking horizontal timing differs depending on the HDMI output mode setting For details refer to 3 in 5 1 13 DVI and HDMI output timing restrictions 3 2 Analog outputs and DVI outputs cannot be output in the color difference format when HDMI has been selected as the priority output port setting in 11 Setting the IT content of AVI InfoFrame in the output condition data section Even when YCbCr has been selected as video format setting the signals will be forcibly output in the RGB format 3 The YPbP
93. Setting the BNC and D Sub connector outputs Table 5 4 9 BNC and D Sub connector output selection method The output is set to OFF Setting item BNC connector output 1 The output is to ON D Sub connector output Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 9 Setting the DVI D DVI A D connector outputs DVI D DVI A OFF D Connect ON 0 1 Fig 5 4 9 Setting the DVI D and DVI A D connector outputs Table 5 4 10 DVI D and DVI A D connector output selection method men Joos RUNS The DVI digital output is set to ON D connector output The D connector output is set to OFF The D connector output is set to ON 0 Setting the connector output format S Connector NORMAL 0 2 Fig 5 4 10 Setting the S connector output format Table 5 4 11 S connector output format selection method Setting item LCD display Description 9 connector output 3 NORMAL Normal output 4 3 C signal DC voltage OV format 1 LETTER BOX Letter box C signal DC voltage 2 2V S Connector 9 9 SQUEEZE Squeeze C signal DC voltage 5V Normally the images are output in a 4 3 ratio 4 Output at NORMAL setting However when the letter box format has been selected the images are output in the 16 9 ratio and so the sections at the top and bottom are QULIM IG 3 Output at 9 Output at LETTER NORMAL setting BOX setting When the lette
94. Single Link Dot clock frequency 25 to 165 MHz All horizontal timing pulses 1 1 dot increments with a dot clock frequency from 25 to 100 MHz 2 dot increments with a dot clock frequency from 100 001 to 165 MHz Dual Link 2 Dot clock frequency 50 to 250 MHz All horizontal timing pulses 1 4 dot increments 1 Hsync Hbackp Hfrontp HDstart HDwidth Hblanking 2 The standard VG 859C model supports Single Link only Contact Astro concerning Dual Link 2 HDMI outputs all horizontal timing pulses The HDMI output restrictions depend on the video format refer to 5 6 Setting the HDMI output Setting item Setting range restrictions Single Link Dot clock frequency Frequencies other than the range given below 25 to 165MHz When the video format is RGB_ 36 Y444 36 25 to 150MHz All horizontal timing pulses m 1 dot increments when the dot clock frequency is 25 to 100 MHz 2 dot increments when the dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 165 MHz 1 Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp Hfrontp HDstart HDwidth Hblanking 3 4 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES DVI and HDMI outputs Hblanking The setting range for Hblanking differs depending on the HDMI output mode setting in the HDMI output data HDCP execution and whether Data Islands for HDMI are provided or not HDCP execution 1 Data Island 2 Data Island PR setting range as
95. Source device Illustration of the monitoring function Command transmission mode Logical Address Yh VG generator logical address Xh Destination address Yh Commands sent from Xh VG generator to Yh sink device Sink device Illustration of command transmission Command Data can returned in response to the commands received response mode CEC commands sent Sac es Logical Address zie i is gt Yh Data returned in response VG generator logical address Xh to the commands Initiator address Yh Destination address Zh Sink device Setting data returned when commands Commands sent from Yh to Xh VG generator are received sink device to Zh Illustration of command response Execution procedure The following operations are performed for the HDMI CEC function Operation mode selected Monitoringmode Commandtrans Command missionmode receptionmode Thefollowingitemisset Thefollowingitemareset Thefollowingitemareset OptionalpatternNo 35displayed Commands sent by device to which VG generator is connected Return data sent by VG generator Fig 6 16 1 operation mode execution procedure CEC line monitored Commands sent by VG generator In the command transmission mode the commands sent at the moment when optional pattern 35 has been selected If command transmission is established as the CEC setting and OPT 35 is set as the pattern in the program ahead of
96. Vfrontp2 Vtotal Vdisp2 Vsync2 Vbackp2 Setting range 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4096 0 H in 0 5H increments When Vsync2 has been set in 0 5H increments the actual Vbackp2 will be the setting 0 5H Refer to Fig 5 3 7 in 4 Setting Vsync1 Vbackp1 and Vfrontp1 Ensure that the value of Vfrontp2 Vsync2 Vbackp2 is set in 1H increments 10 Setting 2 and EQPbp2 This menu item is displayed only when the interlace amp sync mode or interlace amp video mode has been selected as the scanning mode setting and the 2 field mode has been selected as the field mode setting EQPfp 2 0 000 5 0 0H EQPbp2 0 000 5 0 0H Fig 5 3 20 Setting EQPfp2 and EQPbp2 Table 5 3 15 2 and EQPbp2 setting method EQPfp2 Number XX XXXmS These are the ranges of this equalizing pulse inside the front porch keys XX XH Setting range 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments EQPbp2 Number XX XXXmS These are the ranges of this equalizing pulse inside the back porch keys XX XH Setting range 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments For how the phase correlation is conceived and setting examples refer to 5 Setting EQPfp1 and EQPbp1 Set EQPfp2 within the range of 1H lt Hfrontp when tri level sync signals are output 5 4 Setting the output condition data This section provides details on the settings of th
97. When edited auto display data is registered on a PC card a file is created on its own e Data files are created with the filename of autodisp vgd Bitmap data e When edited bitmap data is registered on a PC card a bmp folder is created and the data files are created inside this folder e Data files are created in sequence with the following filenames bitmap001 vgd bitmap002 vgd bitmap003 vgd and so on e Every time a data file is created a name file such as bitmapname001 vgd is simultaneously created for the file created Optional pattern data e When edited optional pattern data is registered on a PC card a file is created on its own e Data files are created in sequence with the following filenames opt001 vgd opt002 vgd opt003 vgd and so on e Every time a data file is created a name file such as optname001 vgd is simultaneously created for the file created e When files are registered the opt pth code display starts from 40 and when files are created the display changes to start from 0 If data is registered with opt pth code 40 a file with the opt000 vgd filename is created The hexadecimal format is used for the display so when data is registered with opt pth 50 the file which is created will have the filename of opt016 vgd Chapter 11 11 2 3 Examples of the data registered on a card PC bmp folder bitmap001 vgd bitmap002 vgd bitmap003 vgd bitmapname001 vgd bitmapname002 vgd
98. _ a as wm anse conte wihorve ascot Umm anse captar captal E win diaeresis or umeaman e _ 123 13 amal e wih iasresis or umatna e _ GAS captat twain crcunforeccent captat twin or o _ mm omal iwin dasresis or umauma ____ maa OAM oowoo O 12 3F closing guillemets Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Table 5 9 9 Substitute Standard Character Data Data Substitute Channel Channel Description 1 2 Standard Character capital A with tilde small a with tilde capital with acute accent capital with rave accent small i with grave accent capital O with grave accent small o with grave accent capital O with tilde small o with tilde opening brace closing brace backslash 13 2F 1B 2F tilde Capital A with dieresis or umlaut mark small a with diaeresis or umlaut mark BENI Capital O with diaeresis or umlaut mark EE NEN 1333 1B 33 small o with diaeresis or umlaut mark G6 136 wor t wu ves woe 159 5 9 3 Details of V chip item settings 1 Setting the rating system _ VChipSystem OFF 0 4 Fig 5 9 5 Setting the rating system Table 5 9 10 Rating system setting method Rating
99. analog D Sub output DVI output and HDMI outputs of the VG 859C The maximum current supplied by the DDC power supply is 0 5A for the D Sub and DVI outputs For the HDMI output refer to the HDMI standard sheet The DDC supply voltage is output as shown in the figure below 5V type 5 GND Fig 12 2 1 DDC power supply output circuit e The DDC power supply incorporates an overcurrent protection device but do not use a current which exceeds the rating e Do NOT supply power to the DDC power supply from the device connected to the VG 859C If such the voltage of such a power supply is connected both the VG 859C and the connected device may fail 12 3 Connector layouts 12 3 1 DVI digital serial output connector e Connector Morex DVI I 74320 1000 24 pins 5 pins analog DVI D 74320 4000 24 pins e Output TMDS E Ee Seg qe 91 1 10000 08 5 0 B Fig 12 3 1 Pin layout Table 12 3 1 Pin numbers sea _ sm _ e wame msee er MD 1 The 1 1 Panel Link data is output from single connector Only EVEN data is output with the 1 2 Panel Link 2 The DVI D 74320 4000 connector does not have the C1 to C5 pins shown in the above figure 3 For details on the DDC power supply refer to 12 2 Concerning the DDC power supply analogR G B return Chapter 12 Sp
100. analog only output condition data items and initial values 0 70 Sm om 7 Setting the baud rate and data bits Select the RS 232C baud rate RS Speed and data bits RS Dlen Cfg RS Speed 38400 0 4 RS Dlen 8 0 1 Fig 3 3 7 Selecting the baud rate and data bits Table 3 3 7 Baud rate selection method Table 3 3 8 Data bit selection method Seven bits are set as the data bits Eight bits set as the data bits Factory setting 1 Bear in mind that some restrictions OOH to 7FH may apply to the terminal commands which can be used if the number of data bits has been set to 7 bit 8 Setting 1 the Parity a and stop bit s Select the RS 232C parity RS Parity and stop bit s RS Stop Cfg RS Parity NONE 0 2 RS Stop 1 0 1 Fig 3 3 8 Selecting the parity and stop bit s Table 3 3 9 Parity selection method ram NONE None is selected as the parity Factory setting EVEN Even is selected as the parity 2 OD Odd is selected as the parity Table 3 3 10 Stop bit selection method 1 bit is selected as the stop bit Factory setting 2 bits are selected as the stop bits 9 Setting the start program Select the numbers of the programs to be executed Start Prg No when the power is turned on Use the number keys to input the number of the timing data program TIM and pattern data program PAT Factory setting 0 for TIM 0 for PAT
101. and save it on the PC card The editing procedure is described below using PC card edit an example 1 Press the FUNC key 3 key and SET key Select Function 3 0 Card Edit Fig 4 3 1 Selecting the function 2 Use number keys to input the program number 3 digits Example 001 e One or 2 digit numbers 1 to 99 can be input using the number key s followed by the SET key Example 1 key SET key e Program numbers can also be selected using the key 1 and Y key 1 e For details on the internal data refer to 9 1 1 Program data The program name program data Enable or Disable and HDCP enabled or disable blank now appear on the screen Program No Program data enable disable Prog No 1 Enable 0 1 ASTRO AK Program name H HDCP enable disable Fig 4 3 2 Inputting the program number 3 Edit the data When timing data is to be changed When pattern data is to be changed Press the TIMING key Press the PAT key The LED of the TIMING key blinks and the The LED of the PAT key blinks and the pattern timing data setting menu is accessed For data setting menu is accessed For details on details on the timing data setting procedure the pattern data setting procedure refer to refer to Timing data configuration and setting Pattern data configuration and setting procedures in Chapter 5 procedures in Chapter 6 Ti
102. be displayed unless the PC card is installed in the generator 1 Press the FUNC key 9 key and SET key Select Function 9 0 Lists Fig 4 7 1 Selecting the function Hereafter if the ESC key is pressed while key operation is being performed the previous screen is restored 2 While referring to the table below use one of the number keys to select the list to be displayed and press the SET key When Group Data List is to be selected select the group number before pressing the SET key Select Type 0 0 5 Program Data List Fig 4 7 2 Selecting the list Table 4 7 1 List selection method Key LCD display list List displayed Reference name page Program Data List Used to display the program data 1 of the program p 57 numbers concerned s Group Date List Used 1o display tne group data registered he up p60 1 The program names horizontal sync frequency vertical sync frequency program data enable disable horizontal timing vertical timing output condition audio output HDMI output InfoFrame and ACP ISRC packet data are displayed 3 The procedures described below differ depending on the type of list Refer to the page concerned in the reference page column for the item concerned Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Program Data List Use the number keys to input the program number 3 digits 001 to 999 to displa
103. direction ramp 1 For details on the options supported contact an Astrodesign sales representative 2 What HDMI related items are supported differs depending on the HDMI version In addition to what is listed in the tables the following items apply to the InfoFrame settings For further details refer to the High Definition Multimedia Interface Specifications of the HDMI standard Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints Table 12 4 3 Differences in InfoFrame settings by model General Setting item VG 859 VG 859A VG 859B VG 859C HDMI1 0 HDMI1 1 2 HDMI1 3 New items added in VG 859C AVI Infoframe Not supported 0 2 HDMI1 3 RGB Quantization Range AVI InfoFrame Not supported 0 1 Extended Colorimetry AVI InfoFrame Not supported 0 1 IT Content Setting items which differ AVI InfoFrame 0 2 0 3 depending on model HDMI Colorimetry version AVI InfoFrame 0 34 0 59 Video Code SPD InfoFrame Source Device Audio InfoFrame Coding Type The numbers given in the table refer to the items which can be set by each model For further details refer to 5 7 Setting InforFrame 3 Older versions of the VG 859C supported up to 24 bits for RGB and YCbCr 4 2 2 The video format settings for these versions are given below Table 12 4 4 VG859 VG 859A VG 859B video format settings Video format ___ Output with RGB 24 bits 8 bits for each signal VideoFormat 444 Output with YCbCr 4 2 2 24 bits 8 bits
104. execution Each time the authentication and encryption are completed during HDCP execution the character at the bottom right of the LCD changes alternately in the following sequence gt gt El PG1 T XXXXXXX 1 T XXXXXXX 31 50MHz37 86KHz83 40Hz lt 31 50MHz37 86KHz83 40Hz Fig 4 10 9 LCD display during HDCP execution Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 10 3 3 What appears on the display during HDCP execution 1 When NG Only or SM amp AII has been selected as the display mode Disp Mode by the HDCP set FUNCC When or 5 is selected the results are shown in 10 each time the HDCP authentication and encryption are completed When Only is selected the results are shown in 10 only when the results are NG When or NG Only is selected the pattern is not displayed When SM amp AI is selected the pattern but only an SMPTE pattern or ramp pattern is displayed superimposed onto the results shown below HDCP Encrypted Vi deo HDMI HDCP 1 TxKSV 1 RxKSV b TXRO 12 RxRO bc ra DEPTH COUNT 4 N wea Ww lt gt gt Q UT C OD oc CO OO 1 12C Li ne PASS NG 2 Hot Plug PASS 00 3 Repeater Connection 55 00 ede 00 4 KSV Check PASS 00 5 Tx RO Ready PASS 6 HDCP Link Chec
105. flicker function P SCR DENM Refer to 6 15 3 Setting the palette scrolling function Other settings used in the same screen display are described in the settings section for each item 6 Setting the window scrolling direction and step W Dir L 1 9 W Step1 1 1 255 Fig 6 15 7 Setting the window scrolling direction and step Table 6 15 8 Window scrolling direction and step setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Scrolling direction Scrolling 5 won gt D R Mewindowisseoledtomardtne u Thewindow s sorted upward o ru The window is seroled toward the op Scrolling W Step1 Number XXX The step is the same for the horizontal and vertical directions step keys Setting range 1 to 255 W Step2 3 4 Number XXX The step is the same for the horizontal and vertical directions keys Setting range 0 to 255 0 when no step is going to be used When Action Interval2 4 is used for the execution interval choose W Step2 4 setting which corresponds When conducting normal scrolling set 0 for W Step2 4 6 15 2 Setting the window pattern flicker function Set the following items for the window pattern flicker setting Table 6 15 9 Window pattern flicker setting method Flicker ON OFF Flicker ON OFF Execution interval Specifies the execution interval how many V to flicker once This setting uses the same value as
106. for each signal 422 16 Output with YCbCr 4 2 2 16 bits 8 bits for each signal 3 Y422 20 Output with YCbCr 4 2 2 20 bits 10 bits for each signal Y422 24 Output with YCbCr 4 2 2 24 bits 12 bits for each signal 4 When the video format is RGB 24 bits or YCbCr 444 the maximum frequency is 150 MHz 5 The frequencies which can be output simultaneously are the frequencies which can be output by HDMI when the priority output port refer to 11 Setting the DVI output mode and priority output port has been set to analog or DVI For further details refer to 4 Concerning the HDMI outputs in 12 4 5 Concerning the video output connectors 6 When the 5 HDMI output bit mode is 8 bits the same ANSI patterns as for older models are output but ramp patterns are output in the multi bit mode optional 12 4 2 Restrictions on functions used by SP 8848 614 and RB 649 The functions which can be used by the SP 8848 and by the RB 614C and RB 649 remote control boxes are subject to some restrictions Function which can be used Direct display Auto display Program edit PC card edit PC card copy Config edit Group data edit Character edit List display YPbPr coefficient table edit Panel ROM copy HDCP set Calibration A 5XX Self check 1 The only function of config edit FUNC5 which be set by the SP 8848 15 e fee o
107. gt lt 120 dots 00 dots m In the mode width h 800 x 100 201 V width v 600 x 100 20 96 gt 800 dots lt Example 2 When format 1 4 windows is used gt h 80 dots h 80 dots In the dot mode width h x 2 160 dot V width v x 2 120 dot v 60 dots m 00 dots In the 96 mode width h x 2 800 x 100 20 96 V width v x 2 600 x 100 20 96 v 60 dots 800 dots When the window is to be divided the total for all the windows is set 3 Perform the settings related to the selected format These settings differ from one format to another e With formats 0 to 7 or E Flicker interval The higher the value set the longer the interval e With formats 8 to D Scrolling speed The higher the value set the faster the speed e With format F Level change speed The higher the value set the slower the speed Flicker 0 None 0 8 Fig 6 11 4 Performing the format related settings Table 6 11 3 Flicker interval setting method Formats 0 to 7 or Setting item Key LCD display Description Flicker Flicker occurs at the designated ewan mw 8 4LEVEL The window RGB level is set to one of 4 levels and varied at the desired interval in V increments For the RGB level and time settings refer to 5 9 Optional function 16LEVEL The 4 levels have been extended to 16 levels The
108. is subject to the following restrictions imposed by the priority output port Primary Port setting Table 12 4 5 Restrictions on output imposed by priority output port Priority output port Analog HDMI DVI analog 5 to 24 999 MHz __ 25 to 100 MHz ___ 1 O 2 dot increments dot i 4 dot increments 4 dot increments HDMI 25 to 165 MHz Refer to 4 Concerning the HDMI output in 2 Concerning the output connectors Output connector for executing HDCP OFF Do not execute DVI HDMI function the HDCP function HDMI output OFF with YPbPr output RGB output always ON VBS output always OFF with outputs other than HDMI Dot clock frequency X Cannot be output Can be output Increments of x dots restriction on horizontal timing setting Be sure to set the output setting for the set priority output port to ON before executing HDCP Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints 2 Concerning the output connectors HE HE HE HE EH EE HE HE EE HE ee GNE EN HE EE HEN EE HEEN ee HEN eee GE eee 1 VBS Y C output connectors 1 Only NTSC PAL or SECAM timing signals can be output from the VBS and Y C output connectors 2 With internal programs only composite output timing signals see 1 Composi
109. moves toward the left Movement toward the right gt gt gt gt gt gt Movement toward the left Position display mode setting C amp Next page Table 6 13 2 Position display mode setting method Normal2 Normal 2 mode The coordinates GATE R G B in RGB increments and the movement step are displayed Vertical gate coordinate 1 and up Movement step GATE 301 STEP10 1 10 or 100 R 1201 G 1202 B 1203 color horizontal esu m tal L B color horizontal coordinate 1 and up coordinate coordinate 3 and up Position display Jor The cursor position does not appear the display 3 Reverse Reverse 1 mode The coordinates H V in pixel increments and the movement step are displayed The characters in the Normal 1 mode are rotated by 180 degrees If the display is placed upside down what will appear will be the same as in the Normal 1 mode 0Ld31S 00 007 mode The cursor position is displayed on the display 4 Reverse2 Reverse 2 mode The coordinates GATE R G B in RGB increments and the movement step are displayed The characters in the Normal 2 mode are rotated by 180 degrees If the display is placed upside down what will appear will be the same as in the Normal 2 mode 0c L 8 ZOZL 9O LOZL U 014215 10 34 9 Pos Disp Normal Normal 1 mode The coordinates H V in pixel increments and the movement step ar
110. number TR720 Tri level x signal 976 977 PG1 mode 720 p NTSC mode 950 968 PG1 The VBS output is automatically set to ON If the sync signals Hsync PAL mode 969 PG1 Hperiod Vsync and Vtotal settings NE SECAM SECAM mode 964 PGI 964 PGI selected differ from the standard timings contained inside the NTSC M NTSC M mode 994 PG1 VG 859C the VBS output is set to 924 OFF re recat en 0 fram Pamm osen _ eun PALNmose _ 2 _ Setting 1 the sync signals CV CS HS and VS These settings select the polarities of the sync signals set the signals ON or OFF etc CV RGB 0 7 CS N 0 4 HS N 0 3 VS P 0 2 Fig 5 4 2 Setting the sync signals CV CS HS and VS Table 5 4 3 Sync signal CV CS HS and VS setting method CV 0 composite video R The composite sync signal is carried sync signal 2 8 The composite sync signal is carried on G _ The composite sync signal is carried The composite sync signal is carried on B M The composite sync signal is carried on R B 6 J amp B The composite sync signal is carried on G B The composite sync signal is carried on R G B os oo Ww eee o _ _____ The horizontal sync signal is set The vertical sync signal is set oo wo eee o The composite sync signal is set vs 0000 e The sync signals from the CS connector output at an analog leve
111. of 25mV are ignored Example 724mV gt 700mV How to adjust the selected video output level 1 The fine adjustment mode is established by pressing the LEVEL key The LEVEL key LED now lights Oscilloscope 2 The output level can be increased using the 4 key and reduced using the key VG 859B om The adjustment is in the approximate range of 25mV to 25mV Use an oscilloscope etc to check the level 75 ohm 3 When the fine adjustments have been terminator completed or when the mode is to be exited press the LEVEL key again The LEVEL key LED now goes off BNC cable 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust another color and level Upon completion of all the fine adjustments to reflect the results of the fine adjustments save the data SET key cannot be used to make temporary changes e The video output level fine adjustment procedure is used to adjust more finely the video output level which has already been calibrated refer to 4 11 How to execute calibration calibration FUNCDY e Calibration is performed at the factory prior to shipment Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 15 Setting the digital level mode HE HE NE EE NE EE EE NE EE EN HE NE NE HE NE EE ME EEE Select the digital level mode Cfg Digital Level Mode
112. output and for which ON has been selected in 5 Setting the audio output channels of 5 6 Setting the HDMI output 11 1 2 5 Concerning the Lipsync pattern No 33 Option pattern No 33 is a Lip Sync pattern For details on the Lip Sync function refer to 6 15 6 Lip Sync function Chapter 11 REFERENCE 11 1 2 6 Concerning the HDMI CEC pattern No 35 Optional pattern No 35 is the HDMI CEC pattern Operations are performed in accordance with the CEC function settings For details on these settings refer to 6 16 CEC function HDMI CEC Receive Pattern Logical Address 1h lt 12 Command send to VG OFH FA 82h FA 10h FA OOR EA lt Example of what appears on the display monitoring mode gt Display contents 1 CEC mode HDMI CEC Monitor Pattern Monitoring mode HDMI CEC Transmission Pattern Command transmission mode HDMI CEC Response Pattern Command response mode 2 Logical VG logical address which has been set address Display of CEC CEC Command send to Device Xh command A command was sent to the device set destination logical address Xh transmission or CEC Command sent to VG reception The VG 859C received a command Command to the VG logical address which was status set CEC Command sent to Other Devices A command was transferred to a unit other than the VG 859C Command to an address other than the VG logical address which was set Waitin
113. periods The equalizing pulse is inserted in the EQPfp and EQPbp periods Serration cannot be set in 0 5H increments when the non interlace progressive scanning mode is used and tri level sync signals are output The figure below shows how the phases correlate using examples of when Serration 0 5H is selected and when Serration EXOR is selected With Serration 0 5 Hperiod lt A 1 2 With Serration EXOR Hperiod Fig 5 3 16 Phase correlation of Serration 7 Setting VDstart VDline VDstart 0 000mS 0 0H VDline 0 000mS 0 0H Fig 5 3 17 Setting VDstart and VDline Table 5 3 12 VDstart and VDline setting method VDstart Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys XXXX XH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4095 0 H in 0 5H increments VDstart lt Vtotal 1H VDline Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys XXXX XH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4095 0 H in 0 5H increments VDline lt Vtotal The sum of VDstart VDline cannot be set in excess of VTotal The settings can be edited to ensure data compatibility with other models but they will be ignored by the VG 859B Set the sum within the following range VDstart VDline lt Vtotal 8 Setting Vdisp2 This is the setting for Vdisp in the second field This menu item is displayed only when the interlace amp sync mode or interlace amp video mode has been selected as the sc
114. sets the maximum number of times the tracks can be digitally copied by an Unlisted Recorder at the quality level defined by Q_U Common Number XXX Setting range 0 to 255 keys 0 Prohibited 1 to 254 Permitted up to the designated number of times 255 No restrictions 7 Setting Q S and Q U of ACP Packets Q A 0Q 5 00 0 0 0 1 Fig 5 8 7 Setting Q S and Q U of ACP Packets Table 5 8 8 Packet A S and U setting method item Key LCD display Description This permits digital copying at the CD quality level This permits digital copying at the DSD quality level 8 Setting 5 Move_U of ACP Packets _ 0 5 0 Move U 0 0 1 Fig 5 8 8 Setting 5 and Move_U of ACP Packets Table 5 8 9 ACP Packet Move_A Move_S and Move_U setting method sO Movement is prohibited What has been copied under the definition of Count A is targeted Movement is permitted 9 5 Movement is prohibited What has been copied under the definition of 0 Count S is targeted Movement is permitted E 9 Movement is prohibited What has been copied under the definition of Count U is targeted Movement is permitted S targ Move 0 9 Setting ISRC Continued and ISRC Valid of ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Cont 0 0 1 ISRC1 Valid 0 0 1 Fig 5 8 9 Setting ISRC Continued and ISRC Valid of ISRC1 Packet Tab
115. setting for the audio data header is used Setting item Channel Count ChannelCnt C leo OOOO areas Mm 2 e nem p for pr Key _ s ss 7 re 80 18 Setting the sample size and sample frequency of Audio InfoFrame SampSize Refer 0 3 SampFreq Refer 0 7 Fig 5 7 18 Setting the sample size and sample frequency of Audio InfoFrame Table 5 7 17 Audio InfoFrame sample size and sample frequency setting method e mw 2 19 Setting the channel allocation and level shift value of Audio InfoFrame ChannelAlloc 0 0 31 LevelShift 0dB 0 15 Fig 5 7 19 Setting the channel allocation and level shift value of Audio InfoFrame Table 5 7 18 Audio InfoFrame channel allocation and level shift value setting method XX Channel Allocation Number keys Setting range 0 to 31 ChannelAlloc Level Shift Value Number keys XXdB Setting range 0 to 15 LevelShift 20 Setting downmix inhibit of Audio InfoFrame Down mix Permitted 0 1 Fig 5 7 20 Setting downmix inhibit of Audio InfoFrame Table 5 7 19 Audio InfoFrame downmix inhibit setting method Downmix Inhibit i Permitted Downmix is permitted Down mix Prohibited Downmix is prohibited Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 21 Setting the type and version of MPEG InfoFrame MPEG InfoFrame 5 1 1
116. should not be used e The settings must be saved and the system restarted when the IP address port number has been changed The settings are not reflected by the act of saving them alone They will take effect only when the system is next started up Concerning general IP address settings IP addresses fall into two categories global addresses which are allocated to computers connected to the Internet and private addresses which are used by LANs etc Depending on the IP address the following conventions apply to the private addresses used for LANs Class 10 0 0 0 to 10 255 255 255 The number used for the 3 digit number for the first block is always 10 and it is followed by combinations of numbers from O to 255 for the subsequent blocks Use of this class of IP address enables up to 16 million computers to be connected by a single network Class B 172 16 0 0 to 172 31 255 255 The number used for the 3 digit number for the first block is always 172 and numbers from 16 to 31 are used for the 3 digit number for the second block Use of this class of IP address enables up to 65 534 computers to be connected by a single network Class C 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 The numbers used for the 3 digit number for the first two blocks are always 192 168 and numbers from 0 to 255 are used for the 3 digit number for the third block Numbers 1 and 255 are not normally allocated as the 3 digit number fo
117. system fom This sets the to OFF VChipSystem 14000 _ This sets the rating system to MPAA U S TV This sets the rating system to U S TV English This sets the rating system to Canadian English This sets the rating system to Canadian French Names and brief descriptions of rating systems MPAA Motion Picture Association of America This organization was set up in order to promote the spread of American movies Besides promoting exports overseas and cracking down on pirated movies it is also active in many other fields On the U S domestic front it helps viewers exercise voluntary controls by establishing a rating system for violence sexual content and discriminatory content for example Its rating standards are strict and its screening targets images and language that would hardly raise an eyebrow in Japan U S TV U S TV Parental Guideline Rating System This rating system is incorporated in general TV sets installed in American homes English Canadian English Language Rating System This rating system targets Canadian English French Canadian French Language Rating System This rating system targets Canadian French Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 2 Setting the MPAA and U S TV rating systems VChipMPAA G 0 7 VChipUSTV TV Y 0 5 Fig 5 9 6 Setting the MPAA and U S TV ratings Table 5 9 11 MPAA ratings setting method wee o menAseeriketerme
118. tables 1 Press the FUNC key A key and SET key Select Function 0 YPbPr Edit Fig 4 8 1 Selecting the function 2 Use the number keys to input the number of the table 0 to 9 and press the SET key The table numbers can also be changed one at a time using the 14 YPbPr No 0 0 9 corresponding to coefficient SMPTE 274M 296M RP 177 Fig 4 8 2 Inputting the table number 3 Use the number keys to input coefficients a to i 0 to 1 0000 Y 0 2126 0 7152 0 0722 Pb 0 1146 0 3854 0 5000 Pr 0 5000 0 4542 0 0458 Fig 4 8 3 Inputting the coefficients 4 Save the edited data 1 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save YPbPr No 4 Fig 4 8 4 Saving the data 2 Use the number keys to input the number of the table 0 to 9 serving as the save destination for the edited data 3 Press the SAVE key The data is saved and the LED of the SAVE key goes off The data can be saved at any time during editing e reflect the data without saving it do not use the SAVE key but press the SET key The values remain valid until the power is turned off _ If the ESC key is pressed instead operation returns to the previous screen without the data having been saved To restore the values in tables No 0 to 3 to the values given in Table 4 8 1 initialize the flash R
119. the area bounded by the widths of the H and V settings with 1 serving as the center position 0 100 Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 When flicker interval 8 4LEVEL has been selected for a pattern 0 to 7 or E set the display time and RGB level 4 levels TO 811 24 0 255 T2 873 20 0 255 Fig 6 11 6 Setting the display time RO 255 GO 255 BO 255 R1 240 G1 240 B1 240 R2 20 62 2082 20 32 63 32 32 Fig 6 11 7 Setting the RGB levels 4 levels Table 6 11 7 Display time and RGB level 4 levels setting method Setting item Setting item Key LCD display Setting range Display time Number keys XXX 0 to 255 V TO to 3 RGB level Number keys XXX 0 to 255 RO to 3 GO to 3 BO to RO G0 BO R1 G1 B1 R2 G2 B2 R3 G3 B3 moen Display time TO Display time T1 Display time 2 Display time T3 6 Optional function When the 9 16LEVEL flicker interval has been selected for format from 0 to 7 or format E set the display time and RGB level 16 levels This is the same setting as for 4LEVEL With 16 levels the display time can be set up to 999V Table 6 11 8 Display time and RGB level 16 levels setting method Setting item Key LCD Setting range display Display time Number XXX 0 to 999 V to 15 keys RGB level Number XXX In the 8 bit LUT 10 bit mode 0 to 255 RO to 15 GO to 15 keys XXXX In the 10 bit
120. the interlace scanning mode refer to the figure above EQPfp EQPbp and Serration cannot be set in 0 5H increments when tri level sync signals are output in the non interlace progressive scanning mode Set them in 1H increments instead Set EQPfp within the range of EQPfp 1H lt Hfrontp when tri level sync signals are output the interlace scanning mode The sum of VDstart and VDline cannot be set in excess of Vtotal The settings can be edited to ensure data compatibility with other models but they will be ignored by the VG 859C Set the sum within the following range VDstart VDline lt Vtotal In the 2 field mode for interlace scanning different values can be set in the first field and second field In the 2 field mode for interlace scanning Vtotal Vbackp and Vfrontp can be set in 0 5H increments In the 1 field mode for non interlace or interlace scanning they can be set only in 1H increments However set them in such a way that the value of Vfrontp Vsync Vbackp is in 1H increments Different restrictions apply in the multi bit mode optional function Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE OPTION p 243 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 4 Output condition data configuration list Timing data Setting item Setting range Output condition Sync signal output mode ANALOG TR1080 TR1035 TR720 NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC M NTSC 443 PAL M
121. the interval of 1V by a frame with progressive scan a field with interlaced scan and with the amount of 1 pixel movement The VG 859C achieves smoother scrolling by preparing two patterns that are shifted by 0 5 pixels or four patterns shifted by 0 25 pixels lt lt Example gt gt If you want to scroll a video image having a timing of 1920 x 1080 60p in the horizontal direction for about 5 seconds 13 pixels per 2V or 6 5 pixels 1 per 1V are required 1 The amount of movement 1 1920 60 5 6 4 6 5 Standard setting 1 Standard setting 2 Half pixel scrolling 2 The amount of movement is The amount of movement is Sule ES DENE Den 13 pixels per 2 frames 6 5 pixels per frame 7 pixels per frame Pattern A Pattern A Pattern A moves 6 pixels movement moves 6 5 pixels after 1 frame Pattern after 1 frame Pattern after 1 frame Pattern B moves 7 pixels moves 13 pixels moves 6 5 pixels after 2 frames Pattern after 2 frames Pattern after 2 frames Pattern Does not scroll smoothly Scrolls smoothly Pattern A Basic pattern Pattern pattern created by moving pattern 0 5 pixels Fig 6 15 13 General description of half pixel scrolling Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Limitations e Only image data created by the user can be used for half pixel patterns Half pixel patterns may only be scrolled right an
122. the previous screen and then input the group number Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES There are ten coefficient tables for conversion into YPbPr Tables No 0 to 3 comply with SMPTE standards tables No 4 to 9 are for the users to set their own The YPbPr coefficient tables are valid when YPbPr has been selected as the 4 RGB YPbPr setting in 5 4 Setting the output conditions The number of the table to be used is selected in 5 Setting the YPbPr coefficient table number in 5 4 Setting the output conditions These settings are not applied to the HDMI output For details on setting the color difference coefficients of the HDMI output refer to 3 Setting the color difference coefficients Repetition in 5 6 Setting the HMDI output 4 8 1 coefficient tables The table contents are shown below All the values in these tables are set with up to four decimal places Table 4 8 1 YPbPr coefficient table pes o ors 0072 03854 osoo 03000 04842 ooo Same as No 0 Table 4 8 2 Correlation with SMPTE standards for YPbPr coefficient tables 9 SMPTE 274M 296M RP 177 1920 x 1080 1280 x 720 SMPTE 240M Hivision 1920 x 1035 SMPTE 293M 720 x 483 SMPTE 125M NTSC YPbPr calculation formula Y axR bxG cxB dxR fxB gxR hxG ixB Pb Pr 4 8 2 How to edit YPbPr coefficient
123. the timing data and another program number for the pattern data The data is output on a group by group basis and so by registering only the data required operating ease is enhanced in cases where multiple program data are to be output The data relating to groups is stored on the PC cards Program data Group 1 Program No 1 Group data No 1 Timing data Pattern data Pattern data 850 E Group data No 2 Program No 850 wee _ Timing data ep Pattern data Group data No 3 Program No 851 MF Timing data 850 Timing data Pattern data 852 Pattern data Group data No 4 Program No 852 Not set Timing data Not set Pattern data Group data No 98 Not set Program No 999 Not set E Timing data Pattern data Fig 1 4 1 Configuration of a group 1 5 Concerning the operating modes The VG 859C has four operating modes each of which is outlined below Table 1 5 1 List of operating modes Mode Reference section Description Direct display mode 4 1 1 The video signals of the data in the program whose number has been selected are output in this mode Any program number from 1 to 999 can be selected Group display mode 4 1 2 The video signals of the data in the group whose number has been selected are output in this mode Only the number registered for a particular group can be selected as the group data number Max 98 groups Auto display mode The video signals of the data in the program or group whose nu
124. to correspond with the number of dots for H disp and number of lines H for V disp in the timing data Refer to Configuration of timing data and basic operations 5 1 If they do not correspond the image may be displayed out of position As a result of the above settings images 1 to 9 with a 640 x 480 frame size are displayed in the sequence of 1 2 gt 9 by moving the display start coordinates from the 1920 x 1440 images registered in the optional pattern The figures in parentheses denote the display start coordinates 7 0 960 8 640 960 50 gt lt di 4 p 4920 Fig 6 15 11 Example of images for simple moving pictures Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting the number of simple moving picture repetitions G Repeat H 1 V 1 1 15 Fig 6 15 12 Setting the number of simple moving picture repetitions Table 6 15 14 Number of simple moving picture repetition setting method Number of repetitions Number keys XX 1 to 15 G Repeat in H direction V direction This setting is valid only when Mov has been set for the scroll direction G Dir of the graphics plane 6 15 5 Half pixel scrolling optional function The half pixel scrolling function is set as follows Concerning half pixel scrolling The conventional scrolling function moves a pattern by
125. to the VG 859C programs can be called by their numbers the character dot crosshatch and other pattern data can be turned ON or OFF and the RGB signals can be switched ON or OFF e RB 649 Remote control box used with the VG series e VG series terminal command instruction manual The generators in the VG series can be operated using the dedicated terminal commands from an external computer such as a PC The commands and data are received and sent though the RS 232C interface or LAN 1 1 1 2 CONCERNING THE 859 RB 1848 General description This programmable video signal generator designed for digital TV applications hereafter referred to simply as the 859 is an all in one video signal generator which supports applications in all areas of the display instrumentation field It can deliver RGB analog output signals and DVI output signals as well as NTSC PAL SECAM VBS connector D5 connector S connector and HDMI output signals In terms of the analog output signals the model supports color difference signals and tri level sync signals It can provide bitmap displays with a full color capability of 16 77 million colors Its output signals which support a wide range of displays such as CRTs LCDs and PDPs as well as digital TV displays enable the generator to be used for the development of technology for video related equipment as well as on the production lines and in the inspection and maintenance operations f
126. tone selection method Jor The beep tone is not sounded The beep tone is sounded Factory setting Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 3 Setting the pattern display mode Select the pattern display mode Disp Mode Cfg Disp Mode 0 0 1 Single Pattern Fig 3 3 3 Selecting the pattern display mode Table 3 3 2 Pattern display mode selection method Single Pattern Only one pattern can be selected when switching patterns using the pattern keys Example If the CROSS key is selected when the CHARA key is already selected the CHARA key selection will be released 1 Multi Pattern multiple number of patterns can be selected when switching patterns using the pattern keys Example If the CROSS key is selected when the CHARA key is already selected both patterns appear together on the display Factory setting 41 Setting display mode eee Select the program name NAME key display mode Cfg NAME Display Standard 0 1 Fig 3 3 4 Selecting the NAME display mode Table 3 3 3 NAME display mode selection method Standard In the NAME ON status the program name dot clock frequency horizontal sync frequency vertical sync frequency Hdisp and Vdisp are displayed Factory setting Sinple In the NAME ON status only the program name is displayed NAME Only For details on the NAME display refer to 6 14 Setting the program name
127. video Video output NM 0 Delay time of audio Audio output A Output simultaneously Input to a TV The VG 859C allows delay times to be freely set Fig 6 15 17 General description of Delay mode 2 EDID Mode In EDID mode Video Latency video delay time value and Audio Latency audio delay time value are read from the EDID of the receiving device and data is output at delay time conforming to these values For details on EDID setting refer to HDMI standard High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Delay time of video 32 ms Delay time of audio 20 ms on the receiver end Reads EDID VG 859C l a 5 Delay time of video 32 ms Video output BE EE Delay time of audio 20 ms Audio output Input to a TV Delay time of video Delay time of audio 32 20 12 ms Output simultaneously VG 859C outputs the audio with 12 ms delay Fig 6 15 18 General description of EDID mode Limitations e Audio output is valid only for internal audio L PCM from the HDMI e Delay time settings that exceed the video ON OFF time cannot be made e The Lip Sync function cannot be used while performing HDCP Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Setting Items The following settings are used for the Lip Sync pattern Table 6 15 17 Lip Sync function setting Items
128. video signals untouched As a result even if the signals are recorded the screen brightness will vacillate and these signals will also interfere with the sync signals and disrupt the picture These impediments make copied material unfit for viewing What are color stripes As part of the Macrovision standard color stripes are overlaid onto the regular Macrovision signals This method of superimposing modulated color burst signals onto video signals is also referred to as the color burst copy protection The color stripe function inserts thin horizontal lines into copied images so that as with Macrovision the images will be unfit for viewing Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 11 2 Settings details 1 _ Setting t the output mode Set the output ON or OFF and set the mode The mode that can be set differs by timing system Macrovision Mode OFF 0 5 Fig 5 11 1 Setting the output mode Table 5 11 2 Output mode setting method Setting item Timing system Mode LCD display Output mode Macrovision Mode DVD STB Type 1 AGC only DVD STB Type 2 AGC 2Line Colorstripe DVD STB Type 3 AGC 4Line Colorstripe VHS US obs DVD STB Type 1 nse only s _ i wos i mes or e i mos oe ms S i Joos e ws oo S So i wos e ms one PAL 5 12 Setting Gamut Meta Data Packe
129. 0 0 7 Quality 0 0 3 Fig 5 8 4 Setting the copy number and quality of ACP Packets Table 5 8 5 ACP Packet copy number and quality setting method Copy Number o A time Copy is allowed up to the designated number of times 80 times The number of copy times is not restricted Copy One generation Number of channels Sampling frequency Bit width oo 2 channels or less 48 kHz or lower 2 channels or less No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions No restrictions 48 kHz or lower 16bit Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 Setting the transaction of ACP Packets Transaction O 0 1 Fig 5 8 5 Setting the transaction of ACP Packets Table 5 8 6 Packet transaction setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Transaction E o o Not present 6 _Setting Count_ A Count_S and Count_U of ACP Packets Count_A 0 Count_S 0 Count_U 0 0 255 Fig 5 8 6 Setting Count_A Count_S and Count_U of ACP Packets Table 5 8 7 ACP Packet Count_A Count_S and Count_U setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Count_A This sets the maximum number of times the tracks can be digitally copied by an Approved Secure Recorder at the quality level defined by Count_S This sets the maximum number of times the tracks can be digitally copied by a Secure Recorder at the quality level defined by S Count_U This
130. 00 76 009 LE 69v LE 009 LE 076 59 9 9 mopuIM 62 OUM MOPUIM 00 007 095 0Z2VI Sd wvOA NIN 9 90 000905 000002 Le Le LE MOpuIM YZL SYM 00 ozLOmosrxorrlvia sdrryoA 990 00000 GL 9 00L 88 GLLOMIOBK OPPLVEE 599 OOTWNY _ N N 0 000 ossen 2704 956 aym 9600 SdbbbOA 00000 SOQUdIOLII AXH ZHN zH 2 waned HIP ed ou S d d Aouanbedy ouenbaeij N zum 1003 JUEJOG nu 9u S e dsip ON 390p 100 E9IJ8A 8 UOZUOH PG3 program No 940 969 6 45101 OWI edsip 6 eyep 89140 dsiq OWI ejdsip g eyep 781 dO 98140 9 dsiq OWI e dsip 9 ejep 68140 dsiq OWI ejdsip ejep 9140 vit 951 OWI Aeldsip 28130 dsiq OWI Aeldsip eyep 28140 ZH 451 OWI Aeldsip eyep 8140 Lit dsiq OWI e3ep 08130 fn um ren wu w 109 ILANS 1009 31 dS 92180 d 0050821 066 56 186 ONOW 1
131. 00 Fig 4 11 5 Setting the reference voltages 3 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks 4 Press the SAVE key When the data has been saved the DACOUT VOLT DATA SAVE message is displayed and the LED of the SAVE key goes off MinR 1000G 1000B 1000 DACOUT VOLT DATA SAVE Fig 4 11 6 Saving the data Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 Automatic calibration execution 1 Press the Y key to move to the next page 2 Connect as shown in the figure below VG 859B B Pb BNC cable 75 ohm terminator 3 Press the 1 key and select ON for the automatic calibration function AutoCalibration ON 0 1 Fig 4 11 7 Selecting ON or OFF for the automatic calibration function 4 Press the SET key Automatic calibration now starts AutoCalibration ON 0 1 AutoCalibration ON 0 1 Calibration End Fig 4 11 8 When automatic calibration is Fig 4 11 9 When automatic calibration is underway completed calibration successful During automatic calibration moves AutoCalibration ON 0 1 continuously from left to right Calibration Errar Fig 4 11 10 When automatic calibration is completed calibration unsuccessful Concerning errors An error is judged to have occurred and the calibration is terminated if during calibration the readout data yielded by the calibration is significantly different from the data inside the VG 859C Check the c
132. 01 6 8 2 6 YEWO o9OrrelxzelivsaA d N bod pveixzezi 0970 00009 0988 816 119491 8 16104 MOPUIM DOWN 0005000 00962 00098 05290 116 16 16 16 16 16 116 16 666 wes aw a wow wow MOPUIM p EWOH 0 80020 009 VS3 DOWN 0005000 00068 0000 0068 MOpUIM 01991 YEWO MOPUIM lt 99000 lt 009 931 od DOWN 000150040 0060 00099 06238 MOPUIM 0194014 Z MOPUIM 9 dOWNY 0005000 00009 00009 0009 2 MOPUIM 0 1001 0 MOPUIM sgOvzolxoszivsan sowny d d 0 0821 009494 oie MOPUIM 0 184014 0 1eu04 MOPUIM G1 vzoL o8zIVSan sowny 00802 000 90091 96 HV useped 03 4140 aos 900080 000800 00009 18669 AXH ZHN zH 2 ejep 009 24 6 Auejod ju SJOP 2U S Ae dsip jo ON 2002100 E9II9
133. 0140 v6 esOMdospxOz VI 08001 0002 orses veg Jeg 10 09 319 5 10 09 3 dINS 9 140 _ Boa 0803 100 00009 oosie 698 Jeg 1002 95001 001 JEG 10100 9 001 9600 66500087023 SOWNV 0870 0002 orses 98 jeg 1000 6 92 JEG 1000 5 6 OgOdogr orevi3 SdpvvoA N N Bo 00 00009 Jeg 1000 SIN 20100 26 14 30140 76 66 8 N N ogoro 0 6 08 AXH ZHN zH 2 a uJaned weed y ed ou S d ouenbaeij 00009 WERE e dsip Jo oN e1UOZIOH days p eJc days 91 eJc 25 4315 91 days ojeos eJ6 99 5 6 days 79 eJc 25 dejs p9 days 965 eJc je s eJ6 4 5 965 HV 539 1995 otpny 200 200 wayed q4v 31 1340 939 92130 4oeu 1exeeds 2140 edsip Qiq3 Wwened 200 32140 200 30140 678 066 9d REFERENCE um ie 606 088 ON 9d 4221236
134. 09 12 3 6 Remote D Sub 25 pin female 310 1237 RS232G D Sub 9 pin male aja 312 VET NE 313 12 4 1 Differences between individual models in the VG 859 series 0220220121 313 12 4 2 Restrictions on functions used by SP 8848 614 649 316 12 43 COncerming the Optional TUNCHOMS 316 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed 44 317 12 4 5 Concerning the video output connectors 318 Concerning the priority output DOM 318 2 Concerming the output Connectors uer 319 3 About Setting Color Difference 321 12 4 6 Concerning the multi bit mode optional 321 Saa 322 Introduction Thank you very much for purchasing this model VG 859C video signal generator This manual contains details on the operation procedures to be followed when the VG 859C RB 1848 is used the checkpoints and precautions to be observed and so on Improper handling may result in malfunctioning Before using the VG 859C please read through these instructions to ensure that you will operate the generato
135. 09 251 1002 251 40140 cd Wd JdddA 10109 251 40140 40140 10109 G 9000 Jeg 1002 OSIN 48810029 OSIN 48810029 OSIN Jeg 10 00 9 9 Jeg 10 00 9 9 t P OSLN 20 9N TVd gt 9 09 1 9 W Tvd JdddA Jeg 1002 900196001 Cd tprOSIN JdddA Jeg 1002 95001 95001 Cd W OSIN 4dddA 56040 uoyeussoJo 6140 zd 6 91 WWOaS 500 uoyeussoJo 6140 41 JdddA 04 29 69 Wd JdddA d GTF OSAN JdddA Cd 6 91 f OSIN JdddA ocOdogolxoz lvia Le ez dogolxozslvia szOdogolxoz lvia 89 yeOdogolxozelvia 808 16 2060801 0Z6IVIA 895 9019 9 65012 Uo9jeussoJo 9 721 40 veldo 9p 72140 e LdO gt 9 88017 U9 eussoJo 9013 9 55010 dwey dwey ewwes 1140 109 LdY 314 5 UOISIOA 10109 FLANS 92130 JayJe 9 55017 1 9 67140 JoxJe A 9 55017 1 67140 9011 9 ACIS 90 10 ejeos eJ6 31140 9011 9 ACIS 90 10 ejeos eJ6 31140 91140 050d0901x0261 VI3 059 09 9 0971 ee 9011 9 ACI 90 10 oj
136. 1 1 or 1 0 When the HDCP authentication was successful gt PASS When it has failed gt NG HDCP Encrypted Video HDMI HDCP Verl 0 Authentication PASS EDID Headr 6 Chk Sum HDCP OK EDID OK TO 1234 123 Fig 4 10 11 What appears on the display during HDCP execution Pattern These displays appear when the NAME key is pressed Top EDID header check sum inspection results Middle HDCP authentication status OK or NG EDID inspection results OK or Bottom Synchronization Verification Values Tx Value calculated for transmitter end Ri Rx Value calculated for receiver end Ri The displays are updated each time HDCP authentication or encryption is completed The EDID inspection results are displayed only when EDID has been acquired EDID is acquired when HDMI is selected as the 11 priority output port setting in 5 4 Setting the output conditions and either EDID Check is set for HDCP set FUNCC version or AUTO is selected as the 1 HDMI output mode setting in 5 6 Setting the HDMI output Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 10 3 4 When HDCP authentication has failed error codes If HDCP authentication has failed after the HDCP encryption has commenced a disturbed image like a sandstorm 1 is output and an error message appears at the bottom of the LCD screen Under HDCP Ver 1 0 resetting is automatically initiated during ti
137. 1 to 849 Optional patterns 64 40H to 7FH Optional patterns image data 64 80H to BFH This number depends on the image data size and card capacity User character patterns 16 to EFH Number of characters in program 20 characters 99 1 to 99 For details on groups refer to 1 4 Concerning Number of groups Number of group data 98 1 to 98 Tarp Number of characters in group names 20 characters Program data Program table PG1 Timing data 850 999 Pattern data 850 999 Program table PG2 Timing data 850 999 Pattern data 850 999 Program table PG3 Timing data 850 Pattern data 850 999 Optional patterns Optional patterns OOH 3FH Character patterns Character pattems 20H DFH Font 5x7 Font 7x9 Font 16x 16 User character patterns FOH Internal data Timing data 1 849 Pattern data 1 849 Optional patterns 40H 7FH Optional patterns 80H image data Character patterns 20H to DFH cannot be used as source data when registering data on a PC card User character patterns EOH EFH Fig 1 3 1 Internal data and PC card data Chapter 1 CONCERNING THE VG 859C 1848 1 4 Concerning groups A group refers to a program data table in which the user can register any program data It is also possible to select data of one program number for
138. 170 187 L4 68 5 85 6 102 7 119 LC 204 D 221 238 F 255 Fig 6 9 3 Setting the level layout Table 6 9 3 Level layout setting method Setting item LCD display Setting range Level layout Number keys XXX 0 to 255 LO to LF Relationship between directions number of repetitions and intervals lt Example 1 When the 0 Hor is set for the direction gt Number of repetitions 5 H interval V interval Example 2 When the 1 Ver is for the direction H interval Vertical direction Number of repetitions 5 6 10 Setting the burst pattern The format interval and step are set for the burst pattern data Set the format interval and step for the burst pattern data Format L gt R 0 3 Interval 5 Step 1 dot Fig 6 10 1 Setting the format interval and step Table 6 10 1 Format interval and step setting method Format em The pattern is increased from left to right Format The pattern is increased from right to left 2 L lt C gt R The pattern is increased from the center to the left and right 3 L gt C lt R The pattern is increased from the left and right to the center Interval Number keys XX The number of vertical lines with same thickness Interval which are to be displayed is set as the interval Setting range 1 to 99 dot Number keys XX dot The increment by which the line thickness is to be increased is set as the step Setting range 0 to 99 dot E
139. 2 ON i ed ou S ouanbai Aouanbey 1005 4 uy ous Ae dsip Jo ON 1205 100 2 939 910 0 0 0 0 9600 986 01097 07717 SU OO TVNV NINI 09707 0896 626 55200 anja 00 OzLOmdogrxozzvia SdrrroA 087 02 7006 00002 00029 8 0 5620 mopuIM 199 6 00 9g 6LLOndogrxozzvia sd prroA 087 021 000 6 08864 1679 6 95001 0zLO dogrxoz viI3 089 021 7006 00002 00029 6 MOPUIM 96001 00 99 61 Odogrxozzvia sd prroA DOTWNY 08 lt 02 09961 06 06 oz doz xogzivi3 Hd ppgoA 0210821 00g 8bl 00002 00006 MODUIM 9608 08 02 1082 cc arl 09961 0 MOPUIM 0 0ZL l0g0Lx0zeLvia Hd rrroA ogorxozer 008 00002 00579 r MODUIM 9609 09 dlal w ogorxozer 08864 19 166 MODUIM 9606 MODUIM 06 00 SOTWNY 00076 00000 092 LE
140. 2 Setting the bit rate of MPEG 147 23 Setting the frame and field repeat of MPEG InfoFrame 147 9 5 lt ISRC Packets roc S euo ta ato tunisie d 148 1 Setting the Packets ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 149 2 Setting the ACP type of ACP Packets 149 3 Setting the DVD audio type dependent generation and copy permission of ACP packets 150 4 Setting the copy number and quality of ACP Packets 150 5 Setting the transaction of Packets iio 151 6 Setting Count A Count S and Count U of ACP Packets 151 7 Setting AQ S and UT ACP Packets Ladere 151 8 Setting Move A Move S and Move of ACP 152 9 Setting ISRC Continued and ISRC Valid of ISRC1 152 10 Setting the ISRC status of the ISRC1 152 11 Setting the validity information of the ISRC1 153 12 Setting the catalogue code UPC EAN 1 13 of the ISRC1
141. 28 128 139 3 14 242 253 117 128 T 235 219 188 173 78 63 32 Cb 128 16 154 42 214 102 240 128 Cr 128 138 16 26 230 240 118 128 Under Y 235 217 183 165 60 42 7 1 Cb 128 3 157 31 225 99 253 128 128 139 3 14 242 253 117 128 O O X O v 2 2 e e e 0 0 0 3 2 2 Q Q Q 0 0 A Q Q lt above values for 8 bit output For 10 bit and 12 bit output corresponding values must be used REMOTE CONTROL By connecting the RB 614C or RB 649 remote control box the VG 859C can be operated by remote control The following three functions can be executed using the RB 614C or RB 649 Neither box can be used to edit program data etc Refer to 10 4 1 Restrictions on functions used by SP 8848 RB 614C and RB 649 Functions which can be executed by remote control Direct display FUNCO card data copy FUNC4 List display FUNC9 10 1 RB 614C RB 649 10 1 1 Key layout diagrams SIG SHIFT GROUP MODE GE ee SIG BEBE Ooo 649 Fig 10 1 1 RB 614C Fig 10 1 2 RB 649 10 1 2 Connections Connect the connecting cable of the RB 614C or RB 649 to the remote connector on the rear panel of the VG 859C 10 1 3 Concerning the key operations The keys of the RB 614C and RB 649 listed in the table be
142. 3 ou S dr eounos 4043 2u S 104 Aouere 941 ou S dI JO euun oipne y 10213 pejnoexe SI ou zou SI cO JOU YOY pue 99 uioq 9103 seJnjoid ejduuis y Bunes 2215 y uojeuu JOU y ui dsipA 941 ueeq JOU seu Bunuoddns 9 Ul JOU SEM MOV JOU SEM esuodsai y Jou SEM YOY LOGG peunooo sey v Jeonan y ui soy uey 1 410 1013 y episino si y 99493 eDueJ Bunes y si Jeonan y ui djdO3 Bunes y si Jeo HEISGN Bunes eu si ejep eu ou s eu y si Jeonan u
143. 4 Viewers 14 years and older C8 Children eight years and older Programming be viewed by children 14 Programming may be viewed by children aged 8 years and older and above 18 Adult Programming G General Programming suitable for all audiences Programming for adults only General programming Table 5 9 16 Canadian French TV rating setting method Canadian JE o Exempt is set as the Canadian French rating French ratin General is set as the Canadian French rating VChipFrench 2 Not recommended for young children is set as the Canadian French rating 3 13ans Programming may not be suitable for children under 13 is set as the Canadian French rating 16ans Programming is not suitable for children under 16 is set as the Canadian French rating Programming restricted to adults is set as the Canadian French rating Names and descriptions of Canadian French ratings E Exempt 13ans Programming may not be suitable for children under 13 No age restrictions apply Programming unsuitable for children aged 13 and under G General 16ans Programming is not suitable for children under 16 General programming Programming unsuitable for children aged 16 and under 8ans Not recommended for young children 18ans Programming restricted to adults Programming unsuitable for young Programming for adults only children Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES
144. 4 WE6Z ALdWS deer x 072 W962 3 LdlNS doz vee we os og oor 0909 lt 2 0022 SEOLXOZSL vioo s via 6501 ee tes e ef i 2 Jequunu A jeu amp is eui oneJ 2 9 KouenboJJ ZH poued A Jo ou 6101 pyepuejs sjeubis uiw 2 ETT Melos Pace oce Gs Ole vig eie Tie ore eoe goe 16767 169 ISTE 1 L o FL INNSTE ak uu 169 EET CC 8 L T 9 G T T s T 729 229 229 T 129 159 iste EEE LI l JNAS A 8767 9d ZHWS EL L T ado N 1Wd zee sec lege Tee dale Se zte Ole le Ge C86 E C 6 C6 CC6 C Od 796 1 9d de TE 77 1897 WV 23S 626 2 9d 2 9 5 529 79 1204 16 150 eco 229 IN TVd 186 5d 129 ISTE 126 126 026 2 9 696 T 9d ZHINS ET L T ado IVd INNZZZ 126 9 EET TEI 09 1Vd 9C6 C Od IN71Vd 69 Od iste f B
145. 5 Setting the terminal mode Select the external control interface in the terminal mode Cfg Term Mode SIO 0 1 Fig 3 3 5 Selecting the external control interface Table 3 3 4 External control interface selection method WE EN The external control interface of the VG 859C is set to RS 232C Factory setting The external control interface of the VG 859C is set to LAN When the VG 859C is to be controlled using the Windows software program SP 8848 supplied the terminal mode must be set to match the interface of the PC used When using the terminal commands refer to the separate VG Series Terminal Command Instruction Manual The settings must be saved and system restarted when terminal mode has been changed The settings are not reflected by the act of saving them alone They will take effect only when the system is next started up Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 Setting the data mode Select the output condition format analog digital for the program data registered on the PC card Cfg MemCard Mode 0 0 1 Analog Fig 3 3 6 Selecting the data mode Table 3 3 5 Data mode selection method Analog The analog only output condition data is set as per the data on the PC card Factory setting Digital The analog only output condition data is set to the initial values Table 3 3 6 Analog only output condition data Shown in the table on the right are the
146. 660 seo fafaj wi orses gee S6 ONON SLdWS 319 45 52140 14 1660 seo Jd wi seorxozer 0 00009 ossee 96 er ALAS 21180 d e 1080 JdddA 0800 d 4 wi 08010261 09666 e yum framme e en nen a AxH ZHN ZH 2 DN adh 24 6 Auejod Sjop 1003 e dsip ON 90 9 100 E UOZIOH 1 program No 666 026 0N 9d REFERENCE um ie 2 850 879 678 066 ZOd 9011 9 ACI 9011 9 ACIS 9 ACIS 9011 9 ACIS 1000 9 1000 9 1002 9 9 1002 79 109 6 ILdNS 109 6 314 5 109 ILdNS 109 6 314 5 109 6 314 5 109 6 314 5 109 6 314 5 109 6 314 5 ONON 314 15 ONON 314 05 ONON 314 15 ONON 66 314 15 4 3LdNS Loud 31 5 dwey dwey dwey dwey 2 dwey dwey dwey ewwes dwey ewwes ejep Weed 090
147. 99402 0921 13 9OIVNV a Sod 02 1082 092 00006 0094 268 duey 2 due 140 099 09 5 022 od 929x07 000 2 00006 09216 168 euueo 2 dwes 140 0009 50 13 808 Bod 9 Sx0ZZ 0002 00006 09216 068 109 1 10100 31 dINS 92140 090d09010261 VI3 d d 0g0lx0z6L 0089 00009 00979 699 209 314 16 92140 666900801 0261 S0OTYNY a Sod 0901x026 00287 6 6 66 ctv 19 898 9 56042 1 9 uojeussoio 60140 099 0089 0771 700796 000709 0091 198 9 58042 62140 76 6 808 Bod 000 6 06 66 69v LE 988 9 55010 60140 S0TYNY od 08x Orr 700776 00009 00616 S88 9 58042 9 5 60140 v6 6cOdogpxorri via Bod 000 6 06 66 LE 788 31140 09M dorzxoggzvia S0TYNY 070987 700776 99966 05 61 98 3 140 v6 66 0M dOrzxoggzvia S0TYNY
148. A EUOZUOH 2 _ 96 9 MOPUIM 0 1 G MOPUIM s Oo0zi 009vS3A DOWN 000150040 00900 00092 owes 96 9 o He 06 850 879 0 0 662 MOPUIM 001 0909 4072 0892 1 54 OO TVNV 072 lt 0892 NIN 618 ggz ggz g z wopuiM 00 Bold 0vZX088Z 000 6 70009 8 ewweg 5 0 1 dues 6 140 090909088313 sd rrroA 0vZX088Z 7099 609 097 2 07 dues 140 r66S dorzxogezvia Sd rrroA Bod 0vZX088Z 000 6 70009 m dues euueo gw uonoeuoo e 140 S 90 IVNV 087 088 6 8 0428 dwey pios dureijeuobeig veldO pe SOMOSOREZVIA Sd rrPOA wi 08088 coors orses verst we A 109 duey 10498 A 68140 0901087 0882 54 NIN 087088 6 8 109 79 Jeq 10 09 M89 9129 483 79 9 7 O TIVNV N N 820 42 888 66 TNI 8 1000 997 1002 Mg9 9 825 dejs ocz 76 6SOMAOvZxOvPLVI Sd
149. A Pro 32 44 1 48 88 2 196 176 4 192 kHz Downmix Inhibit Permitted Prohibited Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 8 ACP ISRC packet data configuration list Timing data Setting item Setting range ACP ISRC Packet Packet ON OFF OFF ON ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 ACP Packet ACP Type Generic Audio IEC60958 Audio DVD Audio Super Audio CD Reserved or depends on number of copies Copy Number or prohibited Copy Number 1 to 4 6 8 10 times or Unlimited Copy One Generation Transaction Not present Reserve Count_A Prohibited 0 or Permitted 1 to 254 times or Count S Unlimited 255 Count U QA Q_U Move_A Move_S Move_U ISRC1 Packet ISRC Continued ISRC2 packet provided not provided ISRC Valid ISRC2 packet valid invalid ISRC Status Starting Intermediate Ending Validity Information No Validity ISRC UPC EAN UPC EAN and ISRC Copy Permission Granted by Copy Freely CD Quality DSD Quality Movement prohibited Movement permitted 5 1 9 Closed caption V chip data configuration list EN U S TV rating system extension OFF ON bits FV V L D Canadian English ratings E C C8 G PG 14 18 Canadian French ratings E G 8ans 13ans 16ans 18ans Interval 1 to 1023 V in 1V increments 5 1 10 Teletext data configuration list 5 1 11 Macrovision data configuration list optional function Timing data
150. AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 1 11 Changing the pattern data settings 1 Press the FORMAT key The LED of the FORMAT key lights 2 Press the pattern key corresponding to the pattern which is to be changed The screen on which to set the pattern data appears on the LCD 3 Edit the pattern data and output it Refer to Pattern data configuration and setting procedures in chapter 6 If the key is pressed the pattern action setting screen appears if the X key is pressed the graphic color setting screen appears 4 Press the FORMAT key Operation returns from the pattern data setting screen to the original display What has been edited here remains in effect until a new program is executed using direct displ auto display or other function or until the program data is edited using the PC card edit or PC card copy i To save the data on the card use PC card edit FUNC3 4 1 12 Changing timing data settings 1 Press the FORMAT key The LED of the FORMAT key lights 2 Press the TIMING key The screen on which to set the timing data appears on the LCD 3 Edit the pattern data and output it Refer to Timing data configuration and setting procedures in chapter 5 Each time the TIMING is pressed the data horizontal timing data vertical timing data is switched 4 Press the FORMAT key Operation returns from the timing data setting screen to the or
151. ATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Changing the cursor shape The shape of the cursor is changed using the 3 number key Each time the 3 key is pressed the shape is changed by one setting in the following sequence Cross shaped cursor is the default shape Default Cross shaped cursor Vertical line 5x5 dot cross shaped cursor sub pixel mode eL gt Cross shaped cursor Vertical line sub pixel mode 5x5 dot cross shaped cursor sub pixel mode B Fig 4 1 10 Cursor shapes Switching the movement steps of the cursor The step amount of the cursor when any of the cursor movement keys has been operated is changed using the 5 number key Each time the 5 key is pressed this amount is changed by one setting in the following sequence 10 dots is the default amount 10 dots default gt 1dot 100405 10dots hereafter repeated 4 1 6 Changing the window levels The window RGB levels can be varied if either of the following settings has been selected for the window pattern refer to 6 11 Setting the window pattern e When format F has been selected e When a format from 0 to 7 has been selected and the flicker interval has been set to 0 If the flicker interval has been set to a value other than 0 the flicker operation will take priority making it no longer possible for the RGB levels to be varied 1 Press the WINDOW key The LED of the WINDOW key lights and the
152. BIT MULTI BIT page standard multi bit mode mode All modes RGB 24 RGB 30 RGB 36 Y444 24 Y444 30 Y444 36 Y422 24 422 30 Y422 36 FUNCO Variable window RGB R 0 1023 R 0 4095 Direct display level G 0 1023 G 0 4095 B 0 1023 B 0 4095 Digital video output level Graphic color level p 187 FUNC2 Background color level p 187 FUNC3 Gray scale pattern level p 198 Window pattern level p 201 Cursor pattern p 209 Cursor color Background color Bitmap pattern support 24bit 24bit 30bit 36bit 8 2 2 Changes in timing settings In the multi bit mode the timing related settings are as listed below depending on the video format Table 8 2 2 Changes in timing settings Timing data Setting item Setting range Setting increment in multi bit mode Horizontal Input mode us dot 7 m 2 do Hbackp 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot 0 to 2048 dot increments Hfrontp 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot 0102048 dot to 0102048 400 dot HDstart 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot 0 to 2048 dot 40 to 4096 dot 277 timing data Non interlace interlace amp sync interlace amp video _ Field mode 1 field 2 fields Vtotal 0 000 to 99 999 ms 4 to 8192 H 4 to 4096 H 1H increments non interlace non interlace 4 to 4096 H 4 to 2048 H 1H or 0 5H interlace interlace increments Vdisp 1 20 0 000 to 99 999 ms 1 to 4096 H 1 to 2048 H Vsync 1 2 0 000 to
153. C gt end Fig 7 5 3 Check completed The error buzzer sounds if an error has occurred The check is aborted The screen shown below appears on the LCD Flash ROM Check Verify Error message 7 6 Flash ROM initialization When this operation is performed the contents of the internal flash ROM will be initialized to the factory setting 1 Press the 4 key and SET key Select Item 4 0 4 Flash ROM Init Fig 7 6 1 Selecting Flash ROM initialization 2 Press the SET key Flash ROM Init Restore cofing data Fig 7 6 2 Executing the initialization The internal flash ROM is initialized 3 When the initialization is completed the screen shown below appears on the LCD Three seconds later the check item selection screen returns to the display Flash ROM Init OK ESC gt end Fig 7 6 3 Initialization completed MULTI BIT MODE 8 1 General description In the multi gradation gray scale output mode which has been set as the video format the multi bit mode makes it possible to generate patterns corresponding to the gray scale concerned the past these patterns were generated with RGB 24 bits 8 bits for each signal but in this mode patterns can be shown with RGB 36 bits 12 bits for each signal For details on the video formats refer to 5 6 Setting the HDMI output The multi bit mode is selected in the HDMI output bit mode of config edit
154. CP ISRC packets When it is set to OFF the data is output as is using the current settings established in the program Cfg HDMI AUTO SELECT OFF 0 1 Fig 3 3 24 Selecting HDMI automatic reflection Table 3 3 23 HDMI automatic reflection selection method 0 OFF The settings are not automatically reflected Factory setting SELECTED The settings are automatically reflected If program data has been saved using PC card edit FUNC3 when SELECTED automatic reflection is set the InfoFrame data and ACP ISRC packet data after the automatic reflection will be saved Table 3 3 24 AVI InfoFrame Items to be set Output condition AFD Type HDMI output Video Format Repetition Video Code AVI InfoFrame Audio InfoFrame Items to be set HDMI output Optional pattern No 1F display setting Y444 Y422 16 Y422 20 Y422 24 Set in accordance with the EIA CEA 861 setting AudioSrc audio signals Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS Items which are automatically reflected AVI InfoFrame settings which are reflected Active Aspect Ratio Bar setting Calculated by display setting Display pattern Aspect setting Top Bar Bottom Bar Left Bar Right Bar RGB or YCbCr RGB YC422 YC444 Repetition Same setting as left Picture Aspect Ratio Set in accordance with the set Video Code setting Audio InfoFrame settings which are reflected Channel Count Coding Type Sampl
155. Cfg Start Prg No TIM 850 PAT 850 Fig 3 3 11 Selecting the numbers of the start programs When the power is turned on and the direct display mode has started up the programs whose numbers are set here will be executed If no program is to be executed when the power is turned on set 0 for both Chapter 3 859 SYSTEM SETTINGS 10 Setting the DDC pattern HE HE u u EN ILL GEN HEEN HEN EEE o ee Select the port to be used when DDC optional pattern 0 2EH is executed For details on the DDC optional patterns refer to 10 1 2 1 Concerning the DDC patterns No 0E 22 23 2E OPT Pattern 0E DDC Disable 0 3 Fig 3 3 10 Selecting the DDC pattern port Table 3 3 11 DDC pattern port selection method Disabled Factory setting The DVI port is selected D SUB The D Sub port is selected HDMI The HDMI port is selected Executing the DDC optional patterns When optional patterns 22H 23H or 2EH is executed the EDID is captured from the display connected to the VG 859C for example and displayed The step in Setting the DDC pattern above must be taken for executing optional pattern or 2 E If the data capture is unsuccessful at this time no further operations can be performed for about 30 seconds since another at
156. D ColorSpace Vertices setting method Setting item GBD ColorSpace Vertices Set the GBD ColorSpace Vertices 601 xvYCC601 IEC 61966 2 4 0 using YCbCr 2 xvYCC709 xvYCC709 IEC 61966 2 4 HD using YCbCr 10 Setting the number vertices Key 1 3 This setting takes effect only when the format flag is set to 0 Vertices Facets Number Vertices 4 4 8 Fig 5 12 10 Setting number vertices Table 5 12 12 Current gamut seq num setting method Number Vertices Number X Set the number of the Vertex keys Setting range 4 to 8 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 11 Setting the packeted GBD vertices data ee This setting takes effect only when the format flag is set to 0 Vertices Facets Packeted GBD Vertices Data DATA DATA1 1 8 Y 0 Cb 0 Cr 0 Fig 5 12 11 Setting the packeted GBD vertices data Table 5 12 13 Packeted GBD vertices data setting method Packeted GBD Number DATA1 to DATA8 Select the data that set the Packeted GBD Verlices Data keys Vertices Data Only the number specified in Number Vertices can be set Vertices Data Number XXXX Set the value of the Vertices Data number Y Cb Cr keys specified above The setting range varies depending on the bit width specified in GBD ColorPrecision 0 to 255 10bit 0 to 1023 12bit to 4095 12 Setting the GBD Colo
157. DMI output restrictions when HDMI has been set as the priority output port HDMI output restrictions when HDMI has been set as the priority output port VG 859 VG 859A VG 859C VG 859B 2 dot increments 1 dot increment 25 to 81 MHz 2 dot increments 100 001 to 165 MHz 2 dot increments 2 dot increments Dot clock frequency Cannot be output be output Increments of x dots restriction on horizontal timing setting Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints 3 About Setting Color Difference Output The conditions for setting RGB or color difference output differ depending on the output terminal being used Refer to the following table Table 12 4 8 When the Primary Port is Analog and DVI is Set Output Conditions RGB YPbPr Setting Output terminal RGB YPbPr Analo ae 9 Output using RGB Output using YpbPr HDMI Output according to the video Output is turned OFF format setting Table 12 4 9 When the Primary Port is HDMI Output Conditions RGB YpbPr setting Output terminal Output using RGB Output RGB YpbPr setting is invalid Output according to the video Output according to the video format setting format setting The composite and component specification timing built into the VG 859C refer to 11 4 Standard signal timing signal specifications results when the primary port is Analog and YPbPr has been set
158. E VG 859C 1848 Data configuration The data output by the VG 859C is controlled by the program data The program data consists of the pattern data which is used to set the data relating to the output images and the timing data which is used to set the data relating to all other output timing data and output conditions Table 1 3 1 Program data block configuration Valid invalid Program data valid invalid Timing data Pattern data 1 Optional function The various program data optional patterns and user character patterns are contained as sample data on the CHARA Character pattern CEC function EPROM inside the VG 859C body These types of data can be output as is for use or they can be used as the source data when data is to be registered on a PC card The internal data can be changed temporarily but the changes cannot be saved On the other hand data copied onto a PC card can be edited or saved Table 1 3 2 gives the number of internal sample data Table 1 3 3 gives the number of data which can be registered on a PC card and Fig 1 3 1 shows the relationship between the internal data and PC card data for the program data optional patterns and user character patterns For details on the internal data refer to 11 1 Internal data Table 1 3 2 Number of internal sample data _ Table 1 3 3 Number of data which be registered on card Program data 849
159. EQ Frequency sweep Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 Setting InfoFrame This section provides details of the settings for the InfoFrame data items Table 5 7 1 Reference pages for setting details Setting item Reference Setting item Reference page page 1 InfoFrame ON OFF 0 138 12 SPDInfoFrame 143 Version 16 Audio InfoFrame p 145 Scan Information p 139 Version Bar Information Yr Channel Count p 145 Coding Type y Sample Size p 146 Active Format p 139 Information N i RGB YCbCr Sample Frequency A 5 Active Aspect p 140 MPEG InfoFrame ce 146 Allocation Picture Aspect Ratio Level Shift Value Downmix Inhibit Type Version Bit Rate Frame N N N N Scaling p 140 p 146 Colorimetry p 147 Video Code Repetition p 141 p 147 Top Bar p 141 23 p 147 Bottom Bar Left Bar Field Repeat p 141 Right Bar RGB Quantization Range Extended Colorimetry IT Content p 142 p 142 O When HDMI 1 1 is selected as the HDMI output mode setting for the HDMI output data only SPD InfoFrame or MPEG InfoFrame whichever has been selected in 27 Setting the InfoFrame type of config edit FUNCS is sent e Items marked with a blue asterisk in the above table may be changed into values differing from the settings input using th
160. FUNCS Refer to 3 3 33 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional function 8 bits standard mode MULTI BIT Multi bit mode Patterns drawn with 8 bits are converted into the output gray Patterns corresponding to the output gray scale are scale and output generated and output The number of colors generated simultaneously is 256 x RGB The number of colors generated simultaneously is with 12 bits as well 4096 x RGB with 12 bits as well Example of video format RGB 30 bit output Example of video format RGB 30 bit output RGB 10 bits RGB 10 bits 7 0 E lk Bio 9 0 G10 9 2 B Otheroutputs Otheroutputs RGB 8 bits RGB 8 bits B12 9 2 Higher8 bitsoutput For ramp output For ramp output LEVEL 1023 256step 1024step Multi bit support is provided by HDMI outputs only Even in the same mode only the higher 8 bits are output for the other outputs The table below lists the main differences between the standard mode 8 bits and multi bit mode specifications of each mode differ depending on the video format Table 8 1 1 HDMI output bit mode Video format 8BIT standard mode RGB 30 Y444 30 Y422 10 RGB 36 Y444 36 Y422 12 MULTI BIT multi bit mode RGB 30 Y444 30 Y422 10 RGB 36 Y444 36 Y422 12 No of colors which can be generated 256 colors each for R G and B approx 160 000 colors 256 colors each for R G and B app
161. H lt 551 3 1892 9294 2 042592 4 7159 UR Xor 7 6 8 L T 9 T c T T ses v 66 1 9d I7 25 086 Dd 0 6 616 816 2 Od 896046194 poued je2nJeA SUAS REFERENCE Chapter 11 ONASH _ L e 9767 199 Tozo INAS ZHWLZ 41 Sjequinu eui IGEOL X 0261 94 seseujuaued 0 _ f c av OL Lu 1 5 529 ZHWLZ L T on INAS A Ut JNASH NR OST 12101 0821 Occ Ov Ov v LZ 92 SZ 05 9 StL 09Z LZET 1080 ae Or Tue ST at VV awen ZHNBET v4 10 i d x y seseujueJed SJON 709 209 209 109 8595 ZSS cas ves ces 285 ozs 696 896 196 996 596 EOS 295 0957 76 69 09 391 je iv eue ull ISEOL X 0561
162. Hdisp 20 32uS 640dot Fig 5 2 3 Setting Hperiod and Hdisp Table 5 2 4 and Hdisp Hblanking setting method Hperiod Number XX XXuS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 128 to 8192 dot keys XXX X dot When the SHIFT 8 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in microseconds is fixed e When the SHIFT 9 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in dots is fixed XX XXUS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 48 to 4096 dot XXXXdot e When B SHIFT key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in microseconds is fixed e When the SHIFT 6 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in dots is fixed Hblanking Hblanking is automatically calculated from the values of Hperiod and Hdisp Calculation formula Hblanking Hperiod Hdisp Setting range 40 to 4096 dot Even when items have been set in microseconds ensure that the settings come within the prescribed setting ranges in terms of the numbers of dots 3 Setting Hsync Hbackp and Hfrontp Hsync 2 03uS 64dot Hbackp 3 05uS 96dot Fig 5 2 4 Setting Hsync and Hbackp Table 5 2 5 Hsync and Hbackp Hfrontp setting method Setting item LCD display Description Hsync Number XX XXuS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot keys XXXXdot 1 dot increments with a dot clock frequency from 5 to 100 MHz 2 do
163. InfoFrame scan information and bar information setting method ScanInfo overscan Vertical 4 Setting the active format information and RGB or YCbCr of AVI InfoFrame CU NE le EE EE EN MH ME HE HEN MH KN ActFmtInfo No Data 0 1 RGBorYCbCr RGB 0 2 Fig 5 7 4 Setting the active format information RGB YCbCr of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 5 AVI InfoFrame active format information and RGB or YCbCr setting method 0 YC422 YCbCr 4 2 2 YC444 YCbCr 4 4 4 RGB or YCbCr _ 5 Setting the active aspect ratio and picture aspect ratio of AVI InfoFrame ActAspct Picture 0 9 PicAspct No Data 0 2 Fig 5 7 5 Setting the active aspect ratio and picture aspect ratio of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 6 5 AVI InfoFrame active aspect ratio and picture aspect ratio setting method Active Aspect Ratio Picture The active aspect ratio is set to be the same as the ActAspct picture aspect ratio box 16 9 16 9 from top s 168 romcene e 169089 169 tom conter ut 14 9 _ fe 169 fom center ouas torinsiae pete Picture Aspect Ratio No Data KN CE 6 _ Setting tl the scaling and colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame
164. MING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 9 Setting the closed caption and V chip functions 5 9 1 Introduction The closed caption function meets the EIA 608 standard the V chip function meets the EIA 744 standard The closed caption and V chip functions work with the following signal systems NTSC M NTSC J NTSC 443 PAL 60 PAL PAL M PAL N PAL Nc Output supports VBS composite outputs and Y C video outputs e The closed caption and V chip functions cannot be executed at the same time as when the HDCP pattern action audio sweep Teletext or Macrovision function is being used For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously e An error of 5mV occurs the white level of the images when the closed caption or V chip function is started up Either closed caption or V chip can be output or both functions can be output simultaneously For details on the item settings refer to the page concerned in the reference page column of the table below Table 5 9 1 Reference page for details on closed caption settings Setting item Reference page Output data 0 157 3 Internal caption data p 158 Table 5 9 2 Reference for details on V chip settings dm rating systems What is closed caption Closed caption is a video technology developed in the United States to enable individuals with impaired he
165. Na Hperiod 1 2 Hsync EQPfp 3 0H Vsync 3 0H EQPbp 3 0H m se HS 5 1st field CS 2nd field EQPfp period starts here Fig 5 3 9 How the EQP phase relationship is conceived Setting examples lt Next page Four examples of the EQPfp 1 2 EQPbp 1 2 Serration shown below lt Example 1 gt Table 5 3 7 Setting 1 Setting item Setting H EQP OFF Serration OFF lt Example 2 gt Table 5 3 8 Setting 2 Setting item Setting OH lt Example 3 gt Table 5 3 9 Setting 3 Setting item Setting EQPfp 3H EQPbp 38 _ EQPbp EQP Serration lt Example 4 gt Table 5 3 10 Setting 4 Setting item Setting OFF HS ST Fig 5 3 10 EQP ee Fig 5 3 11 Setting example 1 TTT TULL TTT TTT Fig 5 3 12 Setting example 2 Fig 5 3 13 Setting example 3 Fig 5 3 14 Setting example 4 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 Setting Serration and ON OFF Serration OFF 0 3 on off OFF 0 1 Fig 5 3 15 Setting Serration and EQP ON OFF Table 5 3 11 Serration ON OFF setting method The serration pulse is inserted in 0 5H increments a m he saraton peis rere exon POR orks ara vS isores as UT NN 0 equalizing pulse is not inserted the EQPfp EQPbp
166. Normal mode Cross V Line Sub pixel mode 5x5 Cross V Line Normal mode 5x5 hereafter repeated e Eu Normal mode The cursor moves in pixel increments The cursor is displayed in the color which has been set Sub pixel mode The cursor moves in increments of R G and B with which the pixels are configured The cursor color is displayed in the sequence of red green blue when it moves to the right and blue gt green red when it moves to the left While the cursor pattern is being moved no operations involving the use of the number keys such as the input of program numbers can be performed Moving the cursor The cursor is moved using the 2 4 6 and 8 number keys When it moves the screen display and the values of the cursor coordinates displayed on the LCD screen change Table 4 1 3 Cursor movements e rom OO When the Reverse 1 or Reverse 2 mode is used as the screen display method the top and bottom of the display will be reversed and in anticipation of this therefore the directions in which the cursor is moved the keys will be reversed under normal circumstances Key 2 will move the cursor upward key 4 toward the right key 6 toward the left and key 8 downward Switching the screen display method The screen display method is switched using the 0 number key Table 4 1 4 Screen display method Display method Display Descri
167. OM as in 7 6 Bear in mind that the config edit 5 setting items etc will also be returned to the factory settings as a result Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 9 Copying panel ROM data FUNCB The ROM data program data group data and user character patterns of existing VG generator models VG 813 823 826A 827 with which PC cards cannot be used can be converted for use with the VG 859C and saved on PC cards 1 Use an RS 232C crossover cable to connect the VG 859C and the existing VG model 2 Press the FUNC key B key and SET key Select Function 0 ROM Copy Fig 4 9 1 Selecting the function 3 Use the number keys to select the VG model serving as the data copy source Table 4 9 1 Data copy source VG model selection method Select VG type 0 0 1 VG823 813 E Key LCD display Generator model supported LM 813 VG826A 827 Fig 4 9 2 Selecting the data copy source VG model 4 Press the key to move to the next page and use the number keys to select the data which is to be copied Table 4 9 2 Data copy selection method LCD Function 0 0 2 Key CD display ata to be copied Block Prog Data Copy eo Block Prog Data Copy Program data Fig 4 9 3 Selecting the data to be LEM did CARY Soup oala copied Character Data Copy User character patterns 5 Press the 7 key to move to the next page and select the ROM type serving a
168. Palette end level returns to start position 1 Setting the palette scrolling function ON OFF W SCR OFF W FLK OFF 0 1 P SCR OFF 0 1 Fig 6 15 9 Setting the window scrolling and flicker and palette scrolling function ON OFF Table 6 15 12 Window scrolling and flicker and palette scrolling ON OFF setting method u LCD W SCR NE Refer to 6 15 1 Setting the scrolling W FLK Refer to 6 15 2 Setting the window pattern flicker Pallet scrolling OFF Do not execute palette scrolling Factory setting P SCR Execute palette scrolling 2 Setting the palette scrolling step start position and end position P Step 0 1 0 0 128 P Sta OEnd 0 0 255 Fig 6 15 10 Setting the palette scrolling step start position and end position Table 6 15 13 Palette scrolling step start position and end position setting method Setting item LCD Description display Scrolling Sign Used for setting a positive value ste E d fe 4 Used for setting a negative value P Step Number of Number XXX Setting range 1 to 128 steps keys Start position Number XXX Setting range 0 to 255 P Sta keys End position Number XXX Setting range 0 to 255 End keys 6 15 4 Setting the simple moving picture This function enables simple moving pictures to be displayed by drawing a multiple number of pictures in the drawing area and moving the display start coordinates Provided as an example her
169. Prog 1 Fig 4 4 3 Inputting the copy source data program number 2 copy data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Use the number keys to input the number 1 to 849 of the program into which the data is to be copied and press the SET key The data is now written into the copy 1 Prog Data Copy destination Dist Prog 2 VG 859C s internal programs No 850 to 999 cannot be selected as the copy Fig 4 4 4 Inputting the copy destination data destinations program number 4 copy other programs repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Copying program data in increments of multiple blocks BLK Prog I Data Copy 1 Use the number keys to input the range of the program numbers 1 to 999 whose data is to be copied and press the SET key VG 859C s internal programs No 850 to Bik P D 999 can also be selected as the copy source rog Data Copy Source Prog 1 1 Fig 4 4 5 Inputting the copy source data program numbers 2 To copy the data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Use the number keys to input the range of the program numbers 1 to 849 into which the data is to be copied and press the SET key The data is now written into the copy Blk Prog Data Copy Dist Prog 11 20
170. QPbp1 ae EQPbp2 Vbackp1 Vdisp1 Vsync2 Vdisp2 Vfrontp2 Vsync1 Vfrontp1 0 5H Vbackp2 0 5H e In the 2 field mode Vtotal Voackp and Vfrontp can be set in 0 5H increments e In the 2 field mode ensure that the value of Vfrontp1 Vsync1 Vbackp1 Vfrontp2 Vsync2 Vbackp2 is set in increments Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting Vtotal Vdisp1 and Vblanking Vtotal 11 754 445H Vdisp1 10 565mS 400H Fig 5 3 5 Setting Vtotal and Vdisp1 Table 5 3 4 Vtotal and Vdisp1 Vblanking setting method Vtotal Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys In the non interlace scanning mode XXXXH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 4 to 4096 H in 1H increments Or In the interlace scanning 1 field mode XXXX XH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 4 to 2048 H in 1H increments In the interlace scanning 2 field mode 0 000 to 99 999 ms 4 0 to 2048 0 H in 0 5H increments e When the E SHIFT 8 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in microseconds is fixed e When SHIFT 9 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in H is fixed Vdisp1 Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys XXXXH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 1 to 2048 H in 1H increments e When B SHIFT 5 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in microseconds is fixed e When the C SHIFT 6 key is pressed appears on the LCD display
171. S 1 ve eg iogorxozeivia 89 Sowny 4 08010261 68665 owee 898 SOWNV N N 087 0 28027 20009 9 79 0 Z 1 dwe 140 080 10 00009 072 pido 6 68 08 90 WNV N N Bo 0 00 09665 2 1 1140 7666 08 066 eerie gouala 6 AXH ZHN zH Old ejep ed 2u S Auejod Es ou g jet ejdsip ON 7902100 E9I1J9A e UOZOH d m HE m oaeo ao aos sum m m m HE 909 2 880 1000 9 1000 9 1002 9 9 1000 9 9 1000 9 1009 M9 e 9 ALLdO 05 0 0882 0882 14 49 90 IVNV N N 8820885 000775 080709 92991 606 1002 10 09 Aes6 79 9 140 osOdgezxogezvia N N Bou 98050980 00096 08005 999 106 109 319 8 10109 314 92140 050 9 5 lt 0880
172. Setting item Setting range Macrovision Output mode NTSC M OFF DVD STB to VHS USA VHS US obs NTSC J OFF DVD STB to 3 VHS Japan1 VHS Japan2 5 443 PAL 60 PAL M OFF DVD STB PAL PAL N PAL Nc SECAM OFF DVD STB VHS Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 12 Gamut MetaData Packet data configuration list Timing data Setting item Setting range Gamut Packet ON OFFGamut MetaData OFF ON MetaDataPacket GBD profile PO to P3 Affected Gamut Seq Num Current Gamut Seq Num 0 to 15 Packet Seq Intermediate First packet Last packet Only packet Format Flag Vertices Facets Range GBD ColorPrecision 10bit 12bit GBD ColorSpace Vertices ITU R BT 709 xvYCC601 xvYCC709 XYZ Vertices Data Bm to 255 10bit 0 to 1023 GBD ColorSpace Range Reserve xvYCC601 xvYCC709 Reserve Packet Range Data 8bit 3 96875 to 3 96875 10bit 3 9921875 to 3 9921875 12bit 3 998046875 to 3 998046875 5 1 13 DVI and HDMI output timing restrictions In addition to the restrictions described earlier the DVI and HDMI outputs are subject to restrictions 1 to 4 below value failing to satisfy the restrictions has been set the DVI or HDMI output will be automatically turned off 1 DVI outputs all horizontal timing pulses Mode Setting item Setting range restrictions
173. This section provides details on the settings of the audio output data items Table 5 5 1 Reference pages for setting details Setting item Reference page Output frequency p 126 Output level p 126 SWEEP 0 127 Frequency Time step p 128 Number of repetitions Frequency Minimum p 128 sweep frequency Maximum frequency Frequency Frequency step p 129 sweep 1 Setting the output frequency 100 Hz FREQ 100 Hz Fig 5 5 1 Setting the output frequency Table 5 5 2 Output frequency setting method Setting item LCD display Description Output frequency Number XXX00 Hz Setting range 100 to 20000 Hz in 100 Hz increments FREQ L FREQ R keys 2 Setting the output levels LEVEL L 0 LEVEL 0 Fig 5 5 2 Setting the output levels Table 5 5 3 Output level setting method Setting item LCD display Description Output level Number mV Setting range 0 to 2000 mV in 50 mV increments LEVEL L LEVEL R keys Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting sweep The audio sweep function can be selected SWEEP OFF 0 3 Fig 5 5 3 Selecting sweep Table 5 5 4 Sweep selection method SWEEP OFF FREQ Frequency sweep LEVEL Level sweep from left to right LEVEL R Level sweep from right to left Frequency sweep This refers to changing the frequency from the Minimum frequency to Maximum frequency at the Frequ
174. a List Horizontal sync Fig 4 7 14 LCD display Group data No frequency Vertical sync Group No Program name frequency Program data enable disable GRP NO 01 PRO MODE do CLOCK jr 3 2 NO 001 NAME VESA400 85 0 MHz VTOTAL 2dot VDI 5 1 0404 VSYNCI 4dot 6dot Odot 1 Odot 37 8 gt x V 85 08 2 ENABLE d LIK HPERI OD HDI SP RE Horizontal timing HSYNC HBACKP HDSTART HDWI DTH c 4 lt gt 1 lt gt lt gt gt Co o 333333 C oo ee EOP Vertical timing G t 1 6 0 2 3 0 0 SERRA ON lt gt lt gt lt gt 3 VDSTART ANA TTL ANALOG VDLI NE HS NEGA SCAN VS POSI CS NEGA SYNC ON VI DEO 0 70 V SYNC 0 30 V SETUP 0 00 V Freq L 100 Hz RGB YPbPr RGB Freq R 100 Hz YPbPr No 0 Level Ls mV Output diti Level R mV utput condition D Connecter SWEEP OFF 480 Step 40 msec Audio output Interlace Ti me 4 3 Freq Min 0 Hz Freq Max 000 hz Ana BNC ON FreqStep 0 Hz Dsub ON Digi DVI ON Ana DVI OFF D Con OEP 5 Connecter NORMAL DVI Mode SINGLE oo Zoo 133 mn wn MO lt gt 4 lt gt OFF gt 01 001 5 400 85 I
175. a is registered using group data edit 6 1 Press the FUNC key 0 key and SET key Select Function 0 0 Direct Display Fig 4 1 4 Selecting the function The group display mode appears on the LCD screen 2 Use the number keys to input the group data number 2 digits Example 01 e A number with only one digit 1 to 9 can be input using the number key followed by the SET key Example 1 key SET key e Group data numbers can also be selected using the 4 key 1 and v 1 key Numbers for group data which has not been registered are ignored With the RB 1848 RB 614C or RB 649 the program is executed immediately when the 4 Or key is pressed When the controls on the front panel of the VG 859C are used the SET key must be pressed after pressing the 4 Or 7 501 1 Fig 4 1 5 Inputting the group data number 3 The video signals of the group data whose number was selected are now output Group data number Group number 601 1 VESA 400 85 Program name up to first 16 characters displayed 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz Dot clock frequency Horizontal sync Vertical Sync frequency frequency Fig 4 1 6 Outputting the video signals The dot clock frequency horizontal sync frequency and vertical sync frequency are indicated on the LCD screen using the last two digits two decimal places How to switch to other group data Proceed with the operation in step
176. a transfer mode setting method LCD Description display Output Teletext is set to OFF TeleT ext Teletext is set to ON Data transfer mode 4 The mode for transferring Teletext data is set to 4 lines TeleTextLine Display lines Field1 20 21 Filed2 333 334 1 The mode for transferring Teletext data is set to 8 lines Display lines Field1 13 14 20 21 Field2 326 327 333 334 2 Setting the pages Setting item The pages to be output are set here Details on the pages incorporated inside the VG 859C are shown in 5 10 3 Internal Teletext data When numbers are set for pages with any other numbers the default page on which only the page numbers are displayed will be output Up to 20 pages can be registered TeleTextPage 100 899 gt 4 103 5 200 6 201 1 100 2 101 3 102 7 202 8 203 9 204 Fig 5 10 4 Setting the pages be output Table 5 10 3 Output page setting method Setting item LCD display Setting range Page Number keys XXX 100 to 899 TeleTextPage Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 10 3 Internal Teletext data 1 2 Contents 200 Newsflash Character English Character Swedish Finnish Hungarian 202 Character French 204 Index Page Screen CHARACTER 2 ma AE NN td er AE f TT mme
177. ackground color BR BG BB The cursor moves in increments of the designated number of dots Movement step Step R 255 G 255 B 255 BR 127 BG 127 127 Fig 6 13 3 Setting the cursor color and background color Table 6 13 4 Cursor color and background color setting method Setting item Key LCD display Setting range Cursor color Number keys XXX 0 to 255 R G B Background color Number keys XXX 0 to 255 BR BG BB 6 14 Setting the program name The display position font and program name are set for the program name data Set the display position font and program name Pos L T Font 5 7 XXXXXXXXXX Fig 6 14 1 Setting the display position font and program name Table 6 14 1 Display position font and program name setting method Display Cntr Center of the This selects where on the screen position screen the program name is to be displayed Pos 1 L T Top left of the SP screen 2 L B Bottom left of the screen 3 R T Top right of the screen 4 Bottom right of the screen 5 C T Top center of the screen C B Bottom center of the screen used for display en he cg 9 1 4 Character pattern data 1676 16x16 Input using number XXXXX Max 20 characters name keys SHIFT key or input from display 1 1 There are two ways to input program names input the character codes 20H to directly or select the characters from the display ref
178. ameter Num 0 0 14 Fig 6 16 7 Setting the operation code and parameter Table 6 16 6 Operation code and parameter setting method Op Code Number XX Setting range 00 to FFh keys For setting the operation code operation command to which the VG generator is to respond Parameter Number XX Setting range 00 to 14 number keys For setting the parameter number of data to which the VG generator is to respond Rx Parameter1 7 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx Parameter8 14 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Fig 6 16 8 Setting the parameter Table 6 16 7 Parameter setting method Parameter Number XX Setting range 00 to FFh 1 to 14 keys For setting the parameter number of data to which the VG generator is to respond 6 17 DDC CI function lt optional function 6 17 1 Overview The DDC CI function is implemented using either DVI Dsub output The VG 859C allows you to check transmission reception by setting any command VCP CODE supported by the VESA DDC CI standard What is DDC CI DDC CI Display Data Channel Command Interface is defined by Video Electronics Standards Association It allows the display to be controlled through the transmission of control commands using the DDC line Although standard DDC 2B etc are intended primarily for the purpose of reading display information EDID DDC CI supports bi directional communications and allows you to control the display This makes it possi
179. and off by plugging in and unplugging the AC power cable may damage the PC card When priority is to be given to accuracy do not start using the generator straight away instead turn on the power of the VG 859C and allow it to warm up for about 10 to 15 minutes before use so as to ensure that the VG 859C is ready to operate stably Concerning impact This is a precision instrument and as such subjecting it to impact may cause malfunctioning Take special care when moving the monitor Do not drop the monitor Concerning installation Install the generator in a stable location Do not stand it on either of its side panels Doing so may cause the generator s temperature to rise due to heat generation possibly resulting in malfunctioning When trouble or malfunctioning has occurred In the unlikely event that trouble or malfunctioning should occur disconnect the generator s power cable and contact your dealer or an Astrodesign sales representative BEFORE OPERATION CONCERNING THE CONFIGURATION OF THIS MANUAL This manual is the instruction manual for the VG 859C RB 1848 1 In the configuration presented below it contains details on the operating procedures checkpoints etc Please take the time to read through the manual prior to use to ensure that the generator will be operated properly 1 The keys on the RB 1848 are used as the function keys Read this first Before operating the generator
180. and the setting in H is fixed Vblanking Vblanking is automatically calculated from the values of Vtotal and Vdisp Calculation formula in non interlace scanning mode Vblanking Vtotal Vdisp1 For Vblanking in the interlace scanning mode refer to Fig 5 3 1 Setting range 2H or more The 1st field setting applies to Vdisp1 in the interlace scanning 2 field mode 4 Setting Vsync1 Vbackp1 and 1 Vsync1 0 079 5 3 0H Vbp 1 1 083mS 41H Fig 5 3 6 Setting Vsync1 and Vbackp1 Table 5 3 5 Vsync1 and Vbackp1 Vfrontp1 setting method Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys XX 0 000 to 99 999 ms 1 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments Vbackp1 Number XX XXXmS Setting range Vbp1 keys In the non interlace or interlace scanning 1 field mode XXXXH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 to 4096 H in 1H increments or In the interlace scanning 2 field mode XXXX XH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4096 0 H 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4096 0 H 0 5 increments 0 5H increments Vfrontp 1 Vfrontp1 is automatically calculated from the values of Vtotal Vdisp1 Vsync1 and Vbackp1 Calculation formula Vfrontp1 Vtotal Vdisp1 Vsync1 Vbackp1 Setting range In the non interlace or interlace scanning 1 field mode 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 to 4096 H in 1H increments In the interlace scanning 2 field mode 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4096 0 H in 0 5H increments When Vsync1 has been set
181. and version setting method Item Key LCD display Description execution Number XX HDCP authentication is executed at the set interval which is interval keys set in 1 second increments Interval Setting range 1 to 10 sec factory setting 1 version HDCP Version 1 0 EDID Check The HDCP version is set on the basis of the EDID value The version setting takes effect only when HDMI has been set for priority output port in the output conditions timing data If version 1 1 is selected when DVI has been set for priority output port an error E16A HDCP Bcaps Error appears on the LCD screen When HDMI output mode is switched from HDMI to DVI and vice versa or the video format output gray scale is changed HDCP Version 1 0 is set automatically 4 Press the 9 key to move to the next page and set OFF for automatic resetting when HDCP authentication is NG and select the FIFOReady time restriction Ri NG Reset OFF 0 1 FIFO Ready 4200 0 7 Fig 4 10 4 Setting automatic resetting ON OFF FIFOReady time restriction Table 4 10 3 Automatic resetting ON OFF and FIFOReady time restriction setting method Ri NG Reset OFF Authentication is not retried even when HDCP authentication is NG 1 ON When HDCP authentication is NG resetting is initiated and authentication is retried starting with the initial authentication FIFO Ready OFF 33 Thes
182. anning mode setting and the 2nd field mode has been selected as the field mode setting 2nd Field Menu Vdisp2 10 565mS 400H Fig 5 3 18 Setting Vdisp2 Table 5 3 13 Vdisp2 setting method Vdisp2 Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys XXXXH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 1 to 4096 H in 1H increments e When the SHIFT 5 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the setting in microseconds is fixed e When the SHIFT 6 key is pressed appears on the LCD display and the H setting is fixed Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 9 Setting Vsync2 Vbackp2 and Vfrontp2 These settings are for Vsync2 Vbackp2 and Vfrontp2 in the second field This menu item is displayed only when the interlace amp sync mode or interlace amp video mode has been selected as the scanning mode setting and the 2nd field mode has been selected as the field mode setting Vsync2 0 079mS 3 0H Vbp 2 1 083mS 41 0H Fig 5 3 19 Setting Vsync2 and Vbackp2 Table 5 3 14 Vsync2 Vbackp2 Vfrontp2 setting method Vsync2 Number XX XXXmS Setting range keys 0 000 to 99 999 ms 1 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments Vbackp2 Number XX XXXmS Setting range Vbp2 keys XXXX XH 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 4096 0 H in 0 5H increments Vfrontp2 Vfrontp2 is automatically calculated from the values of Vtotal Vdisp2 Vsync2 and Vbackp2 Calculation formula
183. annot be edited or copied Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 13 Setting the cursor pattern The following items are set for the cursor pattern data 1 Format and position display mode 2 Flicker interval and movement step 3 Cursor color and background color 1 Set the format and position display mode Format Cross 0 5 Pos Disp OFF 0 4 Fig 6 13 1 Setting the format and position display mode Table 6 13 1 Format setting method Format 5 5 For setting cross shaped cursor consisting of 5 Normal mode Format horizontal dots and 5 vertical dots 1 Cross For setting a cross shaped cursor which fills the entire screen 2 2 _ For setting a vertical line as the cursor 3 5 5 RGB For setting a cross shaped cursor consisting of 5 Sub pixel mode horizontal dots and 5 vertical dots Cross RGB For setting a cross shaped cursor which fills the entire screen V Line RGB For setting a vertical line as the cursor Cursor shapes lt Cross gt lt V Line gt Pixel increment RGB increment Normal mode The cursor moves in 1 pixel increments The cursor color is displayed in the color which has been set Sub pixel mode cursor moves in the RGB increments which make up the individual pixels The cursor color is displayed in the sequence of R G B when the cursor moves toward the right and in the sequence of B G R when the cursor
184. aring to enjoy movies news broadcasts and other TV programs The term closed is used since the captions are not displayed on the screen with regular play In contrast captions such as the English language subtitles used for video presentations of foreign movies are burned into the images at the outset so they are referred to as open captions Although closed captions CC were originally developed as a technology for the hearing impaired it is currently being spotlighted as a listening practice aid for people involved in education and for those who are learning foreign languages The CC subtitle data is superimposed onto line 21 field 1 and line 284 field 2 of the NTSC output signals and output Subtitle data has two modes caption and text Also available as a service is the Extended Data Service EDS which transfers titles ratings and other program information using line 248 field 2 The V chip described below uses the EDS function A total of 32 characters per line can be displayed by CC The number of available lines totals 15 but the maximum number is limited to 4 lines in the caption modes CC1 to 4 Fifteen lines can be displayed in the text modes TXT1 to 4 What is the V chip The V chip is a semiconductor chip which blocks TV programs containing violence and sexual content The V stands for violence and programs are blocked using the ratings based on the extent of the violence and sexual content involved
185. ars on the RB 1848 in this manual v key This decrements the program numbers by 1 1 It is also used to display the next page on the LCD DEC appears on the panel for this key but it is referred to as es which appears on the RB 1848 in this manual 0 SET key This is used to execute the functions and program data When the RB 1848 RB 614C or RB 649 remote control box is used programs are executed instantly by pressing the E Or 7 key However If the 12 7 key on the front panel of the VG 859C is used the programs executed until the SET key is pressed after pressing the 14 or key Chapter 1 CONCERNING THE VG 859C 1848 1 6 2 VG 859C rear panel EO REMOTE RS 232 10 100BASE T 12 d 1 Frame ground FG Connect this frame ground terminal to the frame ground terminal of the unit which is connected to the VG 859C 2 POWER switch This is used to turn the generators power ON and OFF The POWER switch must always be used to turn the generator s power on and off Turning the power on and off by plugging in and unplugging the AC power cable may damage the PC card 3 AC input socket One end of the power cable is connected here A voltage from 100V to 120V or 200V to 240V is supported 4 TOSLINK input connector Digital audio input connector coaxial BNC analog output connectors HS Horizontal sync signal VS vertical s
186. audio channels For details refer to 4 in 5 1 13 DVI and HDMI output timing restrictions 5 Setting the audio output channels These settings select the channels from which the audio data for two channels serving as the source are to be output when ANALOG or INTERNAL has been selected as the Audio signal setting A multiple number of pairs of channels 1 2ch 3 4ch 5 6ch and 7 8ch can be selected Audio LPCM Channel Audio LPCM Channel 1ch 2ch ON 3ch 4ch OFF 5ch 6ch OFF 7ch 8ch OFF Fig 5 6 5 Setting the audio output channels Table 5 6 6 Audio output channel setting method Audio output channels o OFF gt The audio output is set to OFF Audio LPCM Channel 1 The audio output is set to ON 1ch 2ch 3ch 4ch 5ch 6ch 7ch 8ch This setting takes effect only when ANALOG or INTERNAL has been selected as the Audio signal setting Since the audio data is sent during the horizontal blanking period restrictions apply to the audio sampling frequency depending on Hblanking and the number of audio channels For details refer to 4 in 5 1 13 DVI HDMI output timing restrictions 6 Setting the internal audio bit width InternalAudio Width 16bit 0 2 Fig 5 6 6 Setting the internal audio bit width Table 5 6 7 Internal audio bit width setting method Setting item LCD Description display Bit width InternalAudio Width 20bit 20bit 24
187. bit 24bit This setting takes effect only when INTERNAL has been selected as the Audio signal setting In all other cases the audio bit width is the same as the data input for TOSLINK or COAX The width is 24 bits with ANALOG 7 Setting the internal audio output level mode This setting selects the unit in which to specify the level in 8 Setting the internal audio output level InternalAudio Level Input Mode dB 0 1 Fig 5 6 7 Setting the internal audio output level mode Table 5 6 8 Internal audio output level mode setting method Output level mode dB mode dB is selected as the unit to specify the InternalAudio Level Input Mode Output level 1 Bit Bit mode The bit is selected as the unit to specify the Output level Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 8 Setting the internal audio output level InternalAudio Level16bit L CCD h CCD h Fig 5 6 8 Setting the internal audio output level Table 5 6 9 Internal audio output level setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Output level Number keys The setting range differs depending on the setting InternalAudio Level SHIFT key for Audio bit width LR Setting range in the bit mode XXXX h Bit width 16bit 0 to 7FFF XXXXX h 20bit 0 to 7FFFF XXXXXXh 24bit 0 to 7FFFFF Setting range in the dB mode XXX XXdB Bit width 16bit 90 31 to 0 dB 20bit 114 40 to
188. bitmapname003 vgd prg folder prg001 vgd prg002 vgd prg003 vgd prgext001 vgd prgext002 vgd prgext003 vgd autodisp vgd group001 vgd group002 vgd group003 vgd opt001 vgd opt002 vgd opt003 vgd opt016 vgd optname001 vgd optname002 vgd 003 optname016 vgd uchardataOEO0 vgd uchardataOE 1 vgd uchardataOE2 vgd Bitmap data folder Bitmap data Bitmap data Bitmap data Bitmap name data Bitmap name data Bitmap name data Program data folder Program data Program data Program data Extension program data Extension program data Extension program data Auto display data Group data Group data Group data Optional pattern data Optional pattern data Optional pattern data Optional pattern data Optional pattern name data Optional pattern name data Optional pattern name data Optional pattern name data Character data Character data Character data 11 2 4 Copying and deleting registered data REFERENCE Data registered on PC card can be copied or deleted using Explorer in Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 or Windows XP in a PC equipped with a PC card slot PC card is rendered unusable in the VG 859C because some of its data has been deleted by the PC error proceed to initialize the card page 59 using PC card copy FUNC4 If this is done however all the data remaining on the card will be erased
189. ble to change settings such as brightness by sending a command VCP code to the corresponding display For details on the DDC CI function refer to the VESA Video Electronics Standards Association DDC CI Display Data Channel Command Interface standard 6 17 2 Setting details Set the following items to use DDC CI Table 6 17 1 Setting Items for the DDC CI Function Output pattern setting Specify Option Pattern No 3B for the pattern For information on selecting patterns refer to 6 12 Setting the optional patterns Make the following settings related to DDC CI DDC CI function 1 Output destination DVI or Dsub settings 2 Transfer mode command send or receive monitor status 3 Transfer command and transfer data settings Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting the port and mode DDC CI Port DVI 0 1 Mode Get 0 1 Fig 6 17 1 Setting the port and mode Table 6 17 2 Port and mode setting method Port The DDC CI function is executed from the DVI output D SUB The DDC CI function is executed from the D sub output m Gel Get VCP Feature Gets the status of the connected device 1 Set Set VCP Feature Sends a control command to the connected device 2 Setting VCP codes and transfer parameters DDC CI VCP 10h 00 FF Value 0 0 65535 Fig 6 17 2 Setting VCP codes and transfer parameters Table 6 17 3 VCP codes and transfer parameter setting method
190. ce which does not require synchronization with sound etc TXT1 First Text service Text service 2 Second Text service Text service TXT3 Third Text service Text service TXT4 Fourth Text service Text service Table 5 9 6 Setting method for style in closed caption mode DefStyle RollUp This sets the Roll Descriptions of closed caption styles PopOn The caption data is stored in the memory and displayed altogether at the point when all the data has been stored RollUp The caption data is displayed character by character and when the characters max 32 for one line are displayed the line is rolled up by one step and the caption data on the next line begins to be displayed PaintOn The caption data is displayed character by character When a number from 1 to 20 has been selected for the output data in 1 Setting the output data the contents of UserData take precedence and the setting of this item is not reflected Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 4 Internal caption data CC1 to 4 1 2 Setting Row color optional setting etc CaptionDefMode DefStyle Closed Caption Mode 1 Pop On CC1 Pop on ROW 13 Background Black semi transparent Text White Roll up RU2 ROW 2 3 Background Blue non transparent Text Cyan row 2 White row 3 Paint on ROW 2 3 4 Background Red semi transparent Text Green CC2 Pop on ROW 2 Indent4
191. ch can be used Use the CF card provided with the VG 859C as the PC card and use the PC card adapter which is also provided Any trouble or malfunctioning in operation caused by the use of any other cards is not covered by the warranty PC cards come with many different specifications Use of a PC card whose operation has not been verified therefore may result in a failure or instability in read write operations 11 2 2 Data registration formats The format used for registering data on a PC card differs from data to data as indicated below Program data When edited program data is registered on PC card a prg folder is created and the data files are created inside this folder e Data files are created in sequence with the following filenames prg001 vgd prg002 vgd prg003 vgd and so on In addition to a file with the prg001 vgd filename a file with the filename of prgext001 vgd is also created as an extension data file Character data e When edited character data is registered PC file is created on its own e Data files are created in sequence with the following filenames uchardataOEO0 vgd uchardataOE1 vgd uchardataOE2 vgd and so Group data e When edited group data is registered on a PC card a file is created on its own e Data files are created in sequence with the following filenames group001 vgd group002 vgd group003 vgd and so on Auto display data e
192. d EA 19 19 ZHWS EL L T aao IZSTT poyioddns sjeubis ANNOSCT J NASH vo yndjno 6S JR tir fe te ti 666 9 1 oma INS6Z Ad INS BE ZHWSZ vL 1 1 dosot zoz eor eco zeg teo 679 870 1 129 929 szo v ozo de AUS GA Tl 1 lt 29 ANNOSZT ONAS H ue M 18 il og 8 T L T 9 6 T T c I Toszt eret Fever ever Lal d ET d eu INS6Z Sd INS ZHWSZ bL L T aao I080T ARM PPT ou S Specifications and checkpoints 12 1 Main specifications 12 1 1 Output Dot clock frequency Analog 5 00 to 250 00MHz Digital Single Link 25 to 165 MHz serial output Panel Link HDMI Single Link 8 bit or 10 bit output 25 to 165MHz Single Link 12 bit output 25 to 150MHz Horizontal frequency 10 to 300 kHz max 8192 dots Number of vertical scanning lines Sync signal output level HS CS VS HS VS More than 2V 750 CS 0 3V for binary output 0 3V for tri level output 750 Composite video sync signal Level to 0 60V 0 to 0 6V for tri level output 750 ON OFF selectable s
193. d left Scrolling up and down 1 not possible e All other limitations are the same as those for conventional scrolling Setting Items The following settings can be made for half pixel scrolling Table 6 15 15 Setting items for half pixel scrolling Setting item Output pattern creation Be sure to prepare a pattern shifted by 0 5 pixels or 0 25 pixels to be used for half pixel scrolling Output pattern settings Register the scroll pattern created for half pixel scrolling in 80H to BFH of the option pattern for the conventional image data and then specify this as the pattern to use For details on image data settings refer to 6 12 Setting the optional patterns Half pixel scrolling settings The following settings are related to half pixel scrolling 1 Scroll execution Set the scroll execution setting G SCR for the graphics plane to ON For details on the settings refer to 6 15 1 2 Setting the graphic plane scrolling and scrolling direction 2 Half pixel scrolling step Refer to 2 Setting half pixel scrolling function 3 Half pixel scrolling direction Refer to 2 Setting half pixel scrolling function 1 Creating Patterns For a half pixel pattern create a pattern that is moved by 0 5 pixels or 0 25 pixels and apply it as follows Use the 5 8848 software provided with the VG 859C to register the half pixel pattern into 80H to used for the option pattern of the VG
194. d mode When interval H and V are set to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 H 0 V 1 H 1 V 0 Fig 6 5 4 Correlation between interval H and V amp Concerning the screen center When from center is set as the format in the dot mode the crosshatch pattern is displayed after the screen center is calculated When both the number of dots and number of lines to be displayed are set to odd numbers the screen center can be calculated but when they are set to even numbers the point which is the first dot to the right of the center and the first line below it is used as the actual screen center Hdisp even numbered dot count 1 2 1 2 1st line 1H Vdisp even numbered below center line count 1st dot to right of center Fig 6 5 5 Screen center 6 6 Setting the dot pattern The following items are set for the dot pattern data 1 Mode and format 2 Interval dot size and dot type 1 Set the mode and format Mode Line 0 1 Format from Center 0 1 Fig 6 6 1 Setting the mode and format Table 6 6 1 Mode and format setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Line Line mode A number of dot pattern lines is used to specify the interval 1 dot Dot mode The number of dots between the dots is used to specify the interval Format from Center Center of In the dot mode the point to start the drawing is Format screen selected This item is invalid in the line mode 1 from LeftTop Top left of screen 2
195. dais days ze eJc days 79 Z MOPUIM MOPUIM BUIAON 10109 4909 9567 00140 1979949 1940949 1349942 0p pijos POS pijos ejueBe N pijos enig uaaJc pijos pay pijos SPUM pijos 5 dejs p A 5 Aes6 45 9 25 6 dejs 9 98140 9je s 4945 26 26140 A 91825 5 wayed q4v 41 190 wayed HV 41 190 wayed HV 41 190 wayed HV 41 190 26 eJD dejs p SAW JdddA cS 18 25 dejs 9 25 dejs zc 25 eJD dejs p9 696 046 0N ZOd m ET uu 04 4 veas coww a al me owen w somnos sox soww _ ome 898 DOWNY ala evo 6009 62009 5 0 0 09089 01 Boi 89 920 00099 90009 cover 6 o9 0erx0rgvsan DOWNY N N 087 059 00666 1 656 buses comm comm ma ma comm res ma e
196. dit FUNC2 or 2 When using the direct displa PC card edit With the program data selected press the PAT key Press the FORMAT key followed by the pattern key Press the ESC key Press the to return FORMAT key to p return After selecting the data using the number keys or pattern keys enter it with the SET key Pattern Edit 1 0 gt Graph Color Graphic Color 255 255 255 LCD display Press the ESC key LCD display 10 return For the data selection procedure Move between the displays using the Table 6 1 1 key and Y key In the case of 2 the data selection menu is not accessed Select the data using the pattern keys Follow the steps below to select the pattern select graphic color and pattern action data e Use the L key to select the pattern action data e Use key to select the graphic color data e The patterns are selected by following the steps in 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns LCD display Press the SET key the signals are output Fig 6 1 2 Basic operations for setting t the data Table 6 1 1 Pattern data selection method and reference pages LCD display Pattern data Reference Number keys Pattern key page fo fPatemseet ______ _ _ GmmcCo orner 3 CROSS CROSS Data Edt Crosshatch patem 6 COLOR COLOR Data Edt Coor barpatem
197. e paddojs sem 919 91 4015 2 Jaujoue JO uonnooxo Buunp diuo A pue uondeo paso D 09 dOLS peddojs snoeueynuIs uonnoexe sy sem diuo A diudA dOLS YOIYM suonounj Buiuje2u02 0 JOJOY uonounj y Suonounj y JO senuoud y YOOUD peKejdsip uonnoexe sy peddojs sem uondeo 2 uonde23peso 2 4015 juiod ui peJinooo seu 10119 UV 10413 0 97 Aq Jequunu e SEM uy 0197 Aq LO lt 1019 uonounJ 101313 yoeIs ED 113 YDEIS 51 404J9 10419 e qeueA sejqeueA N JOU 941 USYM YDIYM 40 43 ISIX3 100 1 40 5591 JO 0007 x 0008 JO e esf eDJe 00 ezis 94 9226 dng O Spied doo pue eounos doo au Ayoedeo spJeo esf Jo senioedeo y 1nq pled e uo
198. e 444 422 setting The conventional RGB setting is converted into color differences and output Level mode Set to Full Range Making this setting allows values that exceed the Limited Limited Mode Range to be expressed For information on the level mode refer to 2 Setting the video level in 5 6 Setting the HDMI output Color difference Set to 444 422 InfoFrame setting For information on the color difference setting refer to 5 7 Setting setting RGB or YCbCr InfoFrame ColoriMetry Set to Extended Extended ColoriMetry Infomation Valid For information on the ColoriMetry setting refer to 5 7 Setting InfoFrame Gamut Meta Data Packet Freely set any Gamut Meta Data Packet setting For information on the Gamut Meta Data Packet refer to 5 12 Setting Gamut Meta Data Packet and HDMI standard High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification 9 3 xvYCC Evaluation Patterns With the VG 859C you can prepare the following three patterns Option Nos OB and OC for use as xvYCC evaluation patterns White Yellow Cyan Green Magenta Red Blue Black Fig 9 3 1 xvYCC evaluation patterns Be sure to make the following settings e Set VideoFormat the HDMI setting to RGB e Set Level mode in the HDMI setting to Full Range evaluation patterns are prepared for evaluation of TVs supporting xvYYC The patterns are not display
199. e SET key IMG Data Copy Source IMG 1 Fig 4 4 9 Inputting the copy source image data number 2 To copy the data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Use number keys to input the image data number 1 to 64 serving as the copy destination and press the SET key IMG Data Copy Dist IMG 2 Fig 4 4 10 Inputting the copy destination image data number The data is now written into the copy destination 4 To copy other image data repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Copying optional patterns Data The VG 859C s internal optional patterns OOH to cannot be selected as the copy sources or destinations 1 Input the optional pattern number 40H to serving as the copy source and press the SET key OPT Data Copy Source OPT 40 Fig 4 4 11 Inputting the copy source optional pattern number 2 To copy the data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Input the optional pattern number 40H to 7FH serving as the copy destination and press the SET key OPT Data Copy Dist OPT 41 Fig 4 4 12 Inputting the copy destination optional pattern number The data is now written into the copy destination 4 To copy other optional patterns repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 ha
200. e SET key The values can also be incremented or decremented using the 4 v key e The changes are reflected in the outputs immediately O Normal status PG1 850 VESA400 85 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz x Analog digital video output level operation Analog video output level Digital video output level PG1 850 LEVEL 0 70V 255 When 0 255 factory setting is selected as 15 Setting the digital level mode of config edit the analog video output level is continuously reduced and when it drops below the minimum value of 0 30V it is automatically switched to the digital video output level and the analog output value calculated on the basis of the digital level is output 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz Analog video output level Variable range 0 30 to 1 20 V The changes are reflected in the analog output only Digital video output level Variable range 0 to 255 Press the LEVEL key The changes are reflected in both the analog and digital outputs 17 Analog audio output level operation v vv Variable range 0 to 2000 mV PG1 850 AAd L OR 05 EE NEN A A 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz When the cursor is aligned with S the levels for the left and right channels can be varied simultaneously using the 14 7 key Lt HDMI audio output level operation v Variable range 90 to 0 dB PG1 850 HAd L20R20 dB S MM 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz a CR E
201. e Size pp AudioSamp sampling frequency 32 44 1 48 88 2 96 176 4 192 kHz Sample Frequency Same setting as left 1 Setting for 6 Setting the internal audio bit width InternalAudio Width in 5 6 HDMI output settings ACP ISRC Packet Items to be set ACP ISRC ACP Type Packet DVD Audio Other ISRC Continued 0 ISRC2 DVD Audio Type Packet ON OFF ISRC2 OFF Program settings are reflected as is in those places indicated by ACP ISRC Packet settings which are reflected Copy Copy Quality Transaction Packet Permission Number ON OFF VENE E BE E 0 0 0 ISRC1 OFF Copy Freely once Not Present ISRC2 OFF in the table 23 Setting the automatic HDMI audio output Select ON or OFF for the HDMI audio output when an internal program No 850 to 999 has been selected When ON is selected for the HDMI audio output the HDMI audio signals are output as the default when an internal program has been selected Conversely when OFF is selected the default OFF setting is established Cfg HDMI Internal Audio Prg 850 999 OFF 0 1 Fig 3 3 25 Selecting the HDMI audio output Table 3 3 25 HDMI audio output selection method Jor HDMI audio output is to OFF Factory setting The HDMI audio output is set to ON The settings for the HDMI audio which is output are listed in the table below For details of the settings refer to 5 6 Setti
202. e automatic reflection function if SELECTED has been set for 22 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection of config edit FUNC5 e Only the data values inside InfoFrame are subject to as the InfoFrame settings and these settings have no effect on all the other outputs 1 Setting InfoFrame SPD AUDIO MPEG ON OFF InfoFrame ON OFF InfoFrame ON OFF AVION SPD ON 0 1 AUDIO ON MPEG ON 0 1 Fig 5 7 1 Setting InfoFrame ON OFF Setting item Table 5 7 2 InfoFrame ON OFF setting method LCD Description display InfoFrame ON OFF The InfoFrame data concerned is not sent AVI SPD AUDIO MPEG The InfoFrame data concerned is sent 2 Setting the type and version of AVI InfoFrame AVI InfoFrame Type 2 Ver 2 1 2 Fig 5 7 2 Setting the type and version of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 3 AVI InfoFrame type and version setting method ver The setting is merely displayed it cannot be changed Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting the scan information and bar information of AVI InfoFrame HE HE HH EE HE HE EE HE EE HE HEEN HEEN HE GE HE HEN HE HEN GN EEE HEN EN HEEN HEN HH HE NE MH KN Scanlnfo No Data 0 2 Barlnfo not valied 0 3 Fig 5 7 3 Setting the scan information and bar information of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 4 AVI
203. e bottom right H fi scotia ovate wt ____ Serotngtonerathe _ elu Tecoma 9 RU toward the oprah 4 _Setting tl the graphic plane and character plane scrolling step The same step is used for the graphic plane and character plane G amp C Step1 H 1 V 1 1 255 Fig 6 15 5 Setting the graphic plane and character plane scrolling step Table 6 15 6 Graphic plane and character plane scrolling step setting method Setting item Key LCD Setting range display Scrolling step G amp C Step1 Number XXX H 1 to 255 dot in H direction keys V 1to 255 H V direction Set the frame size for simple moving picture H 1 to 4095 dot V 110 4095 H G amp C Step2 3 4 Number XXX H O to 255 dot 0 when no step is keys V 0 to 255 going to be used When Action Interval 2 3 or 4 is used select the settings to match G amp C Step 2 3 and 4 For normal scrolling set 0 for G amp C Step 2 3 and 4 Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 _ Setting the window plane scrolling function ON OFF W SCR OFF W FLK OFF 0 1 P SCR OFF 0 1 Fig 6 15 6 Setting the window plane scrolling function ON OFF Table 6 15 7 Window plane scrolling function ON OFF setting method Setting item LCD Description display Scrolling Window scrolling is not executed Factory setting W SCR Window scrolling is executed W FLK Refer to 6 15 2 Setting the window pattern
204. e card s top surface Insert the card firmly as far as it will go A beep tone is heard The LED lights migi Check that the card is locked in position If the card is locked properly a beep tone is heard DS 2 5 2 How to eject the PC card 1 Press the LOCK key for 5 seconds A beep tone is heard 2 Lightly press the EJECT button to the right of the card slot The EJECT button pops out 3 Firmly press the EJECT button to eject the card Check that the lock is released and that the LED goes off If the card is unlocked properly a beep tone is heard C amp CAUTION 1 For the PC card use the CompactFlash card and PC card adapter packed with the generator The generator s warranty does not cover any problems in operation which are caused by the use of any other type of card or adapter 2 Be absolutely sure to follow the above steps to insert and eject PC cards Taking any other steps may damage the data on the PC card and make it impossible for the PC card to be recognized even when it is re inserted 3 It takes two or three seconds for the LED to go off after the EJECT button is pressed and the card is removed This is because it takes time for the VG generator to process the ejection of the PC card Refrain from performing any operations during these seconds VG 859C system settings 3 1 Concerning the system settings config edit FUNC5 The table below lists the items whic
205. e displayed Vertical V coordinate 0 and up 400 300 STEP10 Horizontal H coordinate Movement step 1 10 or 100 0 and up Home point coordinates The top left of the display serves as the home point Normal 1 Reverse 1 mode H 0 V 0 Normal 2 Reverse 2 mode GATE 1 R 1 G 2 B 3 Concerning the gate R coordinates in RGB increments The horizontal coordinates R G B are obtained by multiplying the coordinate H in pixel increments by 3 and adding a further 1 for R 2 for G and 3 for B The vertical coordinate gate is obtained by adding 1 to the vertical coordinate V in pixel units Concerning the cursor movement in the Reverse 1 and 2 modes In these modes it is assumed that a display whose top and bottom are reversed will be used Under normal circumstances therefore the direction in which the cursor moves will be reversed Cursor movement keys 2 for 4 4 for gt 6 for and 8 for Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 2 Set the flicker interval and movement step Flicker 0 0 7 Step 10 dot 0 2 Fig 6 13 2 Setting the flicker interval and movement step Table 6 13 3 Flicker interval and movement step setting method Setting item LCD display Description Flicker Flicker occurs at the designated interval 64V sw 10 dots 10 dots 100 dots 100 dots 3 Set the cursor color R G B and b
206. e is a description of the display method used for 640 x 480 9 frame simple moving pictures 1 Create the images Create the 1920 x 1440 images consisting of 640 x 480 9 frame images stacked three vertically and three horizontally See Fig 6 15 9 2 Register the images created in optional patterns No 80H to BFH image data No 1 to 64 using the Windows software SP 8848 provided 3 Set the program data Described here are the settings for pattern data only Timing data use the regular settings 1 Set the number of the optional pattern registered in 2 as optional pattern 1 or optional pattern 2 2 Select the optional pattern OPT1 2 using pattern select 3 Set the execution interval Action Interval 1 graphic plane scrolling G SCR scrolling direction G Dir scrolling step G amp C Step1 and number of simple moving picture repetitions G Repeat using Pattern action e Action Interval 1 Set the time interval during which the frame is to be moved in V increments Scrolling G SCR Select ON Scrolling direction G Dir Select Mov Scrolling step G amp C Step1 Set the frame size In this case it is H 640 and V 480 e Number of simple moving picture repetitions G Repeat Set the number of times the frames are to be moved in the horizontal and vertical direction In this case it is 3 and V 3 Set scroll steps H and V
207. e keys used to set the restriction on how long to wait for FIFO Ready to be returned after HDCP is commenced if the receiver connected is a repeater 1200ms 1200 ms 1800ms 1800 ms s sme 350076 s some indicated on the setting screen stands for Video transmitter and receiver link synchronization verification values 5 Save data which has been set 1 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save HDCP Data SAVE or ESC Fig 4 10 5 Saving the data 2 Press the SAVE key The data is saved and the LED of the SAVE key goes off The previous LCD screen is restored To reflect the data without saving it do not use the SAVE key but press the SET key instead The values remain value until the power is turned off f the ESC key is pressed instead operation returns to the previous screen without the data having been saved Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 10 2 HDCP settings for each program data If Program is selected for the execution mode Exec Mode by HDCP set FUNCC HDCP enable or disable must be set for each program data In this mode when programs are executed HDCP is executed for those programs in which the HDCP item of the program data is set to enable and it is not executed for those programs in which it is set to disable The settings are per
208. e output condition data items Table 5 4 1 Reference pages for setting details Setting item Reference Setting item Reference page page 6 Sync signal level RGB YPbPr 0 117 Reference Concerning the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect OT YPbPr coefficient table number p 117 ratio D p 118 t connector p 118 16 Black insertion function ON OFF p 125 Line3 Black Insertion position insertion BNC connector output p 118 Pattern display ON time D Sub connector output Black insertion OFF time DVI D connector output p 119 DVI A connector output D connector output 10 S connector output format p 119 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting tl the sync signal output mode OutputMode ANALOG 0 Fig 5 4 1 Setting the sync signal output mode For details on the standard timing in each mode refer to the Standard timing reference internal program No column in the table below Table 5 4 2 Sync signal output mode setting method Key LCD Standard timing Remarks display reference internal program No 1 TR1080 Tri level sync signal 970 to 973 PG1 The first field becomes the first line of mode 1080 type DISP 2 TR1035 Tri level sync signal 974 975 PG1 The second field becomes the first mode 1035 type line of DISP The Vdisp setting for the second field is incremented by 1 This means that the total number of Vdisp in one frame will be an odd
209. e sent 2 Setting tl the ACP type of ACP Packets ACP Type Generic Audio 0 3 Fig 5 8 2 Setting the ACP type of ACP Packets Table 5 8 3 ACP Packet ACP type setting method The setting items of the ACP Packets which are valid differ depending on the ACP type See table below ACP Packet setting item DVD Audio Type Dependent Generation Count_A Count_S Count_U Copy Permission 5 0 U Copy Number Move_A Move_S Move_U Quality Transaction LI Valid Q gt A O lt 3 Setting the DVD audio type dependent generation and copy permission of ACP packets DVD Audio 0 0 1 Copy Permission 0 0 3 Fig 5 8 3 Setting the DVD audio type dependent generation and copy permission of ACP packets Table 5 8 4 ACP packet DVD audio type dependent generation and copy permission setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display DVD Audio Type Dependent Generation This sets 0 DVD Audio Type 0 must be set unless DVD Audio has been selected as the ACP type setting 1 This sets 1 1 must be set when DVD Audio has been selected as the ACP type setting Copy Permission O Copy Freely no copy restrictions 2 The copy restrictions are governed by the Copy Number setting 3 Copy prohibited 4 Setting the copy number and quality of ACP Packets Copy Number
210. ecasts and information on stocks and shares Teletext has achieved a high penetration rate in various countries in Europe and Southeast Asia where the 625i system is used With Teletext a total of 40 characters x 25 lines can be contained on a page per screen and between 100 and 899 pages of information can be displayed Teletext waveforms The VBI and Teletext waveforms are shown below Teletext Possible Line ODD FIELD 620 J 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 0000 Vertical Blanking Interval EVEN FIELD 308 J 309 J 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 J 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 334 335 J 336 J 337 V 0000 _______ Vertical Blanking Interval Fig 5 10 1 VBI waveforms 45byte Ol RE 101010101010101011100100 Clock Run In ring Code 2byte byte Fig 5 10 2 Teletext waveforms VG series supports the Teletext System and has data rate of 6 9375 MHz In the 4 line mode data is always superimposed onto lines 20 21 333 and 334 in the 8 line mode it is always superimposed on lines 13 14 20 21 326 327 333 and 334 5 10 2 Details of item settings 1 Setting the output ON OFF and data transfer mode TeleText Disable 0 1 TeleTextLine 4 0 1 Fig 5 10 3 Setting the output ON OFF and data transfer mode Table 5 10 2 Output ON OFF and dat
211. ecifications and checkpoints 12 3 2 HDMI connector 18 2 Fig 12 3 2 Pin layout Table 12 3 2 Pin numbers je o msome For details on the DDC power supply refer to 12 2 Concerning the DDC power supply 12 3 3 Analog D Sub connector Fig 12 3 3 Pin layout Table 12 3 3 Pin numbers me sm e details on the DDC power supply refer to 12 2 Concerning the DDC power supply 12 3 4 D5 connector 14 8 Fig 12 3 4 Pin layout Table 12 3 4 Pin numbers fe fer 2 fam fo fer o am ho me gt fewer dCi s m mm me gt e eem h me o Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints 12 3 5 Y C S connector Fig 11 3 5 Pin layout Table 11 3 5 Pin numbers 12 3 6 Remote D Sub 25 pin female connector 25 14 Fig 12 3 6 Pin layout Table 12 3 6 Pin numbers 3 s mmm gt mo F w e fo ww m o pw m Jo mm o 1 P or O is as input to or output from the VG 859C 2 The control signals of these pins are used by Astrodesign Under no circumstances must any connections be made to these pins 8 When fabricating a remote control unit ground pin 21 and use the key matrix of the RB 614C As shown on the next page the signals and remote control box RB 1848 RB 614C RB 649 optional accessory key contacts are arranged in the form of a matrix
212. ectly round circles are always displayed regardless of the display resolution by setting the aspect ratio of the monitor For example H 4 and V 3 are set for an NTSC monitor 4 3 and H 16 and V 9 are set for an HDTV monitor 16 9 Perfectly round circles will not be drawn if 0 is set for H or V This is to ensure compatibility with generators Astrodesign s existing VG series Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES NE Game KK Fig 6 7 2 Formats 6 8 Setting the color bar pattern The following items are set for the color bar pattern data 1 Mode and direction 2 Number of repetitions and interval 3 Color layout 1 Set the mode and direction Mode 0 1 Direction Hor 0 3 Fig 6 8 1 Setting the mode and direction Table 6 8 1 Mode and direction setting method Mode mode A percentage is specified for the interval Mode Dot mode A number of dots is specified for the interval Direction Direction The pattern is repeated in the designated direction in accordance with the settings for number of repetitions interval and color layout Hor Horizontal direction M V interval is ignored c 4 2 co Ni Ver Vertical direction The H interval is ignored Vertical direction 2 Hor amp V The pattern is repeated horizontally and when the corner is reached it is continu
213. ed appears on the LCD display and the setting is fixed 1 This range is 5 000 to 200 000 MHz for the VG 859 859A Setting item The input mode determines whether the values for the setting items are to be input in microseconds us or dots If for instance when the dot mode has been selected a dot value is changed the us value will be automatically calculated However what actually happens differs slightly depending on the input mode and setting item Refer to the table below Table 5 2 3 Input modes Setting item Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp HDstart HDwidth Hfrontp Hblanking ps setting Dot setting ps setting Dot setting 5 dot setting Data calculated from the values of other items Re calculation regardless of the Calculation mode Display Calculation Display m Values cannot be input in Values cannot be input in microseconds microseconds le When the dot clock frequency is changed the settings are re calculated according to each item mode When dot clock frequency or Hdisp is changed microsecond mode dot clock frequency is compensated for on the basis of the Hperiod and Hdisp values eThe settings for the dot clock frequency Hperiod or Hdisp can be fixed In this case these fixed settings take priority over the input mode and they will be used 2 _ Setting Hperiod Hdisp and Hblanking period 26 41uS 832dot
214. ed correctly on the TVs that do not support xvYYC Each value of the xvYCC evaluation pattern is as given below Check color reproduction by comparing the color bar of a different level with the standard 100 color bar when in Limited Mode given in the middle Table 9 3 1 General description of the xvYCC pattern Setting item No 0A 4 over standard color bar Standard 100 color bar across Limited Range Under 4 under standard color bar Over 8 over standard color bar Under 8 under standard color bar Over 12 over standard color bar Standard 100 color bar across Limited Range 12 under standard color bar Chapter 9 Concerning xvYCC Table 9 3 2 Values for the xvYCC evaluation pattern Pattern Level values 0709 No White Green Magenta Black Blue _ No 0A Over Y 241 179 81 64 16 4 Cb 128 12 155 38 218 101 244 128 Cr 128 139 12 22 234 244 117 128 Y 235 219 188 173 78 63 32 128 16 154 42 214 102 240 128 128 138 16 26 230 240 118 128 Under Y 235 219 187 170 72 56 24 Cb 128 12 155 38 218 244 244 128 Cr 128 139 12 22 234 117 117 128 247 235 202 185 83 66 32 16 8 Cb 128 7 156 38 221 100 249 128 128 139 7 18 238 249 117 128 235 219 188 173 78 63 32 128 154 42 214 102 128 128 138 16 26 230 240 118 128 Under Y 235 218 185 168 66 49 16 6 Cb 128 156 35 221 100 128 Cr 128 139 7 18 238 249 117 128 No 0C Over Y 253 209 191 86 68 16 12 Cb 128 3 157 31 225 99 253 1
215. ed only when Mode is set to Get VCP Feature Parameter value received from the connected device by the VG 859C SELF CHECK 7 1 Concerning self check The VG 859C has a function self check function that makes it possible to determine whether the hardware devices are functioning properly Turn the power off when exiting the self check 711 How to start up the self check Turn on the power of the VG 859C while pressing the 21 buzzer sounds the self check mode starts up The version information MAC address and other information listed below are displayed in sequence at intervals of 5 seconds or so Display Description Display screen sequence Version information Firmware VG 859 Self Check Mode ROM Version x xx Hardware BOARD REV xxxxxxxxh BOARD TYPE xxxxxxxxh HDMI output HDMI XX XX 2 Support for optional With or without support for functions optional functions Support for additional Pattern 001 patterns options Pattern 002 Other device Serial no S N information 1 Contact Astrodesign sales representative for details the optional patterns which be added 7 1 2 Types of check items A list of the self check items is provided below Table 7 1 1 Check items Key check For checking the keys and LEDs on the front panel of the VG 859C p 238
216. ed onto the next line which is obtained through division by the V interval 3 Ver amp H The pattern is repeated vertically and when the corner is reached it is continued onto the next column which is obtained through division by the H interval Vertical direction Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 2 Set the number of repetitions and the H and V intervals Repeat 16 1 16 Interval H 6 3 6 3 Fig 6 8 2 Setting the number of repetitions and interval Table 6 8 2 Number of repetitions and interval setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Number of Number This sets the number of colors repetitions keys Setting range 1 to 16 Repeat Interval Number In the mode Interval keys XXX X Setting range 0 0 to 100 0 H V In the dot mode XXXX Setting range 1 to 9999 dot lt Example For direction 2 H amp V gt H interval Number of repetitions 5 gt CEP 203 3 Set the color layout to CF of the color bars 2 6 3 RG C8 9R C4 BSRB 6 7 Fig 6 8 3 Setting the color layout Table 6 8 3 Color layout setting method Jo me o o 5 m SSS e f fomm 6 9 Setting the gray scale pattern The following items are set for the gray scale pattern data 1 Mode and direction 2 Number of repetitions and intervals 3 Level
217. emory Card Checking E29 M Card UnFormated 7 4 RS 232C check connector is required for this check Ensure that the connector has been installed correctly before conducting the check D Sub 9 pin female connector Pins 2 and 3 shorted Pins 7 and 8 shorted ON OO FW DN Fig 7 4 1 Connector 1 Press the 2 key and SET key Select Item 2 0 4 RS232C LoopBack Fig 7 4 2 Selecting RS 232C check RS 232C loopback is executed RS 232C Check W ww Read data Write data Fig 7 4 3 Executing the check 2 When the check is completed the screen shown below appears on the LCD Three seconds later the check item selection screen returns to the display RS 232C Check OK ESC gt end Fig 7 4 4 Check completed The error buzzer sounds if an error has occurred The check is aborted the 20H to 7FH codes are checked The screen shown below appears on the LCD RS 232C Check ERR R rr W ww Chapter 7 SELF CHECK 7 5 Flash ROM check 1 Press the 3 key and SET key Select Item 3 0 4 Flash ROM Check Fig 7 5 1 Selecting Flash ROM check 2 Press the SET key The internal flash ROM is checked Flash ROM Checking Fig 7 5 2 Executing the check 3 When the check is completed the screen shown below appears on the LCD Three seconds later the check item selection screen returns to the display Flash ROM Check OK ES
218. ency step and Time step this counts as one time It is repeated for the number of times specified by the Number of repetitions setting Level sweep This refers to changing the output level from 0 to 2V in 50mV steps When sweeping from left to right Left OV 2V gt right OV 2V left 2V OV gt right 2V OV gt Hereafter repeated When sweeping from right to left Right OV 2V gt left OV 2V gt right 2V OV left 2V OV gt Hereafter repeated e The sweep function cannot be executed at the same time as the pattern action HDCP or some of the other functions For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously e When the same setting is used for the left and right output frequencies and different settings are used for the output levels the left and right phases will not be constant To output the signals in phase be absolutely sure to set the outputs to the same levels 4 Setting the time step and number of repetitions for frequency sweep SWEEP STEP 40 msec 0 SWEEP TIMES 0 0 15 Fig 5 5 4 Setting the time step and number of repetitions for frequency sweep Table 5 5 5 Frequency sweep time step and number of repetitions setting method Time step This sets the time interval per step SWEEP STEP s e wm e m mem _ zm f20m o mom _ o oo xem E m rw Number of rep
219. eos 0801 2446 11 08010261 0801 0801 0801 0801 980 656 QUAS H ou g u ou g u ou g u 4 4 Sod osorsozer oem 00009 00549 d d orses owee ou g u wem wm mm INVO3S Wl 0 009 00006 5094 CEG Wd NIN 14 719 601 00 l 00006 5094 LEG 14 6 00 i i NIN U 9 0 166 CCO INVO3S 14 719 501 006 61 00006 509 Wd NIN 14 9 0 00 l 00006 5094 66 som _ cmews wow ue som _ om _ mw comm won woz me som comm mess wem wow wm as soww osom wow oie va comm oom wow oe AxH 2H 2 24 6 ON Aouanbey d ejdsip Jo 5000100 Jejuozuo 969 2 940 1002 32018 96 1979949 Jexid qng 1949949 1949949 10 gt A days y A deis 9 A dais 91 A dais ze
220. eparately for R G and B Serration pulse OFF 0 5H 1H or EXOR selectable Non interlaced interlace amp sync interlace amp video Analog output connectors BNC RGB HS VS CS Fine adjustment of analog output levels Offset level RGB coupled video level separate for R G and B DVI output DVI 1 0 HDCP Ver 1 0 complied with Output control Analog RGB ON OFF and inverse ON OFF and negative positive for HS VS CS Audio output connectors RCA x 2 Output frequency 100 to 20000 Hz in 100 Hz increments channels Output level 0 to 2000mV in 50mV increments HDMI output HDMI 1 1 HDCP Ver 1 1 complied with Color mode RGB YCbCr 4 4 4 8 bits YCbCr 4 2 2 8 10 or 12 bits Internal audio 8 channels sine wave single tone sweep External audio input Analog x 2 channels digital COAX TOSLINK Audio sampling frequency 32 kHz to 192 kHz max 8 channels HS horizontal sync signal VS vertical sync signal CS composite sync signal 12 1 2 External interfaces RS 232C 9pin Remote connector 25 pin LAN 10 100BASE TX 12 1 3 General ratings Supply voltage Power line frequency Power consumption Dimensions Weight Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity Approx 6 kg 5 to 40 C 10 to 60 C 30 to 85 RH no condensation Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints 12 2 Concerning the DDC power supply The supply voltage 5V from the DDC power supply is supplied to the
221. er to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However names cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display When the NAME key has been selected the program name dot clock frequency horizontal sync frequency vertical sync frequency Hdisp and Vdisp are shown or only the program name is shown on the display depending on the NAME display setting For details the setting method refer to 4 Setting the NAME display mode Example of display When Standard has been set as the NAME display mode Display position Top left of the screen VESA600 75 Program name Dot Clock 46 88 V 75 00 2 Dot Clock Dot clock frequency H Horizontal sync frequency Hdisp V Vertical sync frequency Vdisp Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 15 Setting pattern action The pattern action function cannot be executed at the same time as when the HDCP audio sweep and some other functions are being used For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously By setting the pattern action data scrolling and palette scrolling on the graphic planes scrolling on the character plane and scrolling on the window plane as well as flicker and simple moving picture can be executed For details on simple moving pictures refer to 6 15 2 Concerning Planes Patterns created with VG 859C are made
222. erence coefficients comply with the SMPTE ITU 601 standard _ pH The color difference coefficients comply with the ITU 709 standard 3 This tri level sync signal output Repetition 2 xvYCC Programs which xvYYC is set z sung 09 09EVWOA 89M 90 IWNV N N bord 095 079 076 69 697 6 8 21919010 Z 9 UPM JOP Z 05 0001 31 70 893 DOWNY 00 0 025792 920706 1916 6 8 2191890 euy 9 UIPIM OL OSELXSL VOA dou N N Bod 090 2000 ne 80488019 au Z 8 A 01 H JOP Z 09 0SELXSLVOA 893 DOWNY 0 00 02582 16666 19v Le 6 8 8xgssoeulz 8 A 8 H 1 JOP Z vOd DOWNY 007 099 0 8 vZ 966 65 8208 118 NG Kejdsip wayed ezLdo vO3 g9 604 066 099 0929 6 69 12 0 8 6635010 G A G H 30p z SOTYNY 002 079 09 vl 96009 9 5 60 668800 G A G H vof Bod 0SEx0ZL 0929 7867 998 02140 Bed 600 26 26 13492124V eur H 80140 08 00ZLYS3A g9
223. ern setup Display position Linear gradation ramp V Crosshatch amp circle amp circle 3C ANSI pattern LL direction SMPTERP 133 0 SMPTERP 133 0 133 E ANSI pattern ANSI pattern 9 points Pom ANSI pattern horizontal resolution Artist s rendition Internal optional pattern data DDC pattern 1 32 gradation gray scale SMPTE color version binary 256 gray amp RGBW color ANSI pattern vertical bar superimposed full resolution color Artist s rendition HDMI speaker check 2 1 Refer to 11 1 2 2 Concerning the DDC patterns No 0E 22 23 2E 2 Refer to 11 1 2 4 Concerning the HDMI speaker check No 27 3 Refer to 11 1 2 6 Concerning the HDMI CEC pattern No 35 11 1 2 1 Concerning the evaluation patterns Nos 0A 0C Option pattern Nos OB OC are xvYCC evaluation patterns For details refer to 9 the xvYCC Chapter 11 REFERENCE 11 1 2 2 Concerning the DDC patterns No 0E 22 23 2E When a DDC pattern is executed the EDID is obtained from the receiver such as a display connected to VG 859C and displayed DDC patterns include optional patterns 0 22 23 2E and the differences in what appears on the display and the port where the EDID is obtained are shown in the table below T 777
224. es of the optional pattern data 4 255 64B GRAY 42 317 Cross amp Circle amp Gray Fig 4 7 10 Example of what is shown on the display Name List When the number 2 digits 1 to 64 of the image data to be displayed first is input using the number keys that image data appears on the display first and it is followed by the subsequent image data Select IMG No Top 1 IMG Name List Fig 4 7 11 LCD display Number of used blocks in 1KB increments on PC Number of unused blocks in 1KB increments on PC card IMG data List Block Used XXXXX Unused XXXXX NO OPT NO SI ZE NAME 1 80 1024 768 ma 1 lt SIZE Number of horizontal dots number of 2 81 640 480 Image 2 vertical lines of image data 3 7 1920 1440 mane 3 OPT NO Number of the optional pattern whose image is to be displayed Fig 4 7 12 Example of what is shown on the display Group Data List 1 If after selecting 5 on the list selection screen Fig 4 7 2 the 14 key key is pressed the screen on which to input GroupDataListNo the group number appears Use the number keys to input the 1 1 99 number 2 digits 01 to 99 of the group whose data is to be listed and press the SET key Fig 4 7 13 Selecting the group number 2 Use number keys to input the group number 2 digits 01 to 98 to display the data of that group on the display Select Prg No 1 Group Dat
225. es to the group numbers as described in section 4 1 3 1 Press the FUNC key 0 key and SET key The direct display mode appears on the LCD display Select Function 0 Direct Display 2 Use the number keys to input the program Fig 4 1 1 Selecting the function number 3 digits Example 001 e Program numbers 001 to 849 are used for PC cards program numbers 850 to 999 are used for the internal data PG1 When using the internal data the internal program tables PG1 2 and 3 must be set Config edit FUNC5 For details on the internal data refer to Program data Fig 4 1 2 Inputting the program in 11 1 1 number e One or 2 digit numbers 1 to 99 can be input using the number key s followed by the SET key Example 1 key SET key e Program numbers can also be selected using the 4 key and 7 key Numbers which not been registered and program numbers with invalid set for the data are ignored With the RB 1848 RB 614C or RB 649 the program is executed immediately when the 4 Or 7 is pressed When the controls on the front panel of the VG 859C are used however the SET key must be pressed after pressing the 141 or 7 Normally this screen appears when the VG 848 starts as well Refer to 2 2 Operating mode when the generator s power is turned on 3 The video signals of the program whose number was selected are now output Program
226. etitions Number The sweep is repeatedly executed for the number of SWEEP TIMES keys times set Setting range 0 to 15 0 infinite 5 Setting the minimum and maximum frequencies for frequency sweep FREQ SWEEP 200 20000 MIN 200Hz MAX 20000Hz Fig 5 5 5 Setting the minimum and maximum frequencies for frequency sweep Table 5 5 6 Frequency sweep minimum and maximum frequency setting method Minimum frequency Number XXX00 Hz Setting range 200 to 20000 Hz in 100 Hz increments MIN keys Maximum frequency MAX Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 Setting the frequency step for frequency sweep HE ME HE HE GE HEN HEN HEN HEN HEEN HEN HEEN NI FREQ SWEEP 200 19800 STEP 200Hz Fig 5 5 6 Setting the frequency step for frequency sweep Table 5 5 7 Frequency sweep frequency step setting method Frequency step XXXO00 Hz Setting range 200 to 19800 Hz in 100 Hz increments keys 5 6 Setting the HDMI output This section provides details of the settings for the HDMI output data items For details on HDMI refer to High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1 1 Table 5 6 1 Reference pages for setting details
227. execute or edit the program data When a key is selected its LED lights 3 LCD The menu settings program numbers timing data etc appear here Two lines each containing 24 characters are displayed 4 These keys are used to execute or abort the functions and program data and to select the input signals hexadecimal values represented by the letters A to F can also be input 7 FORMAT key This is used to edit data while the program data is being executed When it is selected its LED lights 8 Output control These keys are used to select the output signals When a key is selected its LED lights keys Refer to 4 1 7 Switching the output video signals and sync signals SET key This key is used to execute the functions and program data 10 key This is used to increment the program numbers 1 and also to display the previous page on the LCD 11 key This is used to decrement the program numbers 1 and also to display the next page on the LCD When the 27 Y key on the front panel of the VG 859C is used the programs are not executed until the SET key is pressed after pressing the PU Or 7 However when the 1848 is used programs are executed instantly by pressing the 4 key OPERATING PROCEDURES 2 1 Concerning the VG 859C s functions The VG 859C has 14 functions including ones for outputting the video signals and for editing and reg
228. f 5mV occurs white level of the video signals when the Macrovision function is started up e The effects of the Macrovision signals differ depending on the mode such as VHS or DVD STB Before use check the terms and conditions of the contract with Macrovision Corp For details on the item settings refer to the page concerned in the reference column of the table below Table 5 11 1 Reference page for details on Macrovision settings Setting item Reference page Output mode What is Macrovision Macrovision is a copy protection system developed by Macrovision Corp This copy protection system is widely used by VHS DVD Video and other video sources on the market as well as by satellite broadcasting By causing the video deck s AGC automatic gain control circuit to malfunction the system makes it impossible for output sources to be video recorded properly The AGC circuit is designed to adjust the gain of the input signals automatically in order to maintain the appropriate level of sensitivity and today s consumer use VTRs are almost invariably equipped with it It functions to brighten up dark pictures or darken excessively bright images and save them Macrovision Corp s copy protection signals cause this AGC circuit to malfunction by mixing up signals with levels outside the ratings in the vertical blanking period while leaving the luminance and chrominance signal components of the
229. f another scroll setting is made half pixel scrolling will be used for movement Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 15 6 Lip Sync function Lip Sync function is set as follows What is Lip Sync The viewer listener will find it strange if a temporal time lag between the video and the audio occurs due to separate processing of the video and audio signals in the internal circuits of the receiving device Lip Sync is a function used to adjust this type of time lag so that video and audio are output at the same timing The VG 859C evaluates this time lag between video and audio using a Lip Sync pattern Without Lip Sync evaluation E m TV a Processing time of video signals Video output vc Time lag occurs A Processing time of audio signals Audio output i pe M during processing Input to a TV when video and audio signals are input simultaneously Lip Sync evealuation with the VG 859C VG 859C _ _ 1 1 n a Processing time of video signals gt Video output 5 2 EE eee m m m Processing time of audio signals Audio output The VG 859C offsets the time delay Output simultaneously Fig 6 15 16 Concerning Lip Sync VG 859C includes the following modes 1 Delay Mode This mode allows delay times to be freely set for video and audio Delay time of
230. f the ESC key is pressed during any of the checks the check is aborted and the check item selection screen returns to the display 7 2 Key check 1 Press the 0 key and SET key Select Item 0 0 4 Key Check Fig 7 2 1 Selecting key check 2 Press the key to be checked Key Check ESC end Push Any Key Fig 7 2 2 Selecting the key The pressed key now appears on the LCD screen Example 14 Key Check ESC end KEY INC Fig 7 2 3 Displaying the results Chapter 7 SELF CHECK 7 3 PC card check A PC card is required for this check Ensure that the card has been inserted correctly before conducting the check 1 Press the 1 key and SET key Select Item 1 0 4 Mem Card Check Fig 7 3 1 Selecting PC card check 2 Press the SET key Mem Card Check OK Fig 7 3 2 Verifying the check 3 Press the SET key Mem Card Check Really OK or Press ESC Fig 7 3 3 Executing the check The PC card check is now executed 1 While the card is being checked the screen shown below appears on the LCD Memory Card Checking Fig 7 3 4 Check in progress 2 When the check is completed the screen shown below appears on the LCD Three seconds later the check item selection screen returns to the display MemCard Check OK ESC gt end Fig 7 3 5 Check completed The error buzzer sounds if an error has occurred The screen shown below appears on the LCD M
231. first owner code setting method XXX First Owner Input using number keys This sets the first owner code 3 Code SHIFT key or from 3 5 from the left alphanumerics 3 to 5 display 1 1 There two ways to input the characters input the character codes 20H directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However characters cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display When inputting the First Owner Code move the cursor inside when exiting from the setting menu move itto end at the top right 15 Setting the year of recording code ISRC 6 7 of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Year of recording code 00 Fig 5 8 15 Setting the year of recording code of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 16 ISRC1 Packet year of recording code setting method Year of recording Code Number XX This sets the last two digits of the Western 6 7 keys 6 7 from the left calendar year as the year of recording 16 Setting the recording item code ISRC 8 12 of ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Recording item code 00000 Fig 5 8 16 Setting the recording item code of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 17 ISRC1 Packet recording item code setting method Recording item Code Number XXXXX This sets the recording code and recording 8 to 12 Keys 8 12 from the left code Chapter 5 TI
232. formed using PC card edit FUNC3 1 Press the FUNC key 3 key and SET key Select Function 3 0 Card Edit Fig 4 10 6 Selecting the function 2 Use the number keys to input the program number 3 digits Example 001 e One or 2 digit numbers 1 to 99 can be input using the number key s followed by the SET key Example 1 key SET key e Program numbers can also be selected using the 14 1 Y key 1 Use the gt key to move to the HDCP Enable Disable item and select Enable or Disable Prog No 1 Enable 0 1 ASTRO AK H HDCP Enable Disable Fig 4 10 7 Selecting enable or disable for HDCP Table 4 10 4 HDCP enable disable selection method Blank Disable HDCP is not executed when Program has been selected as the HDCP execution mode 1 H Enable HDCP is executed when Program has been selected as the HDCP execution mode 3 Save the data which has been set 1 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save Program No 1 XXXXXXX Fig 4 10 8 Saving the data 2 Press the SAVE key The program data is saved on the PC card and the LED of the SAVE key goes off 4 10 3 HDCP execution e HDCP is executed only when programs are executed by direct display FUNCO e When operations are initiated by a function other than direct display FUNCO the authentication check is n
233. g Command Status in which command is awaited when a command is not sent or received for 5 or more seconds Command When a supported command has been received that command is displayed here display XXh FA XXh FA XXh FA XXh EA Acknowledge A Acknowledged the VG 859C responds N Not acknowledged a command other than a command for the logical address set has been received End of Message E End of message F No end of message Command received TX is a command sent by the VG 859C RX is a command received by the VG 859C Commands which are sent to the destination address of FH are deemed to be broadcast messages and displayed as acknowledged 11 1 2 7 Concerning the DDC CI pattern No 3B Option pattern No 3B changes to the DDC CI pattern by the optional support For details refer to 6 17 DDC CI function optional function Chapter 11 REFERENCE 11 1 3 User character pattern data 5 gt oH a In HMM pibe 13222222 AR Sons E eee Ed 3 ax Ea CHEM wean Sas HER sag Y ME FOH letters me 1 F1H letters 2 VESA specifications FOH F1H Chapter 11 REFERENCE F2H Chine
234. g data The figure below shows how the horizontal timing data is set and what the different parts are called Hblanking Hsync Hbackp Hperiod 4 HDwidth Fig 5 2 1 Horizontal timing data Hfrontp and Hblanking are calculated from the values of other setting items and as such their values cannot be input directly Hfrontp Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp e Hblanking Hperiod Hdisp In addition to what is described in the setting details for the DVI and HDMI outputs the horizontal timing data is subject to other restrictions Refer to 5 1 13 DVI and HDMI output timing restrictions Table 5 2 1 Reference pages for setting details Setting item Reference page Inputmode Inputmode p 101 Dot clock frequency EE 000000000 ul HDstart p 103 HDwidth Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 2 2 Details of item settings 1 _ Setting t the input mode and dot clock frequency H Input Mode dot 0 1 Dot Clock 31 500MHz Fig 5 2 2 Setting the input mode and dot clock frequency Table 5 2 2 Input mode and dot clock frequency setting method Input mode GN us mode The values for the items input microseconds H Input Mode 1 dt dot mode The values for the items are input in dots Dot clock Number XX XXXMHz Setting range 5 000 to 250 000 MHz Dot Clock keys e When the C SHIFT 6 key is press
235. g item Setting item page page ISRC2 Packet ISRC Status p 152 4 1 3 5 Recording item Code p 151 as p 152 7 ACP Packet ON OFF ISRC1 Packet ISRC Continued 152 ISRC1 Packet p 149 ISRC Valid K cop cop Kra QA Q S QU ACP Packet ACP Type p 149 Validity Information p 153 DVD Audio Type Catalogue Code p 153 p 15 Country Code p 153 1 50 Quality T Year of recording nsaction p 151 Code 6 Items marked with a blue asterisk in the above table be changed into values differing from the settings input using the automatic reflection function if SELECTED has been set for 22 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection of config edit FUNCS For the ISRC2 Packet all 05 are sent with the exception of the Packet Header e Only the data values inside the packets are subject to the ACP and ISRC Packet settings and these settinas have no effect on all the other outputs Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting the Packets ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 ON OFF Packet ON OFF gt Packet ON OFF ACP ON 0 1 lt lt ISRC1 ON ISRC2 ON 0 1 Fig 5 8 1 Setting the Packets ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 ON OFF Table 5 8 2 Packets ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 ON OFF setting method Setting item LCD Description display Packet ON OFF The packets concerned are not sent ISRC1 ISRC2 GIN The packets concerned ar
236. g the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect ratio Optional pattern No 1F is the AFD pattern which is used to evaluate the aspect ratio under the EIA CEA 861 standard The AFD pattern is set in section 13 Setting the AFD Aspect and AFD Type to section 15 Setting the AFD bars Table 5 4 18 Setting items related to aspect ratio 7 AFD can be changed using the gt and 4 keys while optional pattern No 1F is displayed AFD Color AFD aspect ratio displayed here AFD background color AFD Bar AFD type displayed here Fig 5 4 16 Example of optional pattern No 1F display E If when SELECTED has been set for 20 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection for config edit FUNC optional pattern No 1F is displayed the bar setting for AVI InfoFrame will be automatically changed to the value of the bars in optional pattern No 1F AFD Type details lt Next page Table 5 4 19 AFD Type details AFD Type AFD Aspect value description 0 as the coded frame NN 11 12 box 12 5 center 0 4 3 with shoot amp protect 14 9 center 16 9 with shoot amp protect 14 9 center 16 9 with shoot amp protect 4 3 center Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 Setting the black insertion Insert Black Frame OFF Sel All ON OOFF 0 Fig 5 4 17 Setting the black insertion Table 5 4 20 Black insertion setting method Setting item Ke
237. gz e seau jejuozuou 82140 99 006 NNS 9OIVNV npn 006 261 0 626 00629 56 19 726 days y9 Keib jo po jeyuozuou 21440 909 89 JIN 80 _ 9O0IVNV Bod 89 xbZ01 00099 8 0 09 days ze _ Jo jeyuozuou GI LdO 6 20 S0TYNY Bod 0 00056 599 226 deis suonepe16 jeyuozuou ejeos 0 VZOL 80 _ 9OIVNV 0 0007 51 66869 298 26 10102 20109 952 0140 91 028 894 OO IVNV 00000 909 89959 GL6 ZHN zH ane weed y ed ou S d ouenbaeij mele e dsip Jo ON 100 e1UOZIOH 2 2 2 2 6 6 0L6 0N REFERENCE um ie 696 076 ON 24 1881002 OSIN Jeg 10109 251 eq 1002 S LN 40140 90 19 55017 9 55010 80140 0140 S8002 1000 21855042 JEG 10109 60140 Jeg 10109 251 eq 1002 S LN 40140 JEYJEN 9 5049 911 _
238. h set using config edit FUNC5 For details on how to access the item setting menus and how to save the data refer to the next following pages for details on the item settings refer to the page number provided in the reference page column below Table 3 1 1 System settings 1 For selecting the program name NAME display mode 5 Terminal mode For selecting the external control interface RS 232C LAN p 18 Data mode For selecting the format for the conditions under which the p 19 program data is output EA Baud rate data bits For selecting the RS 232C baud rate and data bits ES Parity bit stop bit For selecting the RS 232C parity bit and stop bits Start program For selecting the program to be executed when the power is p 20 turned on 11 address port no For setting the IP address and port number of the LAN p 22 16 Key lock mode For selecting the key lock mode for preventing the erroneous p 25 operation of the LEVEL and FUNC keys 17 Terminal mode display For selecting what is to be displayed on the LCD when the p 26 terminal mode is established Internal program table For selecting the internal program tables VBS output filter For setting the VBS and Y C output filter DDC transfer clock For selecting the clock frequency during DDC DDC read method For selecting the DDC read mode 22 automatic reflection For selecting ON or OFF for the automatic reflection of the p 28 InfoFrame a
239. h Horizontal sync frequency 10 kHz and up Hsync 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot Dot lock frequency 5 to 100 MHz 1 dot increments Up to 200 MHz 2 dot increments Up to 250 MHz 4 dot increments Hbakp 10 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot 1 dot increments Hfrontp 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot HDsatt 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot E 1 Hfrontp and Hblanking are calculated from the values of other setting items e Hfrontp Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp e Hblanking Hperiod Hdisp 2 When 0 is set for H FRONT PORCH then set Hsync to e 2 dots or more when the dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 200 MHz e 4 dots or more when the dot clock frequency is 200 001 to 250 MHz 3 Set Hfrontp within the setting range of e 64 to 4096 dots when the dot clock frequency is 100 001to 200 MHz and Hperiod is set in increments of other than 2 dots e 128 to 4096 dots when the dot clock frequency is 200 001 to 250 MHz and Hperiod is set in increments of other than 4 dots 4 the interlace scanning mode set Hfrontp to e 2 dots or more when the dot clock frequency is 5 to 100 MHz e 4 dots or more when the dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 200 MHz e 8 dots or more when the dot clock frequency is 200 001 to 250 MHz 0 cannot be set 5 The sum of HDstart and HDwidth cannot be set in excess of Hperiod The settings can be edited to ensure data compatibility with other models but they will be ignored by the VG 859C
240. ifference Number X XXXX coefficients keys Y a b C Cb d e f Cr g h i Repetition Number XX keys The numerical values for the color difference coefficients are set Setting range Y a b c to 1 0000 Cb f Cr g h 0 to 0 5000 Set so that a b c d e f and g h i are equal to 1 Y Cb Cr calculation formula bxG cxB fxB gxR hxG ixB This sets all the horizontal timing data such as the dot clock frequency and Hperiod to the number multiplied by the number of repetitions If number other than 1 is set outputs except for the HDMI output are forcibly set to OFF Setting range 1 to 10 Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 4 Setting the audio signals and sampling frequency AudioSrc OFF 0 4 AudioSamp 48kHz 0 6 Fig 5 6 4 Setting the audio signals and sampling frequency Table 5 6 5 Audio signal and sampling frequency setting method AudioSrc 1 TOSLINK TOSLINK digital input This specifies the source to be used for the audio data of HDMI INTERNAL Internal sound 0 32kHz This specifies the sampling frequency of the audio data 6 Sampling frequency AudioSamp 96kHz 96kHz 176 4kHz 176 4kHz 192kHz 192kHz Since the audio data is sent during the horizontal blanking period restrictions apply to the audio sampling frequency depending on Hblanking and the number of
241. iginal display data edited here cannot be saved What has been edited here remains in effect until a new program is executed using direct displ card copy To save the data on the PC card use card edit FUNC3 ay auto display FUNCT or other function or until the program data is edited using the PC card edit A e 4 2 Automatic output of video signals auto display FUNC1 The auto display mode is set and executed using auto display FUNC1 In this mode the video signals of the program data in the group or program whose number has been selected are automatically output in accordance with the specified delay time 1 Press the FUNC key 1 key and SET key Select Function 1 0 Auto Display Fig 4 2 1 Selecting the function The auto display mode appears on the LCD screen 2 Use number keys to input the group number Group No 0 0 99 Fig 4 2 2 Selecting the group number When a group number from 1 to 99 has been selected the programs registered in that group are displayed with each delay time To specify the program range set 0 3 Use the number keys to input the delay time and program numbers A Disp Delay Osec 000 000 000 000 000 000 1 c2 3 Fig 4 2 3 Inputting the delay time and program numbers The setting items and display differ depending on the group number setting When 1 to 99 has been specified as the group number Only the de
242. in 0 5H increments the actual Vbackp1 will be the setting 0 5H See figure below Vsync Actual Vbackp Vsync in 1H increments Vbackp setting 0 5H not counted Fig 5 3 How Vbackp is conceived Vsync in 0 5H increments In the interlace scanning 2 field mode ensure that the value of Vfrontp1 Vsync1 Vbackp1 is set in increments Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 Setting EQPfp1 and EQPbp1 EQPfp 1 0 000 5 0 0H EQPbp1 0 000 5 0 0H Fig 5 3 8 Setting EQPfp1 and EQPbp1 Table 5 3 6 EQPfp1 and EQPbp1 setting method EQPfp1 Number 5 These are the ranges of this equalizing pulse inside the front porch keys XX XH Setting range 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments EQPbp1 Number 5 These are the ranges of this equalizing pulse inside the back porch keys XX XH Setting range Setting range 0 000 to 99 999 ms 0 0 to 99 0 H in 0 5H increments e When the non interlace progressive scanning mode is used and tri level sync signals are output EQPfp1 and EQPbp1 cannot be set in 0 5H increments Set them in 1H increments e When the interlace scanning mode is used and tri level sync signals are output EQPfp1 must be set within the range of EQPfp 1H lt Hfrontp The figure below shows how the EQP phase relationship is conceived Hperiod Hsync u U uU
243. increments When the dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 165 MHz 2 dot increments Dual Link Dot clock frequency 50 to 300MHz All horizontal timing signals 4 dot increments 1 Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp Hfrontp HDstart HDwidth Hblanking 2 Only Single Link is supported by the VG 859C standard model Contact Astrodesign separately concerning Dual Link 2 With internal programs OFF is set as the initial setting for all the DVI analog outputs 4 HDMI output 1 Only ACP Packet is supported for the Super Audio CD 2 The YPbPr key does not work when HDMI has been selected as the 11 Priority output port in 5 4 Setting the output condition data 3 The output restrictions differ from model to model as follows due to differences in the priority output port refer to 5 4 11 Setting the DVI output mode and The HDMI output is set OFF when analog or DVI and no RGB output has been set as the priority output port Table 12 4 6 HDMI output restrictions when analog or DVI has been set as the priority output port HDMI output restrictions when analog or DVI has been set as the priority output port VG 859 VG 859A VG 859C VG 859B 25 to 100 MHz X 1 dot increment 100 001 to 165 MHz 2 dot increments 2 dot increments Dot clock frequency Cannot be output Can be output Increments of x dots restriction on horizontal timing setting Table 12 4 7 H
244. ing mode refer to the figure above Table 5 3 1 Reference pages for setting details Setting item Reference Setting item Reference Setting item Reference page page page Input mode p 105 EQPfp 1 p 109 Scanning mode mode EQPbp Vbackp2 Field mode p 106 Semaion Semation p 1 11 Vfrontp2 07 EQP on off 10 EQPfp2 p 113 M E VDstart p 112 EQPbp2 Vblaning Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 3 2 Details of item settings 1 _ Setting the input mode and scanning mode V Input Mode H 0 1 Scan Non Interlace 0 2 Fig 5 3 2 Setting the input mode and scanning mode Table 5 3 2 Input mode and scanning mode setting method Input mode H mode The values for the items are input in H units V Input Mode When this mode is selected values cannot be input in microseconds ms mode The values for the items are input in microseconds When this mode is selected values cannot be input in H units Scanning mode Non Interlace Non interlace progressive scanning mode Scan Inter amp Sync Interlace amp sync mode Inter amp Video Interlace amp video mode The input mode determines whether the values for the setting items are to be input in H units or milliseconds ms mode A value is input in units H setting and display The input value is set and displayed as is ms displa
245. istering the output data Each function is selected by pressing the FUNC key the number key which corresponds to the function number and the SET key in this order A list of these functions is provided below Table 2 1 1 List of functions page Direct display This executes the direct display mode for Adjustments and inspections p 39 outputting the video signals of the TA in the on production lines program whose number has been selected or the group display mode for outputting the video signals of the data in the group whose number has been selected 1 1 Auto display This sets or executes the auto display mode Demonstrations service life p 50 for automatically outputting the video signals tests of the data in the program or group whose number has been selected in accordance with the specified delay time 2 Program edit This temporarily changes the program data Tests and evaluations p 51 and outputs signals undertaken by development and engineering departments 3 card edit This edits the program data and registers it Creation of PC cards p 51 the PC card EN PC card copy This copies the data registered on the PC card 53 Config edit This This performs the VG 859C system settings the This performs the VG 859C system settings 859C system settings p 13 Group data edit This registers the group data on the PC card Registration data in group p 60 di
246. k PASS 7 Tx Encryption PASS 8 KSV FIFO Ready PASS 9 Depth Count Check PASS 10 KSV list Integrity PASS Repeater will appear above the wavy line in PASS under 5 when the receiver is a repeater Receiver will appear when the receiver is a receiver Fig 4 10 10 What appears on the display during HDCP execution Only AIl SM amp AII Details of what is displayed are given below The numbers marked with a blue asterisk appear only when the receiver connected to the VG 859C is a repeater 1 The name of the port HDMI or DVI used to execute HDCP and the HDCP version Ver 1 1 or 1 0 are displayed here 2 When an error results for the EDID the nature of the error are displayed here This applies only when EDID Check has been selected for the version by HDCP set The Key Selection Vectors among the vectors for the HDCP keys are displayed here TxKSV signifies the key selection vector at the transmitter end and RxKSV signifies the key selection vector at the receiver end The Synchronization verification values calculated by initial authentication are displayed here is the value calculated for the transmitter end and RxRO is the value calculated for the receiver end The authentication status of the initial authentication is displayed here If PASS is displayed for an item it The authentication status of the second initial authentication in the 2 the 2
247. l 0 3V This level is 0 6V however when tri level sync signals are output e The sync signals from the HS connector are output at a TTL level 2V Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting the video output setup and sync signal levels Video 0 70V Set up 0 00V Sync 0 30V Fig 5 4 3 Setting the video output setup and sync signal levels Table 5 4 4 Video output setup and sync signal level setting method Video output level Number This is the video signal level Video keys Setting range 0 30 to 1 20 V in 0 01V increments Setup level Number X XXV This is the setup level Set up keys Setting range 0 00 to 0 25 V in 0 01V increments Sync signal level Number X XXV This is the sync G on Sync signal level Sync keys Setting range 0 00 to 0 60 V in 0 01V increments Set the levels within the ranges of Video gt Setup Video gt Sync and Video gt Setup Sync 4 Setting RGB YPbPr This setting selects RGB or YPbPr color difference as the signals to be output RGB YPbPr YPbPr 0 1 Fig 5 4 4 Selecting RGB or YPbPr
248. lack to white pattern 1 10 steps amp 1 10 MHz ITC pattern pattem H character character 8 color bars amp 16 gray xvYCC pattern 2 Gamma conection 32 gradation gray scale scale ramp wr 2 5 H Gray scale amp OG xvYCC pattern 3 camma correction crosshatch ramp r 2 0 Color bar amp crosshatch bar amp crosshatch Crosstalk width 90 Gamma corechon 64 gray amp RGBW color ramp r 0 5 bar superimposed Color temperature DDC pattern Em 3 SMPTE color bars Gray scale amp circle 64 gray scale H NTSC color bars Ez SMPTE PR27 1 AFD pakem 2 4 Refer to 11 1 2 2 Concerning the DDC patterns No OE 22 23 2E 2 Refer to 11 1 2 3 Concerning the AFD pattern No 1F Chapter 11 REFERENCE E i patterns 20H to 3FH page 2 of 2 Pattern Pattern Pattern pe Corner amp center point Center corner window amp Timing chart Ramp scroll Crosstalk width Crosstalk with 60 Crosshatch amp marker gray scai E Ramp scroll V 256 color block color DDC DDC patem DVI DVI Color letters 3 window Ramp scroll Ramp scroll diagonal 8 E DDC pattem D Sub 1 Linear gradation ramp DDC pattern D Sub DDC pattem D Sub 1 1 H direction Lipsync pattern X ANSI patt
249. lay time is set The setting range is 0 to 999 seconds No program numbers are displayed When 0 has been specified as the group number Delay time Setting range of 0 to 999 seconds Program No e Input this in digits example 001 mmn e The programs are output in sequence from No XXX to No YYY XXX YYY e Three sets lt 1 gt 2 and lt 3 gt can be registered and they are executed in the sequence of 1 2 3 e When 000 has been set for XXX or YYY the set with this setting is not executed 4 To save the settings press the SAVE key Skip this step if the settings are not going to be saved While the settings are being saved the LED of the SAVE key lights and when the saving process has been completed the LED goes off 5 Press the SET key The auto display mode operations are executed To abort the output press the ESC key The output is aborted and operation returns to the setting screen e f the power is turned on while the SET key is held down auto display mode operations can be executed Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Program data is edited using the program edit FUNC2 This function is used to make temporary changes to program data and output the resulting signals the changed data is not saved In contrast PC card edit FUNC3 is used to edit and register the program data It is used to edit program data
250. layout 1 Set the mode and direction Mode 0 1 Direction Hor 0 1 Fig 6 9 1 Setting the mode and direction Table 6 9 1 Mode and direction setting method LCD Description display Mode ome mode The intervals are designated as a percentage Setting item Mode Dot mode The intervals are designated as a number of dots Direction The pattern is repeated in the designated direction according to Direction the settings for the number of repetitions intervals and level layout The pattern is repeated in the horizontal direction and when it arrives at a corner it continues on the next line which has been divided by the V interval The pattern is repeated in the vertical direction and when it arrives at a corner it continues on the next column which has been divided by the H interval 2 Set the number of repetitions and the H and V intervals Repeat 16 1 16 Interval H 6 3 V 6 3 Fig 6 9 2 Setting the number of repetitions and intervals Table 6 9 2 Number of repetitions and interval setting method Number of Number XX The number of levels is set repetitions keys Setting range 1 to 16 Repeat Intervals Number In the mode Interval keys XXX X Setting range 0 0 to 100 0 H V In the dot mode XXXX Setting range 1 to 9999 dot Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Set the level layout LO LF of the gray scale LO 0 1 17 2 34 3 51 8 136 9 153
251. ldren Direced to older chileren Suitable for children aged 7 and above General Audience Suitable for audiences of all ages must not contain violent scenes objectionable language or sexual content Parental Guidance Suggested Contains scenes involving some violence and sexual content unsuitable for young children or situations that may induce foul language or incite delinquency Parents Strongly Cautioned Contains scenes involving violence and sexual content unsuitable for children aged 14 or below or situations that may induce foul language or incite delinquency Mature Audience Only For adults only although such programs are hardly ever broadcast Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 3 Setting the U S TV rating system extension bits ON or OFF can be selected for each of the extension bits FV V S L and The bits which can be set differ depending on the U S TV ratings setting The cursor on the LCD display moves only to the bits which can be set The cursor appears at for those bits which cannot be set VChipUSTVExtension 0 1 FV V S L D Non Fig 5 9 7 Setting the U S TV rating extension bits Table 5 9 13 U S TV rating extension bit setting method Extension bits 2B ie o The specified bit is set to OFF VChipUSTVExtension The specified bit is set to ON FV V S L D Names and descriptions of U S TV rating extension bits FV Fan
252. le 5 12 7 Packet seq setting method Packet Seq o lc ____ Intermediate Specify the packet concerned in the packet sequence Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 7 Setting the format flag FormatFlag Range 0 1 Fig 5 12 7 Setting the format flag Table 5 12 8 Format flag setting method Setting item LCD Description display Format Flag Vertices Facets Facets Set the format flag The following settings become valid or invalid depending on the format flag setting Table 5 12 9 depending the format flag setting Setting item Format Format flagsetting Facets ColorPrecision ColorPrecision ME ae MEI GBD ColorSpace Vertices 0 Number Vertices xx Packeted Vertices Data 0 Golopace Range 0 _ Packeted Range Data 8 Setting the GBD ColorPrecision GBD ColorPrecision Bbit 0 2 Fig 5 12 8 Setting the GBD ColorPrecision Table 5 12 10 GBD ColorPrecision setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display GBD ColorPrecision Set the GBD ColorPrecision by the bit width of the Vertex and Range 1Obit data 12bit 12bit 9 Setting GBD ColorSpace Vertices This setting takes effect only when the format flag is set to O Vertices Facets GBD ColorSpace Vertices XvYCCT709 0 3 Fig 5 12 9 Setting the GBD ColorSpace Vertices Table 5 12 11 GB
253. le 5 8 10 ISRC1 Packet ISRC Continued and ISRC Valid setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description ISRC Continued The ISRC2 Packet does not exist ISRC1 Cont The ISRC2 Packet exists ISRC Valid DE The ISRC2 Packet is invalid 1 The ISRC2 Packet is valid P L Since the ISRC Continued setting will be reflected only in the data value inside the ISRC1 Packet if OFF has been set for 22 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection of config edit FUNC5 with HDMI 1 1 the ISRC2 Packet will be sent regardless of the setting 10 Setting the ISRC status of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Status Starting 0 2 Fig 5 8 10 Setting the ISRC status of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 11 ISRC1 Packet ISRC status setting method ISRC Status o This indicates the starting position of the track This indicates the intermediate position of the track This indicates the ending position of the track Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 11 Setting the validity information of the ISRC1 Packet ISRC1 Validity info No Validity 0 3 Fig 5 8 11 Setting the validity information of the ISRC1 Packet Table 5 8 12 ISRC1 Packet validity information setting method
254. lli006600 _ Closed Caption Mode 4 AaO RXn Closed Caption Mode 4 Roll up RU3 Closed Caption Mode 4 Paint On ABCDEFGHIJKLM nopqrstuvwXyz TXT1 to 4 2 2 Setting Row color optional setting etc CaptionDefMode DefStyle TXT 1 Background Black Text White TXT2 Background Black Text White TXT3 Background Black Text White TXT4 Background Black Text White Characters Text Mode 1 Astrodesign ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 012345678901234567890 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz HS amp QIY e ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 012345678901234567890 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Text Mode 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 012345678901234567890 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzU Text Mode 3 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 012345678901234567890 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Text Mode 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 012345678901234567890 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 5 Extended Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Treating extended character When an extended character is transmitted as it is a back space is automatically inserted and the character just before the insertion position is deleted In order to resolve this phenomenon VG 859C provides the following two modes for transmitting extended characters Refer to
255. low can be used in place of the corresponding VG 859C RB 1848 keys Table 10 1 1 Table of RB 1848 RB 614C and RB 649 key correspondences RB 1848 RB 614C RB 649 CHARA to OPT2 CHARA to OPT2 CHARA to OPT2 CURSOR H T 4 H T FORMAT meer qm p o yo o _ ve EE C gt 1 CHARA CROSS DOTS CIRCLE x COLOR GRAY BURST WINDOW OPT1 OIPT2 2 MUTE SAVE LEVEL 4 gt 3 The function of the GROUP key on the RB 649 corresponds to the ESC key used to change the group numbers with direct display FUNCO on the RB 1848 Refer 4 1 3 Changing the group numbers 4 Either the GROUP key function or CURSOR key function can be selected for the H T key on the RB 614C The selection is set using 25 Setting the RB 614C H T key of config edit 5 The MODE key on the RB 649 works as follows in the direct display mode e Lighted red green All the program data is executed e Lighted red Only the timing data is executed e Lighted green Only the pattern data is executed This chapter contains information on the following subjects Details of internal data Program data 255 PGI Ne 256 PEN NNN p 261 FNS INN p 266 Optional pattern data CORIO EE 272 User character pattern data Codes FAN p 277
256. m m ed ou S Aouanbey ouanbai Aouanbey 1009 4 uy Aeldsip ON 2000100 e dsip fi 28140 ejdsip 29140 01 088 000 56 909 9 66 Old 89 00 000 SZ 6900 9 99 866 vit dsiq OWI 0510 OWI GZ YCOLVSSA 89M OL 89ZVSSA 89M 9O IVNV 9O IVNV N ejep 4 iion IR Jeg 99 90 IVNV N N 66 eS ex sow omme ee osw mw os ex comm fa oone oe va merean eo oom fa eror oe oe esp wened 22190 O9vreivs3A 06 70 00009 186 meen wu oomi a were ww 109 64 1 uorsien 20100 14 5 92140 Zd JdddA NIN gusxoz 00002 00008 6 6 re gino meme ed wm oem astm ae Twa ono mom us 109 1 20109 3146 92140 1d 6
257. mber has been selected are output automatically in this mode in accordance with the specified delay time Self check mode Chapter 7 Whether the hardware devices are functioning correctly etc is checked in this mode 1 6 Panel parts and their functions The key functions may differ from function to function and from one mode to another For details refer to the operation instructions provided in the chapters concerned 1 6 1 VG 859C front panel ASTRO DIGITAL VIDEO GENERATOR VG 859B When inserting or ejecting a PC card follow the steps in How to insert and eject the PC card in 2 5 If the wrong steps are taken the data on the PC card may be destroyed and the PC card may no longer be recognized even when it is re inserted PC card slot Insert the PC card here To eject it press the EJECT button on the right of the slot Always handle the PC cards very carefully EJECT button Use this to eject the PC card 3 LOCK button Press this for 5 seconds to release the lock before ejecting the PC card While the lock is engaged the LED is lighted when it is released the LED goes off 4 LCD The menu settings program numbers timing data etc appear here Two lines each containing 24 characters are displayed 5 4 key This increments the program numbers by 1 1 It is also used to display the previous page on the LCD INC appears on the panel for this key but it is referred to as which appe
258. me program number is set for the timing data and pattern data Table 4 5 2 Selection method Key LED PROG key lights The same program number is set for the timing data and pattern data for all the group data in the selected group TIMING TIMING PAT key The timing data and pattern data are set separately 4 Save the edited data 1 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save Group No 1 XXXXXXX Fig 4 5 5 Saving the data 2 Use the number keys to input the number of the group 1 to 99 in which the data is to be saved 3 Input the group name with up to 20 characters Either input the character codes 20 to DF directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display 4 Press the SAVE key The group data is saved and the LED of the SAVE key goes off e The data be saved at any time during editing e f the ESC key is pressed operation returns to the previous screen without the data having been User character patterns are edited while they on the display Before proceeding with the editing connect the display device to the VG 859B and check that the patterns are displayed properly The VG 859B s internal user character patterns FOH to can be read out but not registered 1 Press the FUNC key 8 key and SET key Select Function
259. ming Edit 0 0 6 Pattern Edit 0 0 H Timing Data Edit Pattern Select Fig 4 3 3 Setting the timing data Fig 4 3 4 Setting the pattern data To return from a setting screen When the ESC key is pressed the display screen shown in Fig 4 3 2 of step 2 is restored To check the changed data When the SET key is pressed on the timing data setting or pattern data setting screen the signals of the changed data are output Do not change the dot clock frequency horizontal sync frequency or vertical sync frequency for NTSC program No 968 PAL program No 969 or SECAM program No 964 contained inside the VG 859C since doing so will make it no longer possible to output the signals through the VBS and Y C connectors 4 Save the edited data PC card edit FUNC3 is the only function that can be used to save the data 1 Return to the display screen shown in Fig 4 3 2 of step 2 2 Set Enable for program data Enable Disable 1 Enable 0 Disable Use the Disable setting to prohibit the use of specific program data on the PC card Normally the _ Enable mode is selected Programs for which Disable has been set will no longer be subject to the program selection in response to the 2 and key or to auto display i execution 3 Input the program name using not more than 20 characters Either input the character codes 20 to DF directly or select the characters fr
260. ming switching but under Ver 1 1 resetting is not initiated Therefore perform one of the following actions if a sandstorm appears e Use the repeat authentication function by pressing the SHIFT key and ESC key e Disconnect and re connect the cables e Turn off the power supply at the receiver end e Set the execution mode of HDCP set FUNCC to Disable to stop the execution and then set to Enable and Program to resume The errors which may occur during HDCP execution are listed below 151H A repeater is connected 152H A timeout 1ms occurred in the Ri read instruction of the receiver 153H The KSV of the transmitter does not contain twenty 0 and 1 E 154H The KSV of the receiver does not contain twenty 0 and 1 155H The TxRO value on the transmitter end VG 859C and the RxRO value the receiver end do not match during the initial authentication The H front porch is 0 The H back porch 1 0 The H blanking interval is less than 128 The V front porch is 0 164H HDCP Rx Not The receiver was not set itself to the HDMI mode when the HDCP version is HDMIMODE 1 1 or when version 1 1 was judged to be supported in the EDID check mode 165H HDCP Ri NG The values of Ri and Ri do not match 166H HDCP FIFOReady Error FIFO Ready is not established within the restricted time 167H HDCP Depth Error The value for DEPTH is 8 or more 168H HDCP Cou
261. mode 010 1023 BO to 15 In the 12 bit mode 0 to 4095 6 12 Setting the optional patterns Optional patterns cannot be combined with any other patterns The optional pattern No is set for the optional pattern data The same method is used to set option patterns 1 1 2 2 Set the number of the optional pattern to be displayed Optional pattern 1 Optional pattern 2 OPT1 NO 0 00 BF OPT2 NO 25 00 BF Fig 6 12 1 Setting the optional pattern number Table 6 12 1 Optional pattern No setting method Setting item Key LCD Setting range display Option pattern OPT1 NO Number XX 00 to BF 2 keys 1 Optional patterns OOH to 3FH Internal optional pattern Optional patterns 40H to 7FH User created optional patterns Optional patterns 80H to BFH Image data 1 to 64 registered by user For details on the internal optional patterns OOH to refer to the 9 1 2 Optional pattern data list p 219 For user created optional patterns No 40H to the source codes are created using language like syntax and compiled and registered using the Windows software SP 8848 supplied For image data No 1 to 64 SP 8848 is used to register the image data created by any tool into optional pattern No 80H to BFH For further details refer to the operating instructions of the SP 8848 or Help _ The internal optional patterns to c
262. mode which is output by the VG 859C and the HDCP version of the sink device do not match When AUTO is established as the HDMI output mode the statuses of the sink device HDMI DVI mode HDCP version are read and it is output in the mode concerned This means that Bcaps error will result if both settings of the sink device do not match When EDID Check is established as the HDCP version setting the HDCP version of the sink device is read and it is output in the mode concerned This means that Bcaps error will result if the HDMI output mode which has been set in the VG 859C and the HDCP version of the sink device do not match Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Depending on the combination of the VG 859C setting and sink device status the error as shown below will be displayed Setting HDCP Setting Error Bcaps HDCP Bcaps Error Table 4 10 6 error displays 1 Sink device status VG 859C setting Remarks HDCP Bcaps EDID setting HDCP version HDMI mode Ver 1 0 DVI HDMI1 0 HDMIT 1 DVI HDCP1 0 gt C Ver 1 1 DV HDMI1 0 HDMIT 1 2 DVI 1 0 EDID DVI Check HDMI1 0 HDMI 1 1 DVI HDCP1 0 HDMI Ver 1 0 DVI HDMI1 0 Setting HDMI1 1 Setting HDMI HDCP1 0 lt D e gt Ver 1 1 HDMIT 1 HDMI HDCP1 0 lt EDID Check HDMI HDCP1 0 gt gt
263. movements the LCD 10 2 4 How to input characters from the display 11 2 5 How to insert and eject the PC 12 2 5 1 How to insert the PC Ave 12 2 5 2 How to eject the PC 12 Chapter3 VG 859C system nne 13 3 1 Concerning the system settings config edit 5 13 32 NNN 15 3 2 1 Accessing the item setting 15 3 2 2 Temporarily reflecting the data 15 3923 Saving Ine Cala changes 2 eee __________ 15 3 3 Detailed settings for the 16 1 Setting the group 16 2 Setting the 0220000 0 0000 0000 16 3 Setting the pattern display mode 1 17 4 Setting the NAME display mode 17 5 Setting the terminal 18 6 Setting the data 200020000 0 00 19 7 Setting the baud rate and data 0 4 19 8 Setting the parity and stop 20 9
264. n i d se ww usu 09 2 650002080 000088 orses 04 0900 0821 d d ozzxosgzi 00009 000 0 Bolg AxH ZHN zH 2 X ed ou S Aouanbedy ouanbai Aouanbey 1009 e dsip Jo oN e1UOZUOH 09 5 906 9 06 08 REFERENCE um ie 2 970 999 666 026 ON d MOPUIM 001 MOPUIM 9000 0d dWS6ZALAWS 0901 11 080066 00587 MODUIM 9606 MOPUIM 06 od INS6ZALAWS 0621 11 au 08010561 052 00006 09216 9608 MOPUIM 9 09 890001 lt 0261 53 d N 002026 092192 25679 78 0 MODUIM 9609 MOPUIM 09 0990001 lt 0261 53 SOTYNY d N 0021026 09761 69865 96941 MOPUIM 09 MODUIM 9606 0900210561 VS3 Bod 002 026 00055 00666 A MOUIM 0 MOPUIM 0 80501007 59 Bod OSOLXOOPL 00964 09679 996 866 266 go MOPUIM 06 MOPUIM 06 100801 00 1 9 994 90 IVNV Bold 05010091 000 99 198 v4 816 MOPUIM 02 00 09 0 0 994 90 IVNV d N
265. n the same way from the VG 859C and the data is output as shown in Fig 3 3 25 1 Tri level sync signal Tri level sync signal Fig 3 3 23 Sync signals of VG 859C normal mode Fig 3 3 24 Sync signals of existing VG generator Tri level Y output YPbPr ON Normal mode Shift mode Fig 3 3 25 Comparison between normal mode and shift mode e Even in the shift mode the setting established in the normal mode remains unchanged for Hbackp e If Hbackp has been read from the timing data of an existing VG generator in the shift mode it will be Hbackp 1 which was set by the existing generator 25 Setting the RB 614C H T key function Select the function of the H T key on the RB 614C remote control box Cfg RB614C H T KEY GROUP 0 1 Fig 3 3 30 Selecting the RB 614C H T key function Table 3 3 28 RB 614C H T key function selection method GROUP The H T key on the RB 614C is set to function as the group key Factory setting CURSOR The H T key on the RB 614C is set to function as the cursor key 26 Setting the drawing dots for 1 pixel drawing Select the drawing dots for 1 pixel drawing in the TV timing NTSC PAL or SECAM mode Cfg TV Timing Dot Mode 240 0 1 Fig 3 3 31 Selecting the drawing dots Table 3 3 29 Drawing dot selection method One pixel is drawn with two dots Factory setting One pixel is drawn with one dot It is when a crosshatch dot circle center marker edge marker
266. nAme VChipMPAA Parental Guidance is set as the MPAA rating a pois Pans setas te MPAT aG 7190 No 17 and Under Admitted is set as the MPAA rating _____ Not Submited for MPAA Review isset _ N A not applicable is set Names and descriptions of the MPAA ratings G General Audience Adult Movie For general audiences For adults only PG Parental Guidance Not Rated Not Submitted For MPAA Review Contains scenes unsuitable for children No restrictions PG 13 Parents Strongly Cautioned N A No restrictions not supported under these Contains scenes unsuitable for children ratings aged 13 and under R Restricted Permission of a parent or guardian required for children up to 17 years of age NC 17 No One 17 and Under Admitted Cannot be viewed by anyone aged 17 years and under Table 5 9 12 U S TV ratings setting method U S TV rating All Children is set as the U S TV rating VChipUSTV Directed to Older Children is set as the U S TV rating General Audience is set as the U S TV rating Parental Guidance Suggested is set as the U S TV rating OG TV 14 Parents Strongly Cautioned is set as the U S TV rating Mature Audience Only is set as the U S TV rating Names and descriptions of U S TV ratings TV Y TV Y7 TV G TV PG TV 14 TV MA All children Suitable for all chi
267. nal mode Factory setting Display A flashing T appears at the top right of the LCD screen in the terminal mode 18 Setting the internal program table Select the program table of the internal data Cfg InternalProgramTable PG1 Table 1 3 Fig 3 3 18 Selecting the internal program table Table 3 3 17 Internal program table selection method 1 PG1 Table Table PG1 which is compatible with existing generators is selected Factory setting 2 PG2 Table Table PG2 which was created Tables consisting of standard based on the EIA CEA 861 B timing data for systems such as standard is selected EIA VESA and NTSC and PAL hich rt log TV set 3 PG3 Table Table which was created O7 SUpport 00 SES based on the EIA CEA 861 C standard is selected Table PG3 contains timing data added at the release of EIA CEA 861 C an upgrade from Table PG2 EIA CEA 861 B Note that Table PG3 completely supports EIA CEA 861 D because no additional timing data has been added at the release of EIA CEA 861 D Chapter 3 859 SYSTEM SETTINGS 19 Setting the VBS output filter Select the VBS and Y C output filter Change the filter level to suit the pattern displayed This setting represents the gain for a frequency of 3 6 MHz Cfg VBS Filter Level 0 0 5 Fig 3 3 19 Selecting the VBS output filter level Table 3 3 18 VBS output filter level selection method Key LCD display Description
268. nation and press the SET key The first session data is written on the copy destination Card Copy 1 2 Set Dist amp Push SET Replace card Fig 4 4 19 Setting up the copy destination PC ps source P destination card Again insert the PC card serving as the copy source and press the SET key The second session data is read from the copy Ld E source x Card Copy 2 2 Set Source amp Push SET Fig 4 4 20 Setting up the copy source PC card Insert the PC card serving as the copy destination and press the SET key The second session data is written on the copy destination Card Copy 2 2 Set Dist amp Push SET Fig 4 4 21 Setting up the copy destination PC card To copy all the data of other PC cards repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Erasing programs in 1 program increments 1 Prog Data Erase 1 Insert the PC card input the number of the program to be erased and press the SET key 1 Prog Data Erase Push SET Prog 1 Fig 4 4 22 Setting up the PC card After the program has been erased the Prg NoXXX Erase Complete message appears on the LCD screen and then the original display is restored 2 erase other programs repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Initializing the PC cards Card Initialize 1 Insert the PC card and press the
269. nch rating systems 168 5 Setting the 8 169 9 10 Seng TELET ac 170 Oe Oval TOAN 170 5 10 2 Detail orten teh ub 172 1 Setting the output ON OFF and data transfer 172 SENG NE PAGES saa 172 5 10 3 PEPE BEG 173 5 11 Setting Macrovision optional FUNCION Jessen iida 175 MON 175 5112 SS eturgs delalls 177 Al lt 177 Contents 5 12 Setting Gamut Meta Data 178 1 Setting the gamut meta data packet 179 2 Setting the next field no current GBD 179 SI Seung 179 4 Setting the affected seq 180 5 Setting the current seq 180 61 Seting the packel SER Se SS 180 al ec eee 181 8 Setting the GBD 182 9 Setting the GBD ColorSpace
270. nd ACP ISRC Packet setting items Automatic HDMI audio For setting the automatic HDMI audio output output Tri level sync signal mode For selecting the tri level sync signal mode RB 614C H T key For selecting the H T key function of the RB 614C 26 dots for 1 pixel For setting the drawing dots for 1 pixel drawing in the TV timing p 34 drawing mode InfoFrame type For selecting the InfoFrame packet type HDMI Ver 1 1 CEC logical address For setting the logical address for HDMI CEC For setting the overlay display of the cursor to ON or OFF Mute key For selecting the MUTE key function Scroll trigger For setting the scroll trigger function to ON or OFF 32 Closed caption extended For selecting the extended character mode in closed caption p 38 character mode HDMI output bit mode For selecting the HDMI output bit mode multi bit mode 1 Optional function Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 Setting procedures Accessing the item setting menus 1 Press the FUNC key 5 key and SET key Select Function 5 0 Config Edit Fig 3 2 1 Selecting the function 2 Use key and Y key to switch the menu and access the menu for setting the item to be changed Use the and 4 keys to move between items on the same setting menu The setting item menu selected is displayed Fig 3 2 2 Selecting the setting items Temporarily
271. nd the group display mode are supported here If when performing the 1 Group no setting of the config edit group 0 is set the direct display mode is established if any group No from 1 to 99 is set the group display mode is established 411 Direct output direct display mode p 40 This section describes the direct display mode 4 1 2 Group data output group display mode p 41 This section describes the group display mode 4 1 3 Changing the group numbers p 42 This section describes how to make temporary changes to group numbers The settings cannot be saved Operation can be performed in the same way whether in the direct display mode or group display mode 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns 4 1 5 Cursor operations 4 1 6 Changing the window RGB levels 4 1 7 Switching the output video signals and sync signals 4 1 8 Switching audio output muting ON or OFF 4 1 9 Changing the video and audio output levels 4 1 10 Scrolling the output patterns 4 1 11 Changing the pattern data settings 4 1 12 Changing the timing data settings from p 42 These sections describe the items which can be operated or changed during signal output The changed data cannot be saved Operation can be performed in the same way whether in the direct display mode or group display mode 4 1 1 Direct output direct display mode Set the group No to 0 This setting is performed by config edit FUNCS5 or by making chang
272. necars 34 28 Setting the logical address for nnns 35 29 Setting the overlay 36 30 Setting the mute 6 6 36 31 Setting the scroll trigger 37 32 Setting the extended character for closed 38 33 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional 38 Chapter4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 39 4 1 Output of video signals direct display 0 39 4 1 1 Direct output direct display 40 4 1 2 Group data output group display 41 4 1 3 Changing group Numbers eaae nano ento x pex 42 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns 42 5 TN 43 4 1 6 Changing the window 46 4 1 7 Switching the output video signals and sync 46 4 1 8 Switching audio output muting ON or 47 4 1 9 Changing the video and audio output 47 4 1 10 Scrolling the output 48 4 1 11 Changing the pattern data 49 Contents 4 1 12 Changing the timing data 49
273. ned Used to clear all the dots inside the cell Used to switch between the shift mode and drawing mode e ON Shift mode e OFF Drawing mode dot setting dot clearing movement Used to invert the level of the dot inside the cell HS Used to return to the home position at the left or right of the cursor position alternating movement between far left and far right Used to return to the home position above or below the cursor position alternating movement between very top and very bottom Used to abort the editing and return to the previous LCD screen 4 Save the edited data 1 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save CHR EO EO EF Fig 4 6 5 Saving the data 2 Use the number keys to input the code EOH to EFH of the character pattern which is to be saved 3 Press the SAVE key The data is saved and the LED of the SAVE key goes off e The data can be saved at any time during editing e f the ESC key is pressed instead operation returns to the previous screen without the data having been saved 4 7 Listing data on the display list display FUNC9 e The list display function is used to display the lists on the display screen Before proceeding with the list display connect the display device to the VG 859B and check that the display appears properly e Group Name List OPT Name List IMG Name List and Group Data List cannot
274. nels 8 channels Packet Not re Audio Audio Super Audio CD ISRC Packet ISRC Packet Not supported Supported Supported Supported GamutMetaData Packet Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported 1 Closed caption V chip Option Supported as Supported as Supported as standard standard standard feature feature feature Teletext Table 12 4 2 Differences between models VG 859 series 2 LipSync function Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Internal Internal program tables PG1 2 PG1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Optional No 0A Circle amp line Circle amp line Circle amp line xvYCC pattern 1 patterns 0 Character edge Character edge Character edge xvYCC pattern H H H 2 0 Character edge Character edge Character edge xvYCC pattern 3 27 Song of Youth Song of Youth HDMI speaker HDMI speaker check check No 33 Crosshatch amp Crosshatch amp Crosshatch amp Lipsync pattern marker marker marker No 35 Checkerboard amp Checkerboard amp HDMI CEC HDMI CEC window window pattern pattern No 3E ANSI pattem ANSI pattem ANSI pattem ANSI pattern Hor Reso Hor Reso Hor Reso Hor Reso or full step amp 256 gradation gray scale H direction ramp ANSI pattem ANSI pattem ANSI pattem ANSI pattern Ver Reso Ver Reso Ver Reso Ver Reso or full step H
275. nfoFrame DATA HDMI 1 0 AVI Vi degfor mat B RM LM Use the 4 evel Mode can Info No Data i T pet hes not ra ee key to move in aX ct Format Info not Data al 0 0 C spec Picture Cr 0 5000 G 0 4542 8 0 0456 Picture Aspect No Data SOENS HDMI output RePetition Scaling unknown AudioSource OFF Colori metry Data Audi oSampl 48kHz Video Code Audio LPCM Channel 1ch 2ch Repetition 1 Internal AudioWidth 1681 Bar nternal Audi oLevel 00000 Bottom 00000 Bit L 000ccd R 000ccd Left 00000 Right 00000 dB L 19 999 19 999 Internal Audi oFreq SPD Hz i 1 90100 R 0010 3 Ver 1 InfoFrame Internal Audi oSweep OFF Vendor Name VENDOR Product PRODUCT ACP DATA Source Device unknown ACP AUDI 0 up Generic Audio 4 Ver 1 D P DOR 0 Channel Count Refer Copy Permission 0 Coding Type Refer OE d Sample Size Refer Quality 0 Transaction 0 EET NERE anne 0c ACP ISRC Packet I SRCI Level Shift 0 Cont 0 Valid 0 Down mi x Permitted Status Validity info No Vali MPEG Catalogue code 0000000000000 5 Ver 1 Country code 00 Bit Rate 0 000 Frame unknown Year of rec code 00 Field Repeat New Recording code 00000 Fig 4 7 15 Example of what is shown on the display 3 To switch to another group number press the ESC key to return to
276. ng the HDMI output Table 3 3 26 HDMI audio output selection method Setting item Setting range Audio signals INTERNAL Audio sampling frequency 48kHz Audio output channel ON for channel 1 and channel 2 only OFF for all other channels Bit width 16bit Output level 19 99dB Output frequency 1000 2 1000Hz When a program No 1 to 849 which has been created is selected the audio output corresponding to the settings of that program will be established regardless of the settings listed in the above table Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 24 Setting the tri level sync signal mode Select the tri level sync signal mode Cfg Tri Sync mode NORMAL 0 1 Fig 3 3 26 Selecting the tri level sync signal mode Table 3 3 27 Tri level sync signal mode selection method lo NORMAL Normal mode Normal output factory setting SHIFT Shift mode Output compatible with existing VG generators What is the tri level sync signal mode Fig 3 3 23 shows the relationship between the tri level sync signals and horizontal sync signals HS for the VG 859C when 1080i system or other tri level sync signals refer to 1 Setting the sync signal output mode in 5 4 Output condition settings are output Normal mode For an existing VG generator VG 828 or VG 828 D this relationship is shown in Fig 3 3 24 When the shift mode is established the timing data from the existing VG generator can be output i
277. nt Error The value for COUNT 1 128 or more 1 HDCP List Error The values of V and V do not match 16aH HDCP Bcaps Error The HDMI output HDCP version based on this output and HDCP version do Or not match Refer to the next section for details HDCP Setting Error 1 This is a kind of white noise resembling what appears on the TV screen after broadcasting has ended 2 If the connector is re connected after a hot plug error has occurred the HDCP authentication and encryption will be resumed 8 A failure may have occurred on the VG 859C Contact the manufacturer E16Ah Concerning HDCP Bcaps error and HDCP Setting error With the HDMI output the HDCP versions are normally as follows 1 HDCP version 1 0 when DVI is established as the HDMI output mode 2 HDCP version 1 1 when HDMI1 0 1 1 is established as the HDMI output mode A Bcaps error is judged to have occurred when the HDMI setting and HDCP version setting which are output from the VG 859C and the corresponding settings of the sink device do not match There are two types of Bcaps error status each of which is described in the table below Table 4 10 5 Bcaps Error types Error name Description HDCP Setting Error This error occurs when the VG 859C setting that is to say the HDMI output mode DVI or HDMI version and the version setting for the HDCP setting FUNCC do not match HDCP Bcaps Error This error occurs when the HDMI output
278. number Internal program table PG1 850 VESA 400 85 Program name up to first 16 characters displayed 31 50MHz37 86KHz85 08Hz Dot clock frequency Horizontal sync Vertical sync frequency frequency Fig 4 1 3 Outputting the video signals The dot clock frequency horizontal sync frequency and vertical sync frequency are indicated on the LCD screen using the last two digits two decimal places How to switch to another program Proceed with the operation in step 2 When the following is used as a reference and the program number is specified after the applicable key has been pressed some of the program data timing data only or pattern data only can be switched before the outputting of the signals e To switch the program data timing data or pattern data PROG key e To switch only the timing data TIMING key e To switch only the pattern data PAT key Operations can be performed and changes made while the signals are being output Refer to 4 1 4 Switching the output patterns p 34 to 4 1 12 Changing the timing data settings p 49 or OO TZ L L I Lf LL LL lt Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 1 2 Group data output group display mode Any numbers from 1 to 99 can be set for the numbers of the groups which are to be output The numbers are set using config edit FUNC5 or by following the steps in 4 1 3 Changing the group numbers The group dat
279. of repetitions for frequency sweep 128 Contents 5 Setting the minimum and maximum frequencies for frequency 21 2 128 6 Setting the frequency step for frequency 129 55 setingdne HPM GUP aaret 130 1 Setting the HDMI output mode and video 131 2 Setting the video 0 132 3 Setting the color difference coefficients and 132 4 Setting the audio signals and sampling 133 5 Setting the audio output 133 6 Setting the internal audio bit 134 7 Setting the internal audio output level 134 8 Setting the internal audio output 135 9 Setting the internal audio output frequency 135 10 Setting the internal audio 136 ST mU D 137 1 Setting InfoFrame AVI SPD AUDIO MPEG 138 2 Setting the type and version of AVI InfoFrame 138 3 Setting the scan information and bar information of AVI 139 4 Setting the active format information and RGB or YCbCr of AVI InfoFrame 139 5 Setting the active aspect ratio and picture aspect
280. om the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display 4 Press the SAVE key The LED of the SAVE key blinks and the LCD screen is switched Save Program 1 XXXXXXX Fig 4 3 5 Saving the data 5 Check the program number and program name and press the SAVE key The program data is now saved on the PC card and the LED of the SAVE key goes off To edit other data After the data has been edited and saved press the PROG key input the program number and follow the same operating procedure Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 1 Press the FUNC key 4 key and SET key Select Function 4 0 Card Copy Fig 4 4 1 Selecting the function 2 While referring to Table 4 4 1 use the number keys to select the type of copy function and press the SET key Card Copy Sel 0 0 1 Prog Data Fig 4 4 2 Selecting the type of copy function Table 4 4 1 function types LCD display Description of copy function ME 1 Prog Data Copy For copying program data in 1 program increments p 54 LN 1 Prog Tim Data Copy For copying timing data in 1 program increments 1 Prog Pat Data Copy For copying pattern data 1 increments BLK Prog Data Copy For copying program data in increments of multiple 54 blocks CHR Data Copy For copying user character patterns in 1 character increments IMG Data Copy For cop
281. on Chapter9 CONCERNING THE xvYCC FEATURES This chapter provides details on the xvYCC features Chapter 10 REMOTE CONTROL The RB 614C and RB 649 remote control boxes are described in this chapter Chapter11 REFERENCE This chapter provides details on the internal data the error messages and other reference information Chapter 12 Specifications and checkpoints VG 859C s specifications and checkpoints are contained in this chapter Appendix This contains a list of functions and the operating menus for the main functions What is packed with the generator The generator comes with the following items Be absolutely sure to use only the genuine accessories which are supplied for this generator since the use of any non designated items may cause malfunctioning Standard accessories e VG 859C main unit e VG 859C RB 1848 instruction manual what you are now reading 1 copy e CompactFlash CF card 1 pc e PC card adapter for CompactFlash cards 1 pc e PC card case 1 pc e SP 8848 software installation CD for Windows 1 pc e SP 8848 instruction manual PDF version packed with the SP 8848 software installation CD e Power cable 1 pc 1 e FG cable 1 5 meters long 1 pc 1 1 These cables are designed to be used exclusively with the VG 859C Optional accessories e RB 1848 Remote control box used with the VG series e RB 614C Remote control box used with the VG series When this box is connected
282. onnection environment again including the terminator and cables To forcibly terminate automatic calibration Press and hold down any key When automatic calibration is forcibly terminated the following display appears and the previously calibrated table is reflected AutoCalibration ON 0 1 CAL Compulsory Stop Fig 4 11 11 When automatic calibration is forcibly terminated Do not turn off the power while automatic calibration is being executed Turning the power off by mistake may cause malfunctioning 5 Fine adjustment of video levels Finely adjust the levels as instructed in 13 video level fine adjustments of config edit 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 Configuration of timing data and basic operations The timing data consists of the horizontal timing data vertical timing data output conditions audio output HDMI output InfoFrame ACP ISRC packets closed caption V chip Teletext and Macrovision optional function 5 1 1 Basic operations for settings The timing data setting menu is accessed from program edit FUNC2 PC card edit FUNC3 or direct display While referring to Table 5 1 1 below select the timing data whose settings are to be changed and set the data details For the data setting items and setting procedures refer to page concerned in the reference page column in the table 1 When using the program edit FUNC2 or PC 2 When using the direct dis
283. or diagonal line pattern is drawn that this setting is reflected 27 Setting the InfoFrame type Select the type of InfoFrame packet to be sent when HDMI Ver 1 1 is used Cfg InfoFrame SPD MPEG Select SPD 0 1 Fig 3 3 32 Selecting the InfoFrame packet type Table 3 3 30 InfoFrame packet type selection method The SPD InfoFrame is sent Factory setting MPEG The MPEG InfoFrame is sent Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS 28 Setting the logical address for CEC Set the logical address for when an internal program No 850 to 999 has been selected When an internal program has been selected and an HDMI pattern option No 35 is displayed the function works as monitor mode The logical address established at this time will function as the address specified by this setting For details on the function refer to 6 16 function Cfg Prg 850 999 OPT 35 Logical Address Oh 0 Fig 3 3 33 Setting the logical address Table 3 3 31 Logical address setting method These specify the logical addresses for CEC in internal programs Factory setting 1 When program No 1 to 849 which has been created is selected the CEC function corresponding to the settings of that program will be executed regardless of this setting 29 Setting the overlay cursor Set the overlay display when a cursor pattern is displayed to ON or OFF Cfg Overlay
284. or such equipment The HDMI output supports HDMI1 3 and Deep Color as well By supporting the multi bit mode which is an optional function it is capable of displaying many different patterns with up to 36 bits The timing data pattern data and other outputs can be easily set using the SP 8848 or the controls on the RB 1848 It is also possible for users to create their own special patterns and register natural images The generator also supports TV oriented functions such as closed caption V chip Teletext and Macrovision Macrovision is an optional function Contact Astro if it is to be supported Features All in one model In spite of its compact body this generator can deliver a wide range of output signals including analog outputs and DVI outputs as well as NTSC PAL SECAM VBS connector D5 connector S connector and HDMI outputs There is no need for any adapters etc Wide dot clock frequency ranges The dot clock frequencies supported by the VG 859C are the 5 to 250 MHz range for analog outputs the 25 to 165 MHz range for DVI serial digital outputs and the 25 to 165 MHz range for HDMI outputs HDMI1 3 supported The HDMI output supports HDMI1 3 Full color outputs supported The generator supports full color displays consisting of 16 77 million colors By supporting the multi bit mode which is an optional function it is capable of providing displays using up to 36 bits up to 68 7 billion colors LAN suppor
285. ot conducted and so errors such as the hot plug error cannot be detected e Bear in mind that when HDCP is executed restrictions apply to the horizontal timing timing data settings Refer to 3 in 5 1 13 DVI and HDMI output timing restrictions e When the receiver connected to the VG 859C is a repeater authentication will not be undertaken and an error E166 HDCP FIFOReady Error will be displayed unless a value of at least 1 is used for DEPTH and COUNT e The HDCP function cannot be executed simultaneously with the pattern action audio sweep and a few other functions For details refer to 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously 4 10 3 1 Executing HDCP When a program is executed by direct display FUNCO HDCP is executed simultaneously When the execution mode Exec Mode of the HDCP FUNCG set to e Enable HDCP is executed with all programs e Program HDCP is executed with the programs for which HDCP enable has been set by PC card edit FUNC3 e Disable HDCP is not executed Benen enna nanan nanan ea ETE GED E HDCP is executed at the port set as the priority output port in the output conditions timing data of the program data concerned HDCP repeat authentication function By pressing the SHIFT key and ESC key during HDCP execution resetting is initiated and HDCP authentication can be repeated 4 10 3 2 LCD display during HDCP
286. ou y ui ou SH y episjno si y Ul dSPH eDueJ Bunes y 2849 Sue Bunes y si Bulu jejuozuou eui Ul 4840 YIPIMGH ueisaH me eDueJ Bunes 72940 Bunes y episino SI ejep jejuozuou dsipH dyoeqH OUASH Bunes y 2949 Bunes y si jejuozuou y Ul eDueJ Bunes ay 2949 y si jejuozuou y 0 IDIOG SEM 4 USYM 19 SI ujeJ60Jud y Jo Jequinu y 0 19 suunj SEM 4 y Jequinu 241 pajqesig Bold 294109 99 uesu ueeq JOU seu pJeo SUL y Q LO O eo WO Ieueg 11 3 Table of error messages Error codes 00H to 1DH 01 HOO sebessew 1013 HS 1013 y 10113 10419 NOLLOV 10 09 oIYdeJ6 y Ul 40443 10119 Y01099 REFERENCE
287. ovements The manufacturer will not be liable for any outcome which results from incorrect operation of this generator All inquiries concerning this product should be addressed to your dealer or to the manufacturer at the contact numbers or addresses given below The products and product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks and registered trademarks of the companies concerned 0115 AST For more information peare contact us Business Unit 2 TEL 81 0 3 5734 6302 FAX 81 0 3 5734 6104 1 5 2 Minami yukigaya Tokyo 145 068 Japan
288. period trigger ON signal is output when scrolling has returned to the start position e Example When the scroll trigger function is ON and scrolling is performed toward the left EGENIEGEN gg direction gm direction q Scrolling direction qn direction Trigger ON Trigger OFF Trigger ON Trigger OFF VS vertical sync signal ID signal line 1 trigger Output for the 1V period when return is made to start position e In the case of a multiple number of scroll ON planes graphic character and window trigger ON is not output if the scroll settings step and direction are different e In the case of a single scroll ON plane the trigger signal is output in accordance with the setting concerned e With horizontal left right or vertical up down scrolling trigger ON can be output for either direction but in the case of scrolling in both directions toward the top right for instance the trigger signal is output in accordance with the horizontal direction e The ID signal line 1 of the D5 connector is used for the trigger signal when the scroll trigger function is ON regardless of whether scrolling is ON or OFF Scroll trigger output cables are available at Astrodesign as well For details on the cable contact an Astrodesign sales representative connect to the D5 input connect to the D5 output Trigger output TV mese BNC connector VG 859C Fig 3 3 37 Connection diagram for
289. play card edit With the program data selected press the TIMING key Press the FORMAT key followed by the TIMING key Press the Press the ESC key to return FORMAT key to return Timing Edit 0 enter it with the SET H Input Mode dot 0 1 H Timing Data Edit Dot Clock 74 970MHz LCD display _ Move between the LCD display For the data selection procedure lt Q displays using the Table 5 1 1 Press the ESC key to 141 Y return key period 15 70uS 1177901 In the case of 2 the data selection menu is not accessed Each time en the TIMING key is pressed the data is switched 298 LCD display The settings are reflected the signals are output Fig 5 1 1 Basic operations for setting the timing data Table 5 1 1 Timing data selection method and reference pages Key LCD display Timing data Joe Audio Data Edit Audio output HDMI Data Edit HDMI output p 130 6 ACP Data Edit ACP ISRC Packet p 148 Caption Data Edit Closed caption V chip p 155 TeleText Edit FS PN Macrovision Edit Macrovision Optional function 2 h p 175 Meta Data Gamut Meta Data Packet Edit Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 5 1 2 Horizontal timing data configuration list Hblanking Hsync Hbackp i Hfrontp Hperiod HDstart HDwidt
290. ption of display Pixel units 0 0 STEP10 Horizontal H coordinate vertical V coordinate Normal 1 or Reverse 1 mode movement steps The top left of the display serves as the origin point 0 0 of the coordinates RGB units GATE 1 STEP10 Vertical gate coordinate movement steps Normal 2 or Reverse 2 mode R2 1G 2 B 3 R color G color B color horizontal coordinate The top left of the display serves as the origin point Gate 1 R21 G 2 B 3 of the coordinates Each time the 0 number key is pressed the display method is switched by one setting in the following sequence No display is the default method display gt Pixel units gt RGB units gt Pixel units gt RGB units default Normal Normal2 Reverse Reverse2 gt No display hereafter repeated 1 Reverse is the Normal display with its characters rotated 180 degrees so that its position is reversed at the top and bottom Switching the cursor blinking speed The blinking speed of the cursor is changed using the 1 number key Each time the 1 key is pressed the speed is changed by one setting in the following sequence No blinking is the default speed No blinking gt Blinking once 1V gt Blinking once 2V gt Blinking once in 4V gt Blinking once in 8V Blinking once in 16V Blinking once in 32V gt Blinking once 64V gt hereafter repeated Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND D
291. quids inside the generator or drop inflammable objects or metal parts into it Operating the generator under these conditions may cause a fire electric shocks and or malfunctioning CAUTION Concerning the generator When connecting the VG 859C to a display unit use the FG cable provided to connect the frame ground FG terminal on the VG 859C to the frame ground terminal on the display unit If these terminals not connected together some of the very costly parts such as the output digital to analog converter inside the VG 859C may fail Take special care when connecting the generator to a display unit which is under development Q RET AMALIG ADI N gt 3 OQ HN 959590 55555 555555 ene COR RORY 9 Connect one end of the cable to Connect the other end of the cable to the FG the FG terminal on the VG 859C terminal on the display unit using an alligator clip When disconnecting the VG 859C from the display unit first disconnect the connecting cables and then disconnect the FG cable When the generator s power is to be turned ON or OFF be absolutely sure to use the POWER switch on the front panel Turning the power on
292. r 3 The fine adjustment mode can be exited by pressing the LEVEL key again The LEVEL key LED now goes off 4 To reflect the results of the fine adjustment save the data The SET key cannot be used to make temporary changes 14 Finely adjusting the video level Finely adjust the RGB video output level Set the pattern to a white monotone at any timing data at which output is possible Example of pattern creation Set all the patterns to OFF and select the INV key Set the digital level to 255 After selecting the adjustment color and video output level which is to be finely adjusted establish the fine adjustment mode and proceed with the fine adjustments Cfg VideoLevelAdjustment R 700mv 300 1200 25step Adjustment color Video output level which is to be finely adjusted Fig 3 3 14 Video output level fine adjustment How to select the adjustment color Table 3 3 13 Adjustment color selection method Key LCD display Description The adjustment color is set to red The adjustment color is set to green The adjustment color is set to blue How to select the video output level which is to be finely adjusted The video output level to be finely adjusted can be selected in the range of 300mV to 1200mV and it can be set in 25mV increments Use the number keys to input the level directly Fractions which not divisible by 25 which is not an increment
293. r key supports analog outputs and DVI outputs only It does not support the video format of HDMI 4 The drawing pattern and setting timing restrictions differ depending on the video format setting and bit mode setting Refer to 33 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional function under config edit and Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE 2 _ Setting the video level LviMode FULL 0 2 LviUsr Min 255 Fig 5 6 2 Setting the video level Table 5 6 3 Video level setting method Setting item LCD Description display Level mode The mode is set to full range LvIMode LIMITED The mode is set to limited range 1 USER The mode is set to the value set by the user Level user setting Number XXXX LvlUsr keys Min Max This setting takes effect when User setting has been selected as the level mode The setting range differs depending on the Video format setting Video format Setting range RGB YCbCr 4 4 4 YCbCr 4 2 2 16 bit width 0 to 255 YCbCr 4 2 2 20 bit width to 1023 YCbCr 4 2 2 24 bit width 0 to 4095 For details on the limited range refer to High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1 1 3 _ Setting the color difference coefficients and repetition Fig 5 6 3 Setting the color difference coefficients and repetition Table 5 6 4 Color difference coefficient and repetition setting method Color d
294. r 12 Specifications and checkpoints 12 4 4 Concerning functions which cannot be executed simultaneously The HDCP pattern action 1 audio sweep closed caption V chip 2 Teletext and Macrovision functions as well as the scrolling operations using direct display cannot be executed simultaneously If ON has been set for a multiple number of these functions operation will be as described below 1 The pattern action function is used to set scrolling flicker and other operations using the pattern action data As such these operations differ from the scrolling operations initiated by the FORMAT key 1 key etc using direct display 2 closed caption V chip functions be executed simultaneously amp While the HDCP function is being executed the HDCP function has priority and no other functions can be executed lt Example gt While the HDCP function executed is being executed SHME Closed caption is set to ON HDCP executed Closed caption not executed If when a function other than HDCP is set to ON another function is already being executed that function will be shut down and the function just set will be executed later Excluding scrolling operations using direct display FUNCO lt Example gt While the audio sweep function executed is being executed Closed caption is to ON Audio sweep shut down Closed caption executed Sc
295. r box format is selected the output images appear as shown in the figure on the right 16 Output at LETTER BOX setting 11 Setting the DVI output mode and priority output port DVI Mode SINGLE 0 1 PrimaryPort ANALOG 0 2 Fig 5 4 11 Selecting the DVI output mode and priority output port Table 5 4 12 DVI output mode and priority output port selection method Setting item Key LCD Description display 0 DVI output mode SINGLE The signals are output in the Single Link mode DVI Mode DUAL The signals are output in the Dual Link mode Priority output ANALOG Analog output These keys specify the port to which priority to port output signals is given due to the restrictions PrimaryPort E VEROUEDHE placed on the analog DVI and HDMI outputs 2 HDMI HDMI output 1 The standard VG 859C model supports Single Link only Contact Astrodesign concerning Dual Link The following restrictions are imposed on the output by the priority output port setting Table 5 4 13 Restrictions imposed by priority output port DVI Analog 5 to 24 999 MHz Priority output port HDMI Analog 2 dot increments 100 001 to 200 MHz 200 001 to 300 MHz 25 to 100 MHz oC 2 dot increments 100 001 to 165 MHz 2 dot 2 dot increments increments 25 io 100 MFZ Refer to 4 Concerning the HDMI output in 2 Concerning the output connectors O
296. r correctly After reading through the manual keep it in a safe place for future reference SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A WARNING Concerning the generator Do not subject the generator to impact or throw it This may cause the generator to malfunction explode or generate abnormally high levels of heat possibly resulting fire Do not use the generator where there is a danger of ignition or explosions Do not place the generator inside a microwave oven or other heating kitchen appliance or inside a pressure vessel Doing so may heat up the generator to abnormally high levels cause smoking run the risk of the generator s catching fire and or damage the circuit components This generator contains some high voltage parts If you touch them you may receive an electric shock and burn yourself so do not attempt to disassemble repair or remodel the generator If there is a thunderstorm while the generator is being used outdoors immediately turn off its power disconnect the power cable from the main unit and move the generator to a safe place Concerning the power cord Always take hold of the molded part of the plug when disconnecting the power cord Do not use force to bend the power cord or bunch it up for use Doing so may cause fire Do not place heavy objects on top of the power cord Doing so may damage the cord causing fire or electrical shock Concerning foreign matter Do not spill li
297. r group display mode 1 When the POWER switch is set to ON while the SET key is The VG 859C starts up in the auto display held down 2 mode When the POWER switch is set to ON while the 4 key is The VG 859C starts up in the self check mode held down 2 1 When 0 has been selected as the group number setting of config edit FUNCS the direct display mode is 52 2 3 established when number from 1 to 99 has been selected the group display mode is established Hold the key down for about two seconds after the POWER switch has been set to ON Concerning the cursor movements on the LCD display Not only is the program data being output displayed on the LCD but the setting items are also displayed during data editing To set a data item move the cursor by operating the keys listed below and input the setting using the number keys Table 2 3 1 Cursor movements on the LCD display Key Resulting operation LEN Used to move the cursor to the next item I Used to move the cursor to the previous item 2 _ Used to display the previous page Used to display the next page Chapter 2 OPERATING PROCEDURES 2 4 How to input characters from the display There are two ways to input the characters for program names using PC card edit FUNC3 and group names using group data edit FUNC6 1 input the character codes 20 to DF directly or 2 select the characters from the display The proced
298. r the fourth block Use of this class of IP address enables up to 254 computers to be connected by a single network The IP addresses in class C are used to configure small scale LANs Chapter 3 859 SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 Setting the license key HE Hm HH HE EN GE EE EN EN EN LLL HE HEN EN EN KEN This setting is for the license key for the HDCP function etc It was set at the factory and should not be changed Cfg LICENSE KEY Fig 3 3 12 Setting the license key 1 3 Finely adjusting the VBS level Finely adjust the VBS output level Set the pattern to a white monotone at any timing data at which output is possible Example of pattern creation Set all the patterns to OFF and select the INV key Set the digital level to 255 Cfg VBSLevelAdjustment Fig 3 3 13 VBS output level fine adjustment How to adjust the VBS output level 1 The VBS output level fine adjustment mode is established by pressing the LEVEL key while the above display is shown The LEVEL key LED now lights 2 The output level can be increased using the 4 key and reduced using the key The adjustment range extends from approx 600mV to 1600mV Use an oscilloscope etc to check the level VG 859B 75 terminato
299. rSpace Range HE HE DEN HS NE Et ME El EE NE HE Et EE HE HE HE EN HEEN HEN GE HE NE GEN KEN This setting takes effect only when the format flag is set to 1 Range GBD ColorSpace Range xvVYCC709 0 3 Fig 5 12 12 Setting the GBD ColorSpace Range Table 5 12 14 GBD ColorSpace Range setting method GBD ColorSpace 0 Reserve Reeve Set the GBD ColorSpace xvYCC601 cordinates xvYCC709 RGB expression of xvYCC709 cordinates Reserve Reserve 3 Setting the packeted range data This setting takes effect only when the format m is set to 1 Range MinR 0 00000 MaxR 0 00000 00h 00h MinG 0 00000 MaxG 0 00000 00h 00h MinB 0 00000 MaxB 0 00000 00h 00h Fig 5 12 13 Setting the Packeted Range Data ES 5 12 15 Packeted range data setting method Setting item Packeted Range Data MinR MaxR MinG MaxG MinB MaxB Positive value Negative value Number X XXXX Value of keys each color Set the minimum maximum value of the color of the Packeted Range Data MinR Minimum value of the Red Data MaxR Maximum value of the Red Data MinG Minimum value of the Green Data MaxG Maximum value of the Green Data MinB Minimum value of the Blue Data MaxB Maximum value of the Blue Data The setting range varies depending on the bit wid
300. rase Set Source amp Push SET Fig 4 4 17 Inserting the PC card Erasing appears on the LCD and data erasure begins The original display is restored upon completion of erasure may take several minutes for the data to be erased 2 To erase all the data on other cards repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared all the data a All Copy _ When using this function The All Copy function divides the 64MB PC card supplied into two parts and loads the data into each part It takes about 10 minutes for the data to be copied If a PC capable of reading PC cards is available it is faster and safer to use it for copying When using the VG 859C to copy all the data use steps 1 to 5 below as a general guideline e Do not eject the PC card while data is being copied Doing so may damage the PC card e When replacing the PC card do not mistake the copy source card for the copy destination card or vice versa Doing so may destroy the data 1 2 3 4 5 Insert the card serving as the source and press the SET key The first session data is read from the copy source lt Graphical outline of All Copy function for gt Card All Copy 1 1 all the data a PC card Set Source amp Push SET Fig 4 4 18 Setting up the copy source PC card ry PV seine Copy destination EN owe Insert the PC card serving as the copy desti
301. ratio of AVI InfoFrame 140 6 Setting the scaling and colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame 140 7 Setting the video code and repetition of AVI 2 141 8 Setting the top and bottom bars of AVI 141 9 Setting the left and right bars of AVI 141 10 Setting the RGB quantization range and extended colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame 142 11 Setting the IT content of AVI 142 12 Setting type and version of SPD 143 13 Setting the vendor name of SPD 143 14 Setting the product of SPD InfoFrame 144 15 Setting the source device of SPD 144 16 Setting type and version of Audio 145 17 Setting the channel count and coding type of Audio 145 18 Setting the sample size and sample frequency of Audio InfoFrame 146 19 Setting the channel allocation and level shift value of Audio InfoFrame 146 20 Setting downmix inhibit of Audio 146 21 Setting type and version of MPEG 147 2
302. rations WINDOW Refer to 4 1 6 Changing the window RGB levels NAME Program name The program name dot clock frequency etc are displayed Refer to 6 14 Setting the program names 2 in 4 10 3 3 What appears on the display during HDCP execution Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 4 1 5 Cursor operations Displaying the cursor pattern The cursor pattern is displayed when the CURSOR key is pressed The LED of the CURSOR key lights and the cursor coordinates are displayed on the LCD screen Cursor coordinates H V PG1 1 H 442 V 512 74 97 263 69 260 03 2 Fig 4 1 8 Cursor pattern position Cursor pattern function keys The number keys are used for cursor pattern operations These keys and the operations they perform are shown below To change the movement step To change the To change the blinking speed pattern shape To change the screen display Fig 4 1 9 Operations performed by cursor keys and key positions Table 4 1 2 Cursor pattern function keys Function This changes the method used to display the coordinates and steps on the screen No display Normal 1 mode Normal 2 mode Reverse 1 mode Reverse 2 mode This changes the blinking speed No blinking once in 1V gt once in 64V This moves the pattern downward This changes the pattern shape and switches the normal mode to the sub pixel mode or vice versa
303. rd Switching between the various AFD patterns is possible using the gt and 4 keys For details refer to Concerning the AFD patterns for evaluating the aspect ratio in 5 4 Setting the output condition data 11 1 2 4 Concerning the HDMI speaker check No 27 eee eee eee eee eee eee Optional pattern 27 shows the status of the HDMI audio channels Switching between ON and OFF is possible for each channel What appears Display content on the display CH Audio output ON Channel 2 in the figure at left Speaker Check 2 CH Audio output OFF Channel 1 in the figure at left Audio output OFF DC Channel ON OFF control cannot be exercised Channel 3 to 8 in the figure at left DD pe lt Example of what appears on the display gt Switching the audio output between ON and OFF for each channel is accomplished by pressing the number key corresponding to the channel number Each time the key is pressed the output is switched between ON and OFF Audio output ON OFF control can be exercised only with those channels for which analog input or internal audio has been selected as the audio signals setting in 4 Setting the audio signals and sampling frequency of 5 6 Setting the HDMI
304. red to in this operation manual were created based on the following items at the time this manual was published Some specifications may have changed depending on revisions to specification manuals that have been referred to If so please contact a member of our sales division High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1 3a EIA CEA 861 D VESA Display Data Channel Command Interface Standard Version1 1 Differences between individual models in the VG 859 series This instruction manual has been drawn up on the basis of the VG 859C It supports all the models in the VG 859 series but some of its details may not be supported by older firmware versions The table blow shows the main differences between the models Table 12 4 1 Differences between models in VG 859 series 1 VG 859 VG 859A VG 859B VG 859C iios gt VBS Y C outputs Multi bit mode 10 12 bit Not supported Not supported Supported Option 1 patterns supported Output frequency with 25 to 81 2 25 to 165MHz 25 to 165MHz 25 to 165MHz 12 bit output to 150MHz 4 Frequencies which Always OFF 100 001 to 100 001 to 25 to 165MHz output simultaneously with 165MHz 165MHz analog DVI priority 2 Output audio sampling 32 to 48kHz 32 to 192kHz 32 to 192kHz 32 to 192kHz Output audio channels Output audio channels channels Max 2 channels 2 channels Max 8 channels 8 channels Max 8 channels 8 channels Max 8 chan
305. reflecting the data changes After the settings have been changed press the SET key to reflect the data These changes will be retained until the power is turned off Saving the data changes The data is saved on the flash ROM inside the VG 859C It can be saved at any time while the setting menu of config edit FUNG3 is open 1 Press the SAVE key The SAVE key LED blinks and a prompt asking whether data is to be saved appears on the display Save Cfg Data SAVE or ESC Fig 3 2 3 Saving the data 2 Press the SAVE key The data is saved and the SAVE key LED goes off Do not turn off the power before the SAVE key LED has gone off Malfunctioning may occur if it is turned off in error while the LED is still lighted 3 3 Detailed settings for the items 1 Setting the group number Select the group number 0 to 99 Use the number keys to input the group number Factory setting 0 Cfg Group No 0 00 99 Fig 3 3 1 Selecting the group number When 0 is selected the data is output in the direct display mode Refer to Direct output direct display mode in 4 1 1 When a number other than 0 is selected the corresponding group number is output in the group display mode Refer to Group data output group display mode in 4 1 2 2 Setting the beep tone Select ON or OFF for the beep tone Cfg Beep ON 0 1 Fig 3 3 2 Selecting the beep tone Table 3 3 1 Beep
306. rlay cursor of config edit Low Priority level Graphic plane e Color bar e Gray scale Character plane e Character e Crosshatch e Dot e Circle e Burst e Program name Window plane e Window Cursor plane 2 e Cursor Set each pattern data HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH F fF F rm HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH fF fF F ee HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH ge HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH fF mr HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH E 11 1 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH TETEN HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH fF fF VESA600 72 There are no items to be set for 0 and Optional patterns differ from the other patterns since they have window character and graphic plane data They cannot be superimposed onto any patterns other than cursor and program name Fig 6 1 1 Configuration of pattern data 6 1 2 Basic operations for settings The pattern data setting menu is accessed from program edit FUNC2 PC card edit FUNC3 or direct display While referring to Table 6 1 1 below select the pattern data whose settings are to be changed and set the data details For the data setting items and setting procedures refer to the page concerned in the reference page column of the table 1 When using the program e
307. rolling using direct display FUNCO cannot be operated while another function is being executed Example While the Teletext function executed is being executed Output pattern scrolling is set using direct display FUNCO Initiated by the FORMAT key 1 key etc Teletext executed Scrolling not executed if a multiple number of functions have been set simultaneously by the SP 8848 and a program has been executed the functions with the highest priority alone will be executed The order of priority is as follows 1 HDCP 2 Closed caption V chip 3 Macrovision 4 Teletext 5 Audio sweep 6 Pattern action Example 818 HDCP Teletext and flicker pattern action are set to ON HDCP executed Teletext not executed Flicker not executed 12 4 5 Concerning the video output connectors Signals are output from the video output connector under the following conditions 1 Priority output port setting refer to 5 4 11 Setting the DVI output mode and priority output port The signals are output based on the output connector which has been set as the priority output port The signals will be output from output connectors which have not been set as the priority output port if the conditions are met 2 Output connector conditions Signals are output from the output connectors when the conditions inherent to those connectors are met 1 Concerning the priority output port The output
308. rox 160 000 colors 256 colors each for R G and B approx 160 000 colors 256 colors each for R G and B approx 160 000 colors 256 colors each for R G and B approx 160 000 colors 1024 colors each for R G and B approx 1 billion colors 4096 colors each for R G and B approx 68 7 billion colors 4096 colors each for R G and B approx 68 7 billion colors No of output bits 8bitx3 24bit 10bitx3 30bit 12bitx3 36bit 12bitx3 36bit 8bitx3 24bit 10bitx3 30bit 12bitx3 36bit 12bitx3 36bit Differences between standard mode 8 bits and multi bit mode Frequency restrictions Resolution output Analog 5 to 300MHz 25 to 165MHz DVI 25 to 165MHz 4096x4096 25 to 165MHz 25 to 150MHz 25 to 165MHz 25 to 165MHz Analog 5 to 165MHz 2048x2048 DVI 25 to 165MHz 25 to 165MHz 25 to 150MHz 25 to 165MHz Multi bit support is provided by HDMI outputs only Even in the same mode only the higher 8 bits are output for the other outputs Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE OPTION 8 2 Settings to be changed Some settings are different between the standard mode 8 bits and multi bit mode 8 2 1 Changes in level settings In the multi bit mode the settings related to the level are established as set forth below in accordance with the video format Table 8 2 1 Changes in level settings Description Reference 8
309. s reappeared Copying group data Group Data Copy 1 Input the group number 1 to 99 serving as the copy source and press the SET key Group Data Copy Source Group 1 Fig 4 4 13 Inputting the copy source group number 2 To copy the data on one PC card onto another PC card replace the PC card with the one which will serve as the copy destination 3 Input the group number 1 to 99 serving as the copy destination and press the SET key Group Data Copy Dist Group 2 Fig 4 4 14 Inputting the copy destination group number The data is now written into the copy destination 4 To copy other group data repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Copying auto display data Auto Data Copy 1 Insert the PC card serving as the copy source and press the SET key Auto Data Copy Set Source amp Push SET Fig 4 4 15 Setting up the copy source PC card 2 Insert the PC card serving as the copy destination and press the SET key Auto Data Copy Set Dist amp Push SET Fig 4 4 16 Setting up the copy destination PC card The data is now written into the copy destination 3 To copy other auto display data repeat the above steps after the screen in step 1 has reappeared Erasing all the data on a card Card Erase 1 Insert the PC card all of whose data is to be erased and press the SET key Card E
310. s in the multi bit mode If any of the restrictions apply perform the operations with the bit mode set to 8 bits Table 8 3 1 Other restrictions Output Analog outputs The maximum frequency of analog outputs is 165 MHz BNC Dsub D5 DVI A Composite output timing data such as NTSC data refer to 11 4 Standard signal timing signal specificataions cannot be output VBS output The VBS output is always OFF Concerning the FEATURES 9 1 Overview The VG 859C allows patterns that support xvYCC to be set using HDMI output What xvYCC Maintaining the color range specified by conventional RGB xvYCC Extended YCC Colorimetry for Video Applications allows for a greater range of color reproduction by providing a broader color space This allows the reproduction of colors that cannot be expressed using conventional RGB values that would be negative or exceed one if represented using RGB 9 2 Output Method for xvYCC Patterns Make the settings given below to express xvYCC patterns The setting made here is an example setting that displays a color space that cannot be expressed using conventional RGB Refer to this sample and edit as necessary according to your application Table 9 2 1 Setting Example for xvYCC Pattern Output HDMI setting VideoFormat When using the RGB setting You can create patterns using the Y value for G the Cb value for B and the Cr value for R When using th
311. s the copy source Table 4 9 3 Copy source ROM type selection method K LCD display ROM Panel ROM type 0 0 2 CD display ROM type 58C65P 0 58 65 Fig 4 9 4 Selecting the ROM type as 58 256 the copy source AH 3000 6 Press the 9 key to move to the next page and enter the program numbers of the copy source and copy destination using the number keys Table 4 9 4 Restrictions on copy range by data copied and ROM types Copy source existing model Src Prg No 001 010 Dst Prg No 005 015 Data copied 58C65P 58C256P AH 3000 Copy destination VG 859B Program data 001 to 040 001 to 740 001 to 779 Fig 4 9 5 Entering the copy source Group data 01 to 02 01 to 40 01 to 08 and destination program numbers 7 Press the SET key The data is now copied If data outside the setting range of the VG 859C is included in the copied program data the program data concerned will be disabled 4 10 Setting and executing HDCP HDCP set FUNCC The first step to take to execute HDCP is to set the conditions using HDCP set FUNCC 4 10 1 HDCP settings Depending on what has been set by HDCP set FUNGG further settings are required for each program 4 10 2 HDCP settings for each program data After the above settings have been established execute HDCP using direct display FUNCO 4 10 3 HDCP execution 4 10 1 HDCP settings Using HDCP set perform steps
312. screen center can be calculated but when they are set to even numbers the point which is the first dot to the right of the center and the first line below it is used as the actual screen center Hdisp even numbered dot count 1 2 1 2 1st line 1H Vdisp even numbered below center line count 1st dot to right of center Fig 6 6 5 Screen center 6 7 Setting the circle pattern The format and aspect ratio are set for the circle pattern data Set the format and aspect ratio of the display Format 0 0 6 Aspect H 0 V 0 Fig 6 7 1 Setting the format and aspect ratio Table 6 7 1 Format and aspect ratio setting method Format Format 0 Format Single circle Center 1 2 1 2V e Radius 1 3 Format 1 e Concentric circles 1 e Center 1 2H 1 2V e Radius from center 1 6V 1 3V 1 2V 1 2H Format 2 e Format 1 4 circles with 1 6V radius 3 Format 3 e Concentric circles 2 e Center 1 2H 1 2V e Radius from center addition of other circles inside 1 6V 1 3V 1 2V circles whose radii are 1 2 of the original 3 Format 4 e Consecutive circles with 1 6V radius e Circles are displayed symmetrically both horizontally and vertically with the center 1 2H V 2V serving as the reference Format 5 Single circle painted out e Center 1 2H 1 2V e Radius 1 3V Format 6 e 5 circles with 1 6V radius painted out Aspect ratio Number keys XXX Setting range 0 to 255 Aspect H V 1 Perf
313. se character AI F3H Chinese character F2H Pe 5 rt dh v ven ons 5 v ENG E 2 ERE Dre 4444 T TM In T M d de rn 5 n abe 5 ui 99 m de i rv 3 e whe 5 aero z sonene gt Chinese character TAKA F5H Chinese character KIRI F4H 3 5 gt 5 3 gt gt VED MN RAR EEE 11549544 BENRWEERSEEEERNSEESREENEENMEMN e on EEE EE GERNE um E NE NE i 5 3 i E H m 5 5 E E 3 E IRE ree ar 2 gt vener 5 5 x 2 Th H EN I Dun So ag 2 5 5 i H BENNENEESEENSEERNESEERASEEN RESRERRRRORRREANM H x t 2 3 xt t INC 5 M xw 2 D eerte 3 5 Chapter 11 REFERENCE F6H Chinese character KEN F7H Burst F6H Spe IE III IG cree E 1 3 3 2
314. splay Program Name List Prog E D DotClock H Freqg V Freq Name 850 31 50MHz 37 86KHz 85 08Hz VESA400 85 Character List 851 31 50MHz 37 86KHz 72 81Hz VESA480 72 Words 852 31 50 2 37 50KHz 75 VESA480 75 H Character 1 Fig 4 7 6 Example of what is shown on the display Group Name List When the number 2 digits 01 to 99 of the group to be displayed first is input using the number keys the data in that group appears on the display first and it is followed by the data of the subsequent programs Select Grp No Top 1 Group Name List Fig 4 7 7 LCD display Group Name List NO NAME 1 Group Data 1 2 Group Data 2 3 Group Data 3 Fig 4 7 8 Example of what is shown on the display Chapter 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Name List When the number 2 digits 40H to 7FH of the optional pattern to be displayed first is input using the number keys the data of that optional pattern appears on the display first and it is followed by the data of the subsequent programs A letter from A to F can be input by pressing the SHIFT key followed by one of the number keys Select OPT No Top 40 OPT Name List Fig 4 7 9 LCD display Number of used blocks in 1KB increments on PC Number of unused blocks in 1KB increments on PC card List Block UsedzXXXXX Unused XXXXX NO SIZE NAME 40 506 256 Block Color SIZE Number of byt
315. splay mode Character edit This edits the user character patterns and Tests and evaluations p 62 registers them undertaken by development and engineering departments List display This lists the registered data on the display Tests and evaluations p 64 undertaken by development and engineering departments A YPbPr coefficient This edits the coefficient tables for the YPbPr p 69 table edit data output Panel ROM copy This copies the program data of an existing VG p 71 model 2 with which PC cards cannot be used onto a PC card C HDCP setting This sets the HDCP mode T p Calibration This calibrates the signal output levels pe p 83 Reserved for IA series 3 1 When 0 has been selected as the group number setting of config edit FUNCS the direct display mode is established when a number from 1 to 99 has been selected the group display mode is established 2 VG 813 823 826A and 827 3 Consult Astrodesign separately concerning the IA series of interface conversion adapters 2 2 Operating mode when the generator s power is just turned on The VG 859C has four operating modes The operating mode can be selected by operating a key when the generator s power is being turned on Table 2 2 1 Operating mode and key operation when the power is just turned Key operation Operating mode When the POWER switch is set to ON The VG 859C starts up in the direct display mode o
316. t This section provides details on the settings of Gamut Meta Data Packet For details on Gamut Meta Data Packet refer to HDMI standard High Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Table 5 12 1 Reference pages for setting details Reference page 1 omaneanaapaset onor Next Field 000000000000 Field p 179 _ _ _ Packet Seq secs _ 11 Packeted GBD Vertices TR p 183 Vertices Data Packeted Range Data Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 1 Setting the gamut meta data packet ON OFF HE EE EE EN GEN HEEN GEN HEEN ee Packet ON OFF Gamut Meta Data ON 0 1 Fig 5 12 1 Setting the gamut meta data packet ON OFF Table 5 12 2 Packet ACP ISRC1 ISRC2 ON OFF setting method Setting item Gamut Meta Data Packet ON OFF OFF The packets concerned are not sent The packets concerned are sent 2 Setting the next field no current GBD ll HEEN
317. t and HDwidth Table 5 2 6 HDstart and HDwidth setting method HDstart Number XX XXuS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot keys XXXXdot HDwidth Number XX XXuS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot keys XXXXdot The sum of HDstart and HDwidth cannot be set in excess of Hperiod The settings can be edited to ensure data compatibility with other models but they will be ignored by the VG 859B Set the sum within the following range HDstart HDwidth lt Hperiod 5 3 Setting the vertical timing data 5 3 1 Vertical timing data The figure below shows how the vertical timing data is set and what the various parts are called In non interlace progressive scanning mode Serration EQPfp EQPbp Vsync Vbackp Vfrontp Vtotal VDstart VDline e In interlace scanning mode Serration EQPfp EQPbp Vdisp Vsyne M vpackp virontpso SH _ N Vbackp 0 5H Vtotal 0 5H Vtotal 0 5H VDline VDline VDstart 0 5H Fig 5 3 1 Vertical timing data Abbreviations used in text HS Horizontal sync signal Vfrontp and Vblanking are calculated from the values of other VS Vertical sync signal setting items and as such their values cannot be input directly CS Composite sync signal e Vfrontp Vtotal Vdisp Vsync Vbackp e Vblanking Vtotal Vdisp only in non interlace scanning mode in the interlace scann
318. t increments with a dot clock frequency from 100 001 to 200 MHz 4 dot increments with a dot clock frequency from 200 001 to 250 MHz Hbackp Number XX XXuS Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us to 4096 dot keys XXXXdot Hfrontp Hfrontp is automatically calculated from the values of Hperiod Hdisp Hsync and Hbackp Calculation formula Hfrontp Hperiod Hdisp Hsync Hbackp Setting range 0 00 to 99 99 us 0 to 4096 dot Even when items have been set in microseconds ensure that the settings come within the prescribed setting ranges in terms of the numbers of dots Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES e 11707 is set for Hfrontp set Hsync to at least 2 dots when dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 200 MHz or at least 4 dots when it is 200 001 to 250 MHz Set Hfrontp within a range of 64 to 4096 dots when the dot clock frequency is 100 001 to 200 MHz and the Hperiod setting is in an increment of other than 2 dots or within a range of 128 to 4096 dots when the frequency is 200 001 to 250 MHz and the Hperiod setting is in an increment of other than 4 dots e During interlace scanning set Hfrontp to at least 2 dots when the dot clock frequency is 5 to 100 MHz at least 4 dots when it is 100 001 to 200 MHz or at least 8 dots when it is 200 001 to 250 MHz 0 cannot be set 4 Setting HDstart and HDwidth HDstart 0 00uS Qdot HDwidth 0 00uS Odot Fig 5 2 5 Setting HDstar
319. tasy Violence Acts of fantasy violence violence in animated features and comics V Violence Violence S Sexual Situations Sexual content Adutl Language Foul language Sexually Suggestive Dialog Sexually suggestive dialog m 9 Table 5 9 14 U S ratings and extension bits which can be set Extension bit can be set 0 0 2 D D 42 _ gt ejeje U S TV rating 4 Setting the Canadian English and Canadian French rating systems VChipEnglish E 0 6 VChipFrench E 0 5 Fig 5 9 8 Setting the Canadian English and French ratings Table 5 9 15 Canadian English rating setting method Canadian Exempt is set as the Canadian English rating English ratin gi Ing Children is set as the Canadian English rating VChipEnglish Children eight years and older is set as the Canadian English rating 3 G General programming suitable for all audiences is set as the Canadian English rating Parental guidance is set as the Canadian English rating Viewers 14 years and older is set as the Canadian English rating 6 o Adult programming is as the Canadian English rating Names and descriptions of Canadian English ratings E Exempt PG Parental Guidance No age restrictions apply Permission of a parent required to view Children programming Programming may be viewed by all children 1
320. te output timing signals in 11 4 Standard signal timing signal specifications are output 3 When changes are made to the following settings from the settings of the timing signals which can be output the VBS and Y C outputs are turned off e Dot clock frequency e Scanning mode Hperiod e Vtotal e Hsync e Vsync 4 When 16 235 has been set for the DVI level mode see 15 Setting the digital level mode of config edit 5 the VBS and Y C outputs are turned off 5 When the multi bit mode has been set as the FUNC5 HDMI output bit mode refer to 3 3 33 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional function the VBS output is always OFF 6 The Y Pb and Pr component signals cannot be set to ON or OFF They are always ON The RGB component signals can be set to ON or OFF 2 D connector output 1 With internal programs the initial setting is only for RGB YPbPr output signals which have been set to YPbPr 2 When the scroll trigger function see 31 Setting the scroll trigger optional function of config edit 5 is set to ON no line signals are output regardless of the scroll setting 3 DVI output 1 The timing signal settings of the DVI output are subject to the following restrictions Mode Setting item Setting range and restriction Single Link Dot clock frequency 25 to 165MHz All horizontal timing signals When the dot clock frequency is 25 to 100 MHz 1 dot
321. ted The program data stored on PC cards can be directly edited from a PC connected through the RS 232C interface or LAN Registration of program data on a PC card A total of 859 program data can be registered on a PC card PC screens or natural images can also be registered On a notebook PC or other PC equipped with a PC card slot the data can be copied using Explorer provided with Windows 98SE Windows 2000 or Windows XP Creation of optional patterns In addition to the conventional basic patterns 11 types including character crosshatch color bar and gray scale and optional patterns up to 64 types can be incorporated a function that allows users to create their own optional patterns has been added This function makes it possible to create the optional patterns which are useful for developing and evaluating the next generation displays Sample data incorporated inside A total of 450 types of timing data and 450 types of pattern data are registered inside the VG 859C as sample data They can be combined in any way and the resulting signals output They come in handy when a PC card is not being used The sample data can also be used when editing program data Windows compatible editing and registration software SP 8848 provided as standard accessory This software which runs in Windows can be used to edit and register the program data and exercise control over the signal output 1 3 Chapter 1 CONCERNING TH
322. tempt will be made to capture data If Disable is selected the EDID is not captured and patterns are displayed Select the Disable setting when the unit connected does not support DDC For optional patterns No 22H and 23H the port is fixed and EDID is captured regardless of the above settings No 22H Fixed to DVI port No 23H Fixed to D Sub port 11 Setting the address and port number Set the IP address and port number IP 192 168 1 1 PortNo 8000 Fig 3 3 11 Setting the IP address and port number Table 3 3 12 IP address and port number setting method IP address Number XXX XXX XXX XXX_ Use these keys to set the IP address of the IP keys VG 859C Setting range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Factory setting 192 168 0 2 Port number Number XXXXX Use these keys to set the number of the port keys on the VG 859C to be used for receiving data Setting range 1024 to 65535 Factory setting 8000 e same IP address and port number settings as the configuration settings of the accessory software program SP 8848 must be selected e IP address of the unit such as a PC connected to the VG 859C requires the same network address as the IP address of the VG 859C e The VG 859C supports IP address classes A B and C IP address Class D also exists but since the addresses in this class are special IP addresses used for multi cast communication they
323. th specified in GBD ColorPrecision 8bit 3 96875 to 3 96875 FFh to 7Fh 10bit 3 9921875 to 3 9921875 to 1FFh 12bit 3 998046875 to 3 998046875 FFFh to 7FFh There may be some deviations in the set value of the packeted range data due to limitations in the number of significant figures applied to the data transmission 6 1 6 1 1 High Select the patterns to be IO output using pattern select o GRAY WINDOW CHARA CIRCLE 0 a PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Configuration of pattern data and basic operations Configuration of pattern data The pattern data consists of a total of 15 data namely the patterns such as character and crosshatch graphic color which sets the colors of the patterns pattern select 1 which sets the patterns to be output and the pattern action which set the scroll flicker and other pattern movements See Table 6 1 1 All the patterns selected by pattern select are superimposed onto one another and displayed on the pattern display Patterns are divided into four planes When patterns are superimposed and displayed the planes with the higher priority levels are displayed in the foreground 1 Patterns can also be selected using the output control keys and INV 2 The cursor plane is superimposed onto the other patterns and displayed only when ON has been selected for 29 Setting the ove
324. the scroll trigger output cable 32 Setting the extended character for closed caption A A __ Set the extended character for closed caption Cfg Closed Caption Ext Chara Mode 0 0 1 Fig 3 3 38 Selecting extended character mode Table 3 3 35 Extended character mode selection method _____ Space mode is selected Substitute character mode is selected For details on extended character mode refer to 5 9 2 5 Treating extended character 1331 Setting the HDMI output bit mode optional function GNE EE EE EE EE EE Select the HDMI output bit mode Cfg Bits Output Mode 0 1 Fig 3 3 39 Selecting the output bit mode Table 3 3 36 Output bit mode selection method SBIT The patterns are drawn using 8 bits Factory setting MULTI BIT The patterns are drawn in the multi bit mode For details on the multi bit mode refer to Chapter 8 MULTI BIT MODE 4 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT AND DATA REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Output of video signals direct display FUNCO The video signals of the program data stored internally or registered on PC cards are output using the direct display In addition the program data settings be changed but not saved while the signals are being output Two operating modes the direct display mode a
325. the window can be designated WIN LEVEL Format F The window RGB level can be varied automatically by operating the A B C Eor F key when direct display FUNCO is executed 1 window 4 1 6 Changing the window RGB levels Format diagrams Next page 3 16 windows 4 25 windows 5 64 windows 6 3 windows in a vertical row 7 3 windows horizontal row 3 Horizontal scrolling 9 Vertical scrolling up and down A Scrolling to the right left and right Scrolling to the left C Scrolling up D Scrolling down Window position designation Window RGB level change Fig 6 11 2 Formats Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 2 Set the horizontal and vertical widths and the window color RGB Width H 20 0 V 20 0 R 255 6 255 B 255 Fig 6 11 3 Setting the horizontal and vertical widths and the window color Table 6 11 2 Horizontal and vertical width and window color setting method Setting item Key LCD display Setting range Width Width Number In the mode 0 0 to 100 0 keys H V y XXXX In the dot mode 1 to 9999 dot Window color Number XXX to 255 keys Examples of H V width settings when H width 160 dots or 20 V width 120 dots or 20 lt Example 1 When format 0 1 window is used gt In the dot mode H width h 160 dot V width v 120 dot h 160 dots lt
326. time then commands will be sent at the moment when the program concerned has been selected Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 16 2 Details of settings The CEC function data is set as follows The items to be set differ depending on the CEC operation mode Only the items required can be set 1 VG generator settings Set the CEC function mode and logical address of the VG generator itself CEC Monitor 0 2 VG Logical Addr Oh 0 Fig 6 16 2 Setting the CEC operation mode and logical address Table 6 16 1 operation mode and logical address setting method CEC operation o Monto For selecting the monitoring mode mode For selecting the command transmission mode For selecting the command response mode Logical Address Number X Setting range 0 to Fh keys For setting the logical address of the VG generator 2 Setting the Tx data Establish the settings which are to be sent from the VG generator Tx Destination Oh 0 F Fig 6 16 3 Setting the destination address Table 6 16 2 Destination address setting method X Destination Number Setting range 0 to Fh Logical Address keys For setting the logical address of the destination address of the device to which the data is to be sent to which the data is sent by the VG generator Tx Op Code Oh 00 FF Parameter Num O 0 14 Fig 6 16 4 Setting the operation code and parameter number
327. ting of the VG 859C and measuring two actual output levels both values are compensated 1 Press the 9 key to move to the next page 2 Asin the table below press the key 0 1 key for the level to be adjusted DACOutput MIN 0 1 Fig 4 11 3 Selecting the reference voltage level Table 4 11 1 Reference voltage level selection method JMN Reference voltage level 1 approx 1000 is output Reference voltage level 2 approx 1500mV is output 3 Press the SET key The DAC MIN or MAX OUT display appears The above reference voltage is now output for RGB each DACOutput MIN 0 1 DAC MIN OUT Fig 4 11 4 When reference voltage output is underway 4 Connect as shown below and measure the output voltage for RGB each using the multimeter VG 859B B Pb GIY R Pr 75 ohm terminator Multimeter 5 Press the SET key The output is turned off and the DAC MIN or MAX OUT display is cleared 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 and measure both reference voltage 1 and 2 3 Set and save the values of the measured reference voltages 1 Press the v key to move to the next page 2 Input the values measured 2 on the Min line for voltage 1 and on the line for voltage 2 using mV units in the sequence of R G and B from the left sign be switched to with the 0 key and to with the 1 key MinR 1000G 1000B 1000 MaxR 1500G 1500B 15
328. tion Interval 2 or 4 is used the conditions set will be repeated in sequence from 1 Example When a value other than 0 has been set for Action Interval 2 or 3 the following will be repeated Active Interval 1 gt 25 351 293 By means of this setting a number of different types of scrolling such as simulated 2 3 pulldown can be performed For normal scrolling set O for Action Interval 2 3 and 4 Pull down scrolling Using the scrolling function 2 3 pull down and other types of scrolling can be achieved artificially Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES What is 2 3 pull down This is a conversion system for harmonizing 30 fps frames per second 60 field NTSC signals with 24 fps films when converting regular movies and other film sources into video signals a process referred to as telecine The first frame of the film is converted into the equivalent of two fields and the second frame into the equivalent of three fields and these five fields are repeated for every two frames of the film so that 24 frames are made the equivalent of 60 fields Converting patterns in 24P format into 60i format 24p Pattern A Pattern B Pattern C 60i KEW 1 24 20 20 24 2 EX E 20 20 26 20 20 Pattern Pattern B Pattern C Pattern D Interval 2V Interval 3V Interval 2V Interval 3V moves 1 step moves
329. uantization range and extended colorimetry of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 11 AVI InfoFrame RGB quantization range and extended colorimetry setting method setingitem Desorption Limited Limited EN n 1 Setting the IT content of AVI InfoFrame Content No Data0 1 Fig 5 7 11 Setting the IT content of AVI InfoFrame Table 5 7 12 AVI InfoFrame IT content setting method IT Content No Data No Data IT Cont rT Gon Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 12 2 Setting t the type and version of SPD InfoFrame SPD InfoFrame Type 3 Ver 1 1 Fig 5 7 12 Setting the type and version of SPD InfoFrame 13 Setting t the vendor name of SPD InfoFrame VendorName end VENDOR Fig 5 7 13 Setting the vendor name of SPD InfoFrame Table 5 7 13 SPD InfoFrame vendor name setting method Vendor Name Input using number keys 8 characters SHIFT key or display 1 1 There are two ways to input the characters input the character codes 20H to directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However characters cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display F When inputting the Vendor Name move the cursor inside when exiting from the setting menu move it to end at the top right 1 4 Setting the product of SPD InfoFrame
330. up of graphics character and window planes Pattern action settings are used to make settings for each of these planes For details refer to Configuration of pattern data The action functions corresponding to each plane are as follows Table 6 15 1 Action Function Correspondence Setting item Scrolling Flicker Pee HERRE Lip Sync scrolling Movement scroll Graphic Character plane 1 Created image data is used for simple image movement 2 Half pixel scroll is an optional function Created image data is used 6 15 1 Setting the scrolling function The following items are set for each plane with regard to the scroll function Table 6 15 2 Scrolling setting method Plane to be Planetobeset Setting item Description Graphic plane comme Sos Window plane Scrolling ON OFF G SCR C SCR W SCR Scroll execution for each plane ON OFF Execution ateral Action Interval 1 to 4 used for each plane Specifies the action interval many V to move the step amount once Ste G amp C Step1 to 4 used for graphics W Step1 to 4 The amount of movement per action character planes interval 1 Setting the pattern execution interval Action Interval1 1V 1 255 Fig 6 15 1 Setting the execution interval Table 6 15 3 Execution interval setting method interval Action Interval 2 3 4 Number keys 0 to 255 0 when no interval is going to be used When Ac
331. ure for selecting the characters from the display is described here 1 Connect the display device to the VG 859C and check that the display appears correctly 2 Onthe LCD screen move the cursor to the position where the characters are to be input for a program name for instance and press the LEVEL key The LED of the LEVEL key lights and the characters appear on the display Cursor Indicates what is being selected amp 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ NIS abcdefghijklmno parstuvwxyz i TB SN AC 27 F11 JIJ HI ARUWTRTLAXTZISNEZ RX X SLAEVAADVILVLADY Fig 2 4 1 What is displayed on the screen 3 While referring the table below input the characters Table 2 4 1 Function keys 1 to 4 6 to 9 Used to move the cursor over the display in the direction of the arrows of the number keys Used to enter one character which has been input The entered character appears on the display 0 CLR Used to move the cursor on the display to the top left 4 Press the LEVEL key The LED of the LEVEL key goes off and operation returns to the status in which the character codes are input directly 2 5 to insert and eject the PC cards 2 5 1 How to insert PC card 1 Insert the PC card into the slot in the direction indicated by the arrow on th
332. uto Select For identifying the monitor support mode and establishing access DDC Factory setting DE Enhanced DDC For For accessing EDID in enhanced mode EDID in the enhanced For accessing EDID in enhanced mode mode i Plug amp Display For accessing EDID in the Plug amp Display DDC mode DDC Chapter 3 VG 859C SYSTEM SETTINGS Concerning the DDC read mode There are two DDC read methods Enhanced DDC and Plug and Display DDC The EDID data in up to 4 blocks is accessed as shown below 1 Enhanced DDC This method is used for access with the segment pointer Table 3 3 21 Enhanced DDC mode access S Pointer Device Address Sub Address 2 Plug amp Display DDC This method is used for access with the segment pointer Table 3 3 22 Plug amp Display DDC mode access Concerning Auto amp Select DDC In the Auto Select DDC mode operations are performed as shown in the diagram below StartEDIDread Access by Plug amp Display egment pointer supported DDC method Yes Access by Enhanced DDC n thod Fig 3 3 23 Auto Select DDC mode operations 22 Setting the HDMI automatic reflection Select ON or OFF for the automatic reflection of the InfoFrame and ACP ISRC packet timing data item settings When automatic reflection is set to ON the settings for the items on the left side of Table 3 3 24 on the next page are reflected in the InfoFrame and A
333. utput connector for executing HDCP HDMI Other HDMI output OFF with YPbPr output Always RGB output except for HDMI VBS output always OFF 2 dot increments 2 dot increments 4 dot increments 4 dot increments Dot clock frequency X Cannot be output Can be output dot increment Restriction on horizontal timing setting Chapter 5 TIMING DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 12 Setting the aspect ratio This setting selects the aspect ratio in which the patterns are drawn It takes effect only when circle patterns are output or when optional pattern No 7 8 9 17 1E 1F 25 26 34 or 3D is output Aspect Mode 4 3 0 3 User 1V 1 1 255 Fig 5 4 12 Setting the aspect ratio Table 5 4 14 Aspect ratio setting method display Aspect Mode 3 User The aspect ratio is set to the ratio which has been input on the second line of the setting screen shown on the LCD display see figure above 1 3 Setting the AFD Aspect and AFD Type These settings are for the AFD pattern optional pattern No 1F which is used to evaluate the aspect ratio under the EIA CEA 861 standard Refer to Concerning the AFD pattern for evaluating the aspect ratio presented later in these instructions AFD Aspect 4 3 0 1 AFD 0 0 12 Fig 5 4 13 Setting the AFD Aspect and AFD Type Table 5 4 15 AFD Aspect and AFD Type setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display
334. window RGB level is set to one of 16 levels Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES Table 6 11 4 Scrolling speed setting method Formats 8 to D Scrolling speed 1V 1 dot The pattern is moved by the Flicker 2 dots 2 dots in 1V 2 ws m ses 1V 8 dots s s 0 Table 6 11 5 Level change speed setting method Formats F O Level change 0 1V 1 level 1V once per V period The RGB level is changed by one level at the designated time s w 4 Set the window center position but only for format Format E 1 20 0 20 0 Pos 2 80 0 80 0 Fig 6 11 5 Setting the window center position Table 6 11 6 Window center position setting method Setting item Key LCD display Description Window center position Number XXX X XXX X The window center position is designated Format E Pos keys Setting range 0 0 to 100 0 1 2 H V 1 When 0 0 has been set for 2 one window with 1 serving as the center position is displayed When 2 is not 0 0 Windows are formed from the sections produced by AND ing the area bounded by the widths of the H and V settings with 1 serving as the center position with the area bounded by the widths of the H and V settings with 2 serving as the center position 0 100 0 When 2 is 0 0 A window is formed from
335. xample When 0 is set for the format 5 for the interval and 1 the step dot gt 2906 gt 3006 gt 5 5 Fosse 5 lines Fig 6 10 2 Example of burst pattern setting Chapter 6 PATTERN DATA CONFIGURATION AND SETTING PROCEDURES 6 11 Setting the window pattern The following items are set for the window pattern data 1 Mode and format 2 Width and window color RGB 3 Format related items flicker interval scrolling speed level change speed 4 Window center position format E only 5 Display time and RGB level only when flicker interval 8 4LEVEL has been selected for formats 0 7 or E 1 Set the mode and format Mode 0 1 Format 1 WINDOW 0 Fig 6 11 1 Setting the mode and format Table 6 11 1 Mode and format setting 0 Mode mode The widths horizontal vertical are set as a percentage 0 Dot mode widths horizontal vertical set as a number of dots The window pattern is divided into the designated number Flicker operation can be set o nwmow 5 Fomst6 9windowsina hi Format Format The window pattern is scrolled in the designated direction 1 window s LRSCROLL Fonnar 8 Horzoriat soroting eR andigh 00000 uoscmou fomevesessewelpamdoey _ tscmou _ p pscnou User POS Format E The position of
336. y 10113 1019 1081219 ul 10 43 MOSHND y Ul 10413 1019 14 140 43 O eui y 10113 10119 WOW ysel eui UO seu 10119 91UM V 10119 NOM YSE a 777 de 86 JO 94 10 195 ueeq seu e gesiq DAA 30 140 pesn si JOOLIND 8 88 USYM ueeq zou seu 1051 941 2 JON SI 20 esneoeq pesn eq jouueo uonounj 94 me peJejsiboJ zou seu 94 JON y jo y Y42949 Jequunu y 10413 10119 ON xm ueeq SuJa ed pejeueueB Jesn ON Nid 140 u19yed y JO y 2949 Jequunu y 10 13 10119 ON 140 m pled 94 uo ou BU pled uo eoeds OU SI pJe2 IN y BSN UBD uoiuM
337. y The value in milliseconds is calculated from the H setting and horizontal sync frequency and displayed ms mode A value is input in ms units gt H setting and display The H value is calculated from the ms input value set and displayed ms display The value is re calculated from the H setting and horizontal sync frequency and displayed i settings for Vtotal and Vdisp can be fixed If this is the case they take priority over the input mode and these fixed settings will be used Fig 5 3 3 Differences by scanning mode When the interlace mode has been selected set the number of scanning lines for one field in the vertical timing data items 2 Setting the field mode The field mode is set when the interlace amp sync mode or interlace amp video mode has been selected as the scanning mode setting See previous page V Field Mode 1 Field 1 2 Fig 5 3 4 Setting the field mode Table 5 3 3 Field mode setting method Setting item Key LCD Description display Field mode 1 1 Field 1 field mode V Field Mode The same setting is used in both the 1st field and 2nd field Vdisp1 Vsync1 Vbackp1 Vfrontp1 EQPfp1 EQPbp1 2 2 Field 2 field mode Different settings are used in the 1st field and 2nd field 1st field Vdisp1 Vsync1 Vbackp1 Vfrontp1 2nd field Vdisp2 Vsync2 Vbackp2 Vfrontp2 2 field mode 1st field 2nd field Vtotal 0 5H Vtotal 0 5H Vblanking Vblanking EQPfp1 E
338. y or input from displayed in the all one character or the display 1 corner amp center format Setting range 20 to FF Cell size Cell Number keys XXX XXX This sets the display size of one H V character Setting range 1 to 255 dot 1 There are two ways to input the characters input the character codes 20H to directly or select the characters from the display refer to 2 4 How to input characters from the display However characters cannot be input from the display if they have been edited using direct display Correlation between the font and cell size Example with 7 x 9 font and 16 x 16 cell size 7 dots Font Bg i III 7x9dots BI Bi ILI 9dots LI OOODRODOOGOOOGO Cell size 16 dots LILILIEIEIEIEIEIEIJEIETETEIETETE LILILIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIETIETEIETEITE LILILIEIEIEIJEIEIEJEIETETEIETIETE OEGOGOHOACO HCG size 16 dots Fig 6 4 3 Correlation between font and cell size 6 5 Setting the crosshatch pattern The following items are set for the crosshatch pattern data 1 Mode and format 2 Interval and line width 1 Set the mode and format Mode Line 0 1 Format from Center 0 1
339. y LCD Description display Black insertion function A black image is not inserted Normal setting ON OFF A black image is inserted in accordance with the Insert Black Frame position and time settings Insertion position Entire These select the position where the black Sel screen image is to be inserted Left half of screen Right Right half of screen Pattern display time ON Number XXX Setting range 0 to 255 V keys Black insertion time OFF Setting range 0 to 255 V keys lt Example When for the black insertion function Left for the insertion position 60 for the pattern display time and 30 for the black insertion time have been selected gt Normal display Black image inserted Normal display Black image inserted HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH Display time 60 V IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH Display time 30 V HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Display time 60 V IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH IHHHHHHH Display time 30 V Hereafter repeated 5 5 Setting the audio output data
340. y the data of the program on the display Select Prg No 850 Program Data List Fig 4 7 3 LCD display Horizontal sync Vertical sync Program No Program name frequency frequency Program data enable disable PROG NO NAME 5 400 85 850 37 86KHz 85 08Hz ENABLE MODE dot MODE gt H CLOCK 31 500MHz VTOTAL 11 754ms 4454 HPERI OD 26 41us 832dot VDI SP1 10 565ms 400H e HDI SP 20 32us 640dot VSYNCI 0 079ms 3 Horizontal timing HSYNC 2 03us 64dot 1 083 41H HBACKP 3 055 9600 0 00015 0 0H HDSTART 0 00us 0dot 0 000ms 0 0H Vertical timing HDWI DTH 0 00us 0dot SERRATION OFF EQP OFF VDSTART 0 000ms 0 0H ANA TTL ANALOG VDLI NE 0 000ms 0 HS NEGA SCAN NON INTER VS POSI CS NEGA SYNC ON VI DEO 0 70 V SYNC 0 30 V SETUP 0 00 V Freq 100 Hz RGB YPbPr RGB Freq R 100 Hz YPbPr No 0 Level L 0 Level R 0 iti D Connecter SWEEP OF F Output condition Sa Step eee Audio output Interlace Ti me 0 4 3 Freq 2 Fre 2 Fre 2 Ana BNC Ana Dsub Digi DVI DVI D Con S Connecter DVI Mode Use the gt or 4 key to move between the screens PROG NO 850 NAME VESA400 85 OR MAL DATA InfoFrame DATA Mode Vi deoFormat 2 Level Mode 5 Inf No Data UserLevel Bar Info not valied Max 255 Act Format not Data y R 0 2126 G 0 7152 B 0 0722 RGB or YCb RGB Cb
341. ying image data 1 data increments For copying image data 1 data increments image data in 1 data increments p p OPT Data Copy For copying user created optional patterns in 1 data p 56 increments Group Data Copy For copying group data in 1 group increments Auto Data For copying the auto display data 57 9 CardErase For erasing all the on the PC card 57 LEM All Copy For copying all the data on the PC card 1 Prog Data Erase For erasing the program data in 1 program p 59 increments Card Initialize For For initializing PC cards For initializing PC cards cards 3 The procedures described below differ depending on the type of copy function used Refer to the page concerned in the reference page column for each item Concerning the handling of PC cards For the steps to insert and eject the PC cards follow the steps in 2 5 How to insert and eject the PC cards Taking any other steps may damage the data on the PC card and make it impossible for the PC card to be recognized even when it is re inserted Copying data i in 1 increments 1 Prog Data Tim Data Pat Data Copy _ 1 Use the number keys to input the number 1 to 999 of the program whose data is to be copied and press the SET key VG 859C s internal programs No 850 to 1 P Data C 999 can also be selected as the copy source Source
342. ync signal CS composite sync signal COAX input connector coaxial Digital audio input connector BNC analog output connectors The RGB or YPbPr video signals are output from these connectors AUDIO input connectors The audio signals are input to these connectors 9 D connector Video signals complying with the D5 standard format are output from this connector RGB signals are output while the YPbPr key LED on the RB 1848 is off Only YPbPr output signals are ON in the case of internal programs NE ed a This is used to connect an optional remote control box RB 1848 RB 649 or RB 614C to operate the generator by remote control Ethernet port 10 100BaseT X This port is used for connection to a LAN using the Ethernet cable EE 15 D SUB 15 pin mini Analog output connector 16 AUDIO output connectors These are the audio output connectors Frequencies ranging from 100 Hz to 20 kHz can be set NTSC PAL SECAM Y C video output connector 18 VBS output connector NTSC PAL SECAM VBS composite video output connector 1 6 3 1848 ASTRO RB 1848 REMOTE BOX GHARA GROSS DOTS GIRGLE MUTE PROG TIMING fel SAVE LEVEL GRAY BURST This is used to connect the RB 1848 to the generator in the VG series 2 These keys are used to

1 CONCERNING THE VG-859C

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents